Home

Oracle Bills of Material User's Guide

1. L 3 27 Schedule Field esser mee teeth emep S neben sess 3 30 Charge Type Field 0 cece cee eens 3 30 Contents v Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Deleting Information eee 4 1 Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations 4 2 Deleting Components and Operations ssss 4 6 Deletion Constraints 0 0 00 cece eee eese 4 8 Configure to Order ossa esae eere ra ae 5 1 Overview of Configure To Order 6 0 00 cece ee eee 5 2 Information SOULCES cesses wes deer pe ORE E engi 5 2 Definitiofis 1 rer Rhetor ee eser Pe oder ad 5 3 BOM Support for CTO 0 ccc 5 4 Overview of Model and Option Class Bills of Material 5 5 Configure to Order Environments 0055 5 8 Model Bills of Material s ssis eer RE 5 8 Option Class Bills of Material 0 0 008 5 10 Multi Level Bills of Material 00 000s 5 11 Multi Organization Bills of Material 5 12 Standard Bills of Material 5 12 Option Quantity Ranges isses sce RR Rr Rh RR ER 5 13 Basis Option Class ssssessssseeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 14 ATP Check Controls eR be iets eee sai 5 15 Multi Organization Bills of Material Setup 5 17 Dependent Routing Steps for Discrete Manufacturing 5 18 Option Dependent Events for Flow Manufacturing 5 20 Operation Sequence Inheritance 000 e eee ee 5 20 Cataloging Configura
2. Copy Option 2 Future and Current 2 Enter the organization item alternate revision and revision date for the bill or routing that to copy 3 Select a copy option Current components or operations effective on the revision date Future and Current same as current and all future components and operations Note After you have copied information you can update it as you see fit 4 Choose the Copy and Save button Doing so copies the appropriate components or operations and automatically saves the new bill or routing See Also Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Bill Component Validation Rules page 2 46 2 16 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Referencing Common Bills and Routings Any two items that are of the same bill type can share common bills and routings If two different items share the same bill or routing you can define the bill or routing once and then maintain one copy instead of two The following notes apply to both bills and routings e You cannot reference another bill or routing as a common if that bill or routing also references a common In other words you cannot create a chain of common references e You can only reference another bill or routing as a common if it has the same alternate name assigned to it e Ifthe current bill you are creating is a manufacturing bill the common bill must also be a manufacturing bill Common Bills of Material If
3. 43 Basis page 2 43 Shipping Details page 2 44 Overview of Lead Time Management page 7 2 Viewing Item Usage page 2 34 Overview of Routings page 3 2 Bill of Material Structure Report page 8 7 Bills of Material 2 31 Comparing Bills of Material You can compare any two bills For example compare the primary to an alternate bill the same bill across organizations or the current revision of an item to a future revision Note The two assemblies and their attributes are referred to as Bill 1 and Bill 2 or simply as 1 and 2 gt To compare two bills of materials 1 Navigate to the Bill Components Comparison or the Report Bill of Material Comparison window Bill Components Comparison M1 D D 3 3 a a Quantit a Se Item RRT AANA EEEE Ie E B E I E WES le ie E E E Tl Bid ds ids ls ee rs m ms im m 2 Inthe Find Bills to Compare window enter selection criteria for Bill 1 Do the same for Bill 2 3 Check comparison criteria check boxes for the attributes to compare the bills on 4 Select an Order By option by item sequence then operation sequence or by operation sequence then item sequence 2 32 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also To view only the differences between bills check the Differences Only check box Choose the Compare button to compare the bills online If you ar
4. Configure to Order o1 Note If the Monitor is a model with a BOM supply type of phantom it will be treated like an option class Multi Organization Bills of Material Any non phantom model can be sourced from any organization or from a supplier In a multi level structure this means that the sub models can be made in an organization other than the parent To set up the BOM correctly in this environment create the BOM and routing for each model in its manufacturing organization In the example above the Laptop Model BOM and Routing may be created in the Seattle organization while the Monitor Model BOM and Routing may be created in the Chicago organization Each would have its corresponding option class and standard bills under the model If you are purchasing a configuration set up the model BOM in the receiving organization As with standard items sourcing rules are used to find the organization where the sub assembly is manufactured Standard Bills of Material 5 12 Standard bills are bills of material for manufactured products kits subassemblies phantoms or purchased assemblies Standard bills appear at the bottom levels of the indented structure In the example below the DOS option in the model bill for the Laptop Computer is a phantom item whose bill contains DOS Manual and DOS Diskettes Each time you order a Laptop Computer and choose the DOS option your configured bill will contain the DOS phantom item Orac
5. Purchased Item Basis Option Class You can define a basis of option class for PTO Option Class items This means Order Management prevents you from modifying the extended order quantity of the option class item You can still modify the extended quantity of the options below the PTO Option Class In the example below basis is set to Option Class for the Accessories option class item and the extended order quantity for the option class is 3 You cannot modify the extended order quantity for the Accessories option class You can however modify the extended order quantity for any of the options below the accessories option class 5 14 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Mouse LaserPrinter and Scanner The Peripherals Guide included item s extended quantity is based on the extended order quantity of the option class so this quantity cannot be changed by modifying the accessories option class The following table presents an example of a basis set to Option Class Qty Extend Level Item Item Type Basis Qty Ordered Qty 1 Promotional Laptop PTO Model n a i 3 3 22 Accessories PTO Option Class None 1 n a 3 2d n a 3 Mouse Option Option Class LaserPrinter Option n a Scanner Option n a Peripherals Gui Included Item n a de ATP Check Controls Oracle Manufacturing lets you specify the components in model and option class bills of material for which you want to check Av
6. 3 If you are creating an alternate routing enter an alternate Fora primary routing do not enter an alternate See Primary and Alternate Routings page 3 2 4 If you are updating an existing routing enter the routing revision and the effective date Routings 3 11 3 12 10 11 To update the revision choose the Routing Revisions button to open the Routing Revisions window See Creating a Routing Revision page 3 16 If you would like this routing to be capable to promise then choose the Capable to Promise button See Capable to Promise Oracle Master Scheduling MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning User s Guide Note Capable to promise describes an available to promise calculation that considers both available material and capacity of manufacturing and distribution resources You are able to define one and only one CTP routing for each item Select a display option to display All Current or Future and Current operations effective as of the revision date you specify To enter completion subinventory and locator information or view a common routing choose the Routing Details button to open the Routing Details window See Completion Subinventory and Locator page 3 27 Enter the operation sequence or let the system automatically generate it for you according to your profile setup See Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 To copy or reference standard operations into a routing use the Operat
7. If you selected Set in the previous step select one of the following Calculate Cumulative Lead Times Set GUI calculates cumulative lead times and produces the Bills of Material Structure Report Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times Set GUI calculates manufacturing lead times and produces the Routing Report If you selected Request in the previous step select Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times Indicate a range of items or a specific item If you chose a specific item enter the item Optionally enter a revision for the item Enter the date and time to snapshot the bill or routing All data effective as of this date and time are included in the calculation If you chose to calculate lead times for a range of items enter a beginning and ending range If you chose to calculate lead times for a range of items you may enter a category set to calculate the lead times of the items associated with this category set The default is the category set you defined for your functional area If you chose to enter a category set enter a beginning and ending category Manufacturing Lead Time Computations page 7 6 Bill of Material Structure Report page 8 7 Routing Report page 8 24 Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 Rolling Up Cumulative Lead Times Changes to the indented bill of material and component lead times can impact a parent item s cumulative lead times After each change made to a bill adding components
8. Monitors Monitor Operating Systems You could assign the Laptop Computer model and its options to catalog groups and assign elements as presented in the following table Catalog Groups for Model Item Catalog Group Element Name Element Value Laptop Computer Personal Computers Processor Type n a n a Monitor n a n a OS 386 Processor Processors Processor Type 486 Processor Processors Processor Type 5 38 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Item Catalog Group Element Name Element Value EGA Monitors Monitor Monitors Monitor Operating Systems OS Operating Systems OS When you define the bill of material for models and option classes you can specify a list of descriptive elements that the AutoCreate Configuration Item program should assign automatically to the configuration item In this example when you define the bill for the CPU VGA EGA and Operating System option classes you would specify a single descriptive element for each option class as shown in the table below Specify Descriptive Elements Item Item Type Element Name In the example where you order a Laptop Computer with a VGA1 monitor and 486 processor and a DOS operating system Bills of Material would automatically assign the following values to descriptive elements as presented in the following table Assign Descriptive Elements Configuration Item Catalog Group Element Name Element Value Laptop Personal C
9. Specify the parent items to change You can use a category set a category range or an item range Alternatively indicate whether to change all primary bills all primary and alternate bills or a specific alternate bill Optionally enter a base model to mass change configuration items related to this model that meets your other selection criteria Enter an item type for the parent items Choose the Changes button to enter component changes Caution If you do not wish to replace the values for the Suppy Type Supply Subinventory and Supply Locator fields you must enter the current value when executing a mass change If you leave the Supply Type Supply Subinventory and Supply Locator fields blank when entering component changes their values will be replaced by the blank null value when the mass change is executed When finished select the action s to take For Bills of Material select Report to see affected bills Implement to perform the mass change both or neither For Engineering select Report Create ECO both or neither If you make no selection the mass change order is saved for you to work on later Caution You cannot undo a mass change However you can create another mass change to reverse the effects of a previous mass change Choose the Submit button to launch the selected actions P Toenter component changes 1 2 Choose the Changes button on the Mass Change Bills window For e
10. firm A purchase order control When you firm an order Master Scheduling MRP uses the firm date to create a time fence within which it does not suggest new planned purchase orders cancellations or reschedule in actions It continues to suggest reschedule out actions for orders within the time fence If several shipments with different promised or need by dates reference the same item Master Scheduling MRP sets the time fence at the latest of all scheduled dates firm planned order An MRP planned order that is firmed using the Planner Workbench This allows the planner to firm portions of the material plan without creating discrete jobs or purchase requisitions Unlike a firm order a MRP firm planned order does not create a natural time fence for an item firm scheduled receipt A replenishment order that is not modified by any planning process It may be a purchase order discrete job or repetitive schedule An order is firm planned so that the planner can control the material requirements plan first unit completion date The date and time you plan to complete production of the first assembly on a repetitive schedule This date equals the first unit start date plus the lead time first unit start date The date and time you plan to begin production of the first assembly on a repetitive schedule This date equates to the start of your lead time Fixed Days Supply An item attribute the planning process uses to modi
11. 1 50 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide ree Bills of Material CHAPTER T his chapter provides you everything you need to know to define and use bills of material including Overview of Bills of Material page 2 2 e Primary and Alternate Bills of Material page 2 5 e Item and Routing Revisions page 2 6 Components page 2 7 e Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 e Creating Reference Designators page 2 20 e Attaching Files page 2 22 e Mass Changing Bills of Material page 2 24 e Viewing an Indented Bill of Material page 2 29 e Comparing Bills of Material page 2 32 e Viewing Item Usages page 2 34 e Bills of Material Field Reference page 2 36 e Bill Component Validation Rules page 2 46 e Creating a Product Family page 2 49 e Assiging Product Family Members page 2 50 Bills of Material 2 1 Overview of Bills of Material See Also Oracle Manufacturing and Oracle Order Management use bills of material to store lists of items that are associated with a parent item and information about how each item is related to its parent Oracle Manufacturing supports standard model option class and planning bills of material Bill of Material Types page 2 2 Primary and Alternate Bills of Material page 2 5 Item and Routing Revisions page 2 6 Components page 2 7 Access Control By Item Type page 2 9 Bill of Material Types Standard Bill of
12. Integrating Your Systems Oracle Manufacturing Implementation Manual Release 10 Setting Up 1 45 Bills of Material Profile Options During implementation you set a value for each user profile option to specify how Bills of Material controls access to and processes data The system administrator sets up and maintains profile values Profile Option Settings You can set or view profile options in Oracle Bills of Material The following table includes some profile options from other applications that are used by Oracle Bills of Material The second column User references the user while the next four columns User Resp App and Site reference the System Administrator The last two columns Required and Default Value reference requirements Profile Option Settings Default Profile Option Required Value BOM Automatic Optional Yes Reservations BOM Check for Duplicate Optional No Configuration BOM Component Item Optional 10 Sequence Increment BOM Configuration Item Optional No Delimeter BOM Configuration Item Optional No Type BOM Days Past Before Optional 0 Starting Cutoff of Order Management Bills BOM Default Bill of Optional 1 Material Levels BOM Default WIP Supply Optional Yes Values for Components BOM Hour UOM Optional 1 BOM Inherit Option Class Optional No Operation Sequence Number BOM Model Item Access e pu eI Optional Yes BOM Perform L
13. aisle bin or shelf locator control An Oracle Manufacturing technique for enforcing use of locators during a material transaction lockbox A service commercial banks offer corporate customers to enable them to outsource their accounts receivable payment processing Lockbox processors set up special postal codes to receive payments deposit funds and provide electronic account receivable input to corporate customers A lockbox operation can process millions of transactions a month logical organization A business unit that tracks items for accounting purposes but does not physically exist See organization Glossary 39 lookup code The internal name of a value defined in an Oracle Workflow lookup type See also lookup type lookup type An Oracle Workflow predefined list of values Each value in a lookup type has an internal and a display name See also lookup code long notes A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 64K characters per note You can add long notes to your headers and lines Purchasing automatically wraps the note while you are typing You can also format the note by providing extra lines or indenting parts of your message You can provide as many long notes as you want wherever the long notes capability is available lot A specific batch of an item identified by a number lot based jobs If you have Oracle Shop Floor Management installed you can use lot based jobs in your manufacturing A lot
14. quantity completed For an operation on a discrete job or repetitive schedule the quantity of the assembly that you transacted Glossary 60 beyond the Run intraoperation step Fora discrete job or repetitive schedule the quantity of the assembly that you received into inventory quantity in operation The quantity of an assembly in an operation on a discrete job or repetitive schedule This includes the quantities in each of the intraoperation steps quantity issued The quantity of a component item issued from inventory to a discrete job r repetitive schedule to fulfill a WIP material requirement quantity on hand Current quantity of an item in inventory quantity received tolerance The percentage by which you allow quantity received to exceed quantity ordered quantity rejected The number of items you reject after inspection quantity remaining The quantity of an assembly remaining to be completed at an operation in a discrete job or repetitive schedule This is the sum of the quantities in all intraoperation steps at all operations before the current operation plus the quantities in the Queue and Run intraoperation steps at the current operation quantity required The total quantity of a component item required to produce all the assemblies in a discrete job or repetitive schedule as determined by the usage quantity on the bill of materials the production quantity and the component yield quantity variance toler
15. 006 e cece eee 6 4 Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting 0 6 6 c cece eee 6 5 Uses of Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting 6 5 Required Lead Time Information 00 0002000 6 7 Lead Time Offsetting Computations serron ie 6 8 Manufacturing Lead Times 0 cece cece eee eens 7 1 Overview of Lead Time Management 025055 7 2 Computed vs Assigned Lead Times 7 2 Item Lead Time Attributes 0 0 06 e cece tee eee nes 7 3 Manufacturing Lead Time Computations 7 6 Lead Time Lof Size 12 ee bere ewe anne eas 7 6 ROUWHNGS 2 023 itr Cb ceed eee bri E hee Reds 7 6 Lead Time Perc nt esee eret secte send 7 7 Offset Percent uio eee teme eR PER NESE RENSES 7 7 Fixed and Variable Lead Times 00000005 7 7 Processing Lead Time llsseseeee eee ees ZH Offset Computations sisse 7 12 Cumulative Lead Time Computations 7 14 Calculating Lead Times si exer eben eee ache een 7 17 Rolling Up Cumulative Lead Times 06 7 18 BRO PONS eo ase aces EE 6 INESE PENE PESO EE hare eke Sao eras CH PAGE 8 1 Bill of Material Comparison Report 0000s eee 8 2 Report Submission 0 0 0 0 c cece eee ees 8 2 Report Parameters 0 cece cece eee eee eens 8 2 Bill of Material Listing c cscs acne ce sna ter mee pipni SERES 8 3 Report Submission 2icrm eee te eka eee 8 3 Report Parameters
16. Cumulative Manufacturing Lead Time Bills of Material sets an item s cumulative manufacturing lead time equal to its own manufacturing lead time plus the maximum value of the cumulative manufacturing lead time for any component adjusted for operation offset The operation offset is the lead time percent for the operation where the component is used times the item s manufacturing lead time based on one lead time lot size Purchasing items have no cumulative manufacturing lead time Bills of Material uses the following formula to compute cumulative manufacturing lead time 7 14 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide manufacturing lead time for item Maximum cumulative manufacturing lead time offset days for any component Cumulative Total Lead Time Bills of Material sets an item s cumulative total lead time to its own total lead time plus the maximum value of cumulative total lead time less operation offset for any component Operation offset for a component is the lead time percent for the operation where the component is used times the item s manufacturing lead time based on one lead time lot size Bills of Material calculates cumulative total lead time using the following equation total lead time for item Maximum cumulative total lead time offset days for any component For example suppose Item A is made up of B C and D B C and D are used at operations 20 30 and 40 respectively and the manufacturin
17. Enter the resource to assign to the current department 3 Optionally for owned resources indicate whether the resource is available 24 hours a day You cannot assign shifts to a resource that is available 24 hours a day 4 Forowned resources indicate whether this department can share the resource and capacity with other departments 5 For borrowed resources enter the owning department 6 Enter the number of capacity units resource units available for this department for example the number of machines for a machine resource Each resource can be assigned to any number of departments multiple resources can be assigned to each department 1 22 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 10 11 12 Optionally enter a resource group for the resource in this department Optionally select the Check CTP check box The Check CTP check box tells the system to use this resource in a Capable to Promise CTP check See Capable to Promise Oracle Master Scheduling MRP and Supply Chain Planning User s Guide Release 11 Indicate if the department resource should be scheduled to the instance level Optionally enter an exception set The exception sets that you assign help identify capacity problems See Creating Planning Exception Sets Oracle Master Scheduling MRP and Supply Chain Planning User s Guide Release 11 Enter an expenditure type for the resource For owned resources that are not available 24 hours choose th
18. For repetitively planned items the planning process can only suggest new daily rates that fall inside the acceptable rate increase and acceptable rate decrease boundaries defined for the item A value of Cumulative manufacturing lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the planning time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the Glossary 53 cumulative manufacturing lead time for the item A value of Cumulative total lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the planning time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the total manufacturing lead time for the item A value of Total lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the planning time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on anon workday plus the total lead time for the item A value of User defined time fence means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the planning time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the value you enter for Planning Time Fence Days for the item Planning Time Fence Days An item attribute Master Scheduling MRP uses when you set the Planning Time fence attribute to User defined time fence Master Scheduling MRP calculates the planning time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if
19. International Standards Organization append option Option or choice to append planned orders to an MRP plan or an MPS plan during the planning process Append either after the last existing planned order after the planning time fence or for the entire plan The append option is used with the overwrite option See overwrite option application building block A set of tables and modules forms reports and concurrent programs that implement closely related entities and their processing approval list A group of employees that review and control engineering change orders ECOs When you create an ECO you can assign an approval list and an approval status Oracle Alert automatically notifies each approver when an ECO requires their approval approval action A cycle action you can define in your order cycle to require explicit approval of an order or order line before it progresses further through the order cycle You can define an approval step at the order or order line level When you define an approval step you must approve all orders or order lines using that order cycle depending on the approval step level You can also use approvals in order cycles for returns RMAs See also configure to order approval status A classification you can use to track an ECO s approval cycle Approval statuses include Not ready to approve Ready to approve Approval requested Approved and Rejected Oracle Alert automatically no
20. Made Processing Lead Time Component C Purchased Cumulative MFG Lead Time Cumulative Total Lead Time LEGEND Preprocessing Lead Time Processing Lead Time Postprocessing Lead Time See Also Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Manufacturing Lead Time Computations page 7 6 Manufacturing Lead Times 7 5 Manufacturing Lead Time Computations Lead Time Lot Size Routings Bills of Material computes manufacturing lead times from item routing and resource availability information Item and routing information is updated as part of the computation Processing lead time is computed as the time required to complete 1 lead time lot size of an item the time required to complete the second scheduled job Bills of Material determines an item s lead time lot size from two item master fields standard lot size and lead time lot size For items that you plan and cost by the same lot size you can specify a value only for the standard lot size Bills of Material then computes manufacturing lead time using the standard lot size quantity Note If an item s routing references another item s routing as a common set both items lead time lot size to the same value If you do not specify a lead time lot size ensure that both items standard lot sizes are equal For items that you plan with one lot size and cost with a different lo
21. RFQ automatically and to manage supplier responses supplier requirement See supplier sourced component supplier sourced component A component item on a bill of material supplied to work in process directly by a supplier supplier specification The customer specified material requirements for a product or service supply A quantity of materials available for use Supply is replenished in response to demand or anticipated demand supply agreement blanket purchase order A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or services You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long term supplier agreement A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and an expiration date a committed amount or quantity You use a blanket purchase agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and services before actually ordering them Blanket agreement in Oracle Purchasing with the Supply Agreement flag set on the Blanket Glossary 78 Agreement header Only Supply Agreement Releases are picked up by Supplier Scheduling supply locator The specific location such as shelves or containers within a supply subinventory that you use as the default locator in a material transaction supply release agreements Release shipments against a Blanket Supply Agreement supply reserved A schedule status showing that Oracle Work in Process WIP has recogni
22. Review your work so far and its effect on the workday calendar Do this before you build or rebuild the workday calendar you are now creating You can only do this after you have defined a workday pattern Once you have created a workday pattern assigned shifts assigned workday and shift exceptions and reviewed your work you must build the calendar and assign it to an organization 6 Save your work Copying Calendar and Shift Information page 1 39 Creating a Workday Pattern page 1 40 Creating Shifts and Shift Times page 1 41 Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions page 1 42 Reviewing the Workday Calendar page 1 43 Building the Workday Calendar page 1 44 Creating a Workday Exception Template page 1 34 1 38 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Copying Calendar and Shift Information See Also You can copy the entire calendar including workday patterns exceptions and all or none of its specific shift information Or you can copy a specific shift including the workday patterns exceptions and shift times Exactly what is copied depends upon how you navigate to the Copy window e From the Workday Calendar Calendar Dates and Workday Patterns windows all workday patterns all exceptions and selected shift information are copied e From the Shifts Shift Times Shift Dates or Shift Workday Patterns windows the shift workday patterns shift exceptions and all shift times for the specif
23. The usage rate or amount is the amount of the resource consumed at the operation either the quantity per item or per lot If you assign more than one resource unit to work at an operation Work in Process considers the number of units when scheduling a resource at an operation Assign the usage rate for the resource as the total quantity per item or lot regardless of the number of resource units you specify For example if you define a machine resource to require 10 hours per item and you assign 2 resource units to the resource Work in Process automatically schedules 2 machines for 5 hours Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Standard Resource Costs When you define a routing you specify the resources you use to build the items and each resource has costs associated with it By defining the routing with specific resources you establish standard resource costs for any item that uses the routing See Setting Up Manufacturing Standard Costing Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Outside Processing You can define outside processing resources and then assign these resources to operations on a routing Work in Process considers any operation that has an outside processing resource as an outside operation See Outside Processing Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Routings 3 9 Creating a Routing For each routing define the operations the sequence to perform them and the resources required at each operation You can def
24. Workdays 6 10 are March 8 12 Master Scheduling MRP then calculates the planned order release date as follows Start date Start date requirement date total lead time 12 MAR 7 days Convert planned order requirement date to a workday using your organization s workday calendar Date Workday 10 7 Date 3 Start date Start date Finally determine the start date Start date 03 MAR planned order release date Overview of On hand and Availability Oracle Inventory User s Guide Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Manufacturing Scheduling 6 9 6 10 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide CHAPTER Manufacturing Lead Times T his chapter tells you everything you need to know about manufacturing lead times including e Overview of Manufacturing Lead Times page 7 2 e Calculating Lead Times page 7 17 Manufacturing Lead Times 7 1 Overview of Lead Time Management See Also Oracle Manufacturing uses dynamic quantity dependent lead times to plan material and resource requirements and to determine material requirement dates for available to promise ATP calculations When computing requirement dates both the fixed and variable components of an item s manufacturing lead time are used When setting time fences for planning and available to promise calculations an item s cumulative lead times are used Overview of Manufacturing
25. can optionally use to perform foreign currency conversion The corporate exchange rate is usually a standard market rate determined by senior financial management for use throughout the organization cost base The grouping of raw costs to which burden costs are applied cost breakdown category Breakdown of a project or task budget to categorize costs You can categorize by expenditure category expenditure type job or expenditure organization cost distribution Calculating the cost and determining the cost accounting for an expenditure item costelement A classification for the cost of an item Oracle Manufacturing supports five cost elements material material overhead resource outside processing and overhead cost group An attribute of a project which allows the system to hold item unit costs at a level below the inventory organization Within an organization an item may have more than one cost if it belongs to multiple cost groups Item costing can be specific to a single project if each project has a distinct cost group or specific to a group of projects if all projects in that group are assigned to the same cost group cost transaction The financial effect of your material resource overhead job and period close and cost update activities For example each material quantity transaction may have several cost accounting entries and each accounting entry is a cost transaction Cost of Goods Sold Account The
26. components Computer Case and Keyboard are standard items that are not optional in the bill CPU and Monitor are mandatory option classes since they are not optional while Operating System is an optional option class You must choose at least one option under mandatory option classes CPU and Operating System option classes are mutually exclusive which means you can only choose a single option under each However you can choose any number of Monitors The following table presents an example of a model bill of material Indented Bill for Promotional Laptop Mutually Level Item Item Type Optional Planning Exclusive 1 Promotional Laptop PTO Model n a n a n a a Battery Pack Kit 100 n a 2 Accessories PTO Option Class Diskettes Purchased Item Laptop Computer ATO Model Laptop Computer ATO Model Carrying Case Product Keyboard Product z CPU ATO Option Class Monitor ATO Option Class Operating System ATO Option Class Yes When you place an order for the Promotional Laptop you choose from the list of options Diskettes Accessories options and from the list of options under the Laptop Computer bill of material such as DOS Configure to Order 5 9 VGA1 and 386 Processor As described earlier you open a work order or flow schedule for the Laptop Computer configuration Order Management then includes the completed Laptop Computer configuration on the
27. considered unsatisfied demand at the inventory organization level in the Shortage Parameters form Sales orders are considered unfulfilled when a detailed pick wave move order has a detailed quantity that is less than the requested quantity An unfulfilled pick wave move order can occur at pick release if there is initially insufficient available quantity An unfulfilled pick wave move order can occur at pick confirm if the picker does not confirm the full quantity An unfulfilled pick wave move order can occur at shipment confirmation when backordering at ship confirm pre approved A document that has been approved by someone with final approval authority but then forwarded to yet another approver for additional approval or a document that has been authorized for approval but for which funds have not yet been reserved if your organization uses encumbrance A document with a status of Pre Approved does not show up as supply until its status changes to Approved predefined serial number To define an alphanumeric prefix and a beginning number for your serial numbers before you assign them to items Predefined serial numbers are validated during receiving and shipping transactions preprocessing lead time The time required to place a purchase order or create a discrete job or repetitive schedule that you must add to purchasing or manufacturing lead time to determine total lead time If you define this time for a repetitive item the
28. count or number of invoices in the batch and the total batch amount which is the sum of the invoice amounts in the batch for each batch of invoices you create You can also optionally enter batch defaults for each invoice in a batch When you enable your batch control system option Oracle Bills of Material automatically creates invoice batches for Payables expense reports prepayments and recurring invoices as well as all standard invoices invoice number A number or combination of numbers and characters that uniquely identifies an invoice within your system Usually generated automatically by your receivables system to avoid assigning duplicate numbers Invoice numbering may be based on the delivery name number or generated sequentially invoice price variance The difference between the purchase order price for an item and the actual invoice price multiplied by the quantity invoiced Payables records this variance after matching the invoice to the purchase order Typically the price variance is small since the price the supplier charges you for an item should be the one you negotiated on your purchase order invoice value The total outstanding order value that needs to be invoiced invoicing rules Rules that Receivables uses to determine when you bill your invoices You can bill In Advance or In Arrears issue transaction A material transaction to issue component items from inventory to work in process Glos
29. e select or enter an existing delete group name e enter a new delete group name If you are entering a new delete group name enter a description for the group Choose OK Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 7 Navigate to the Delete Groups window and run the Delete Group concurrent process Note Components and operations are not assigned to the delete group until you save the bill or routing If you do not save the bill or routing components and operations are not assigned to the delete group See Also Deletion Constraints page 4 8 Creating Custom Deletion Constraints page 1 16 Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations page 4 2 Deleting Information 4 7 Deletion Constraints Predefined constraints for deleting bills of material or routings are as follows See Also 4 8 a primary bill if an alternate exists a bill if it is used as a common in another bill a bill if a repetitive schedule references the bill a bill if a discrete job references the bill a bill if any sales orders are open for the parent item a bill if any demand exists for the parent item a model bill if any configuration items exist for the model an option class bill if it is a component of another bill a primary routing if an alternate exists a routing if it is used as a common routing a routing if a repetitive schedule references the routing a routing if a discrete job references the routing a component
30. ee UuLUuLuLLLLAA 2 Enter an alphanumeric string to describe a unique alternate Setting Up 1 15 3 Enter a date that the alternate is inactive on As of the inactive date you can no longer assign the alternate to a bill of material or routing See Also Primary and Alternate Bills of Material page 2 5 Primary and Alternate Routings page 3 2 Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Creating Custom Deletion Constraints Use custom deletion constraints to enforce specific business rules Custom deletion constraints prevent the deletion of bills or routings if your data meets the conditions set forth in the constraint 1 16 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P To create a custom deletion constraint 1 Navigate to the Deletion Constraints window Deletion Constraints M1 Constraint Enabled Description HSAN Bill of Material SQL Select Statement Delete If Rows Found ONo Rows Found Failure Message RET Text 2 Enter aname for the deletion constraint 3 Indicate whether the constraint is enabled An enabled deletion constraint means that it is in effect when the delete concurrent program runs 4 Select what kind of delete entity the constraint applies to item bill routing component or operation 5 Enter the SQL Select Statement that the delete concurrent program is to execute You cannot update SQL statements for predefined deletion constra
31. ias eects hese at eR SERE Sep Res 8 3 Bill of Material Loop Report 0 0000 t tesen kinint 8 5 Report Submission zerret eee ee R ERRRERERY ERES 8 5 Report Parameters s isses e px ch RR REVERSE Ru RES 8 5 Contents vii Appendix A Bill of Material Structure Report 00 0 c cece eee 8 7 ReportSubmission 2 0 eee E 8 7 Report Parameters ssssseeeeeeeeee e 8 7 Bills of Material Parameters Report 0 00220005 8 11 Report Submission iiseceke tee th erk ree Re E Ea 8 11 Consolidated Bill of Material Report 504 8 12 Report Submission ssssseeeeeeeeeee 8 12 Report Parameters ssseeeeeeeeeeee eee 8 12 Delete Items Report 4 ee ne Eee He ae eR e se 8 15 Report Submission sess srengene eere her rne ga 8 15 Report Parameters seco ke ken tene be ee den 8 15 Department Classes Report 8 17 Report Submission sess 8 17 Report Parameters 4 2x xosexx eso Rame arem A RR A 8 17 Department Report ic cesseese ses pem pH ERROR ERR Rd 8 18 Report Submission sssseeeeeeeeeeee 8 18 Report Parameters enis nnn s verbere HERR ens eae eed 8 18 Item Where Used Report ccrti erroen An e a ED 8 19 Report Submission sescsecsrsrcnss RR eer eene Re 8 19 Report Parameters suc ck eich CREE ROUEN CERE eed 8 19 Resource Report 0c ce0 vined neers cen ATO EIER SERRE E es 8 22 ReportSubmission ariris sepp irg EA een 8 22 Report Patamet
32. ship confirmation to enter shipped quantity and inventory controls for specific shippable lines You can ship confirm the same delivery departure repeatedly until you close the delivery departure Once it is closed no more changes can be made into a delivery departure ship date The date upon which a shippable item is shipped Ship Partial An order attribute indicating whether you allow partial shipments of an order If you enter Yes for the Ship Partial field on an order individual order lines can be shipped as they are available and you can assign different ship to locations and other order line details to different shipments in an order line See also Ship Together ship set A group of order lines linked by a common number for which you want the full quantity to ship all together ship to address A location where items are to be shipped ship to location tolerance Whether the receiving location must be the same as the ship to location on the purchase order and whether Purchasing prohibits the transaction displays a warning message while permitting the transaction or permits the transaction without a warning Ship Together An order attribute indicating that you do not allow partial shipments of the order You can also specify a configuration as Ship Together by setting the Ship Model Complete item attribute for the model item to Yes See also Ship Partial ship together model Ship Together model A model item w
33. the bill If you define an alternate routing and then define the alternate bill you can assign components to the alternate routing operations If you define an alternate bill and no alternate routing exists you can assign components to the primary routing operations Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Overview of Material Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Creating a Routing page 3 10 Effective Date Fields Effective date fields appear throughout Oracle Manufacturing products These are defined as follows Bills of Material 2 37 Effective From First date and time the component or opera Effective Date tion becomes effective For components the effective date is the first day a component becomes effective for a bill For routings it is the first day an operation becomes effective in a routing Effective To Last date and time the component or opera Inactive After tion is effective After this date you can no longer assign the component to a bill or the operation to a routing Inactive On The first date and time the component or op eration is inactive As of 12 00AM on this date you can no longer assign the component to a bill or the operation to a routing If this date equals the effective date the component or operation is inactive To avoid confusion make sure that effective dates for one revision do no
34. transactions move assemblies or apply or update costs cancelled schedule A repetitive schedule you no longer want to work on You cannot make transactions move assemblies or apply costs candidate A record Purchasing selects to purge based on the last activity date you Glossary 11 specify Purchasing selects only records that you have not updated since the last activity date Purchasing does not purge a candidate until you confirm it capable to deliver Ability to promise product for customer orders based on uncommitted inventory planned production material capacity transportation resources and transit time capable to promise Ability to promise product for customer orders based on uncommitted inventory planned production material and the capacity of resources capacity modification Deviation to available resources for a specific department shift capacity requirements planning A time phased plan comparing required capacity to available capacity based on a material requirements plan and department resource information See routing based capacity and rate based capacity capacity units The number of units of a resource available in a department For example the number of machines capital project A project in which you build one or more depreciable fixed assets carrier See freight carrier carry forward days A number of days shifted forward or backward when using a negative number when copying
35. variance is included with the material usage variance configurator A form that allows you to choose options available for a particular model thus defining a particular configuration for the model configure to order Anenvironment where you enter customer orders by choosing a base model and then selecting options from a list of choices consigned location The physical location of inventories which resides on the property of buyers and sellers through a consigned agreement with the manufacturer constraint based scheduling The constraint based scheduling engine in Oracle Manufacturing Scheduling offers enabling you to schedule discrete jobs and operations based on user defined priorities resources and material availability consume shortage backward An option used to calculate ATP information by using surplus quantity from prior periods to cover a period shortage Glossary 15 consume shortage forward An option used to calculate ATP information by using surplus quantity from future ATP periods to cover a period shortage contact A representative responsible for communication between you and a specific part of your customer s agency For example your customer may have a shipping contact person who handles all questions regarding orders sent to that address The contact s responsibility is the contact role contact role A responsibility you associate to a specific contact Oracle Bills of Material provides Bi
36. 1 21 Defining a Resource srrssars ie insap ea aa aE 1 24 Overview of Workday Calendar 000220 1 31 Repeating Workday Patterns 00 00 cece eee 1 31 Workday Exceptions ccc dicen oa Rer RR REC lac eae 1 31 SUES la EET 1 32 Organiza oN en este ave Pena E SR dera ra cede es 1 35 Creating a Workday Exception Template 1 35 Creating a Workday Calendar 0 0000 e eee 1 37 Copying Calendar and Shift Information 1 40 Creating a Workday Pattern 000 eee eee ee 1 41 Creating Shifts and Shift Times steger ina a e 1 42 Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions 1 43 Reviewing the Workday Calendar 1 44 Building the Workday Calendar lesse 1 45 Importing Bills and Routings 0 0 eee eee 1 46 Bills of Material Profile Options 600000 e eee 1 47 Profile Option Settings cceeccenc tbe RRCE E RORER eee 1 47 Bills of Material 0 ccc cece eee eee en nees 2 1 Overview of Bills of Material 0 0 c eee eee 2 2 Bill of Material Types iie en Ree eee 2 2 Phantoms siccae Site ieo shade Sade niece eee estes 2 3 Primary and Alternate Bills of Material 2 5 Item and Routing Revisions 0 naa e eee ee 2 6 COompon hls xs secessit bs OR so Rape Runde seti 2 7 Access Control by Item Type 000 cece eee 2 9 Creating a Bill of M
37. A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for dependent demand items Stated in discrete quantities and order dates MRP Planning Method An item attribute used to decide when to plan the item A value of MPS planning means the item is planned by the MPS planning process It is an item that you master schedule and for which you require manual control Choose this option for items with independent demand items that are critical to your business or items that control critical resources A value of MRP planning means the item is planned by the MRP planning process Choose this option for non critical items that do not require manual control These are typically dependent demand items A value of DRP planning means the item is planned by the DRP planning process A value of DRP amp MRP means the item is planned by either a DRP planning or MRP planning process A value of DRP amp MPS means the item is planned by either a DRP planning or MPS planning process A value of None means the item is neither MPS planned or MRP planned It does not require long term plan planning of material requirements Choose this option for high volume and or low cost items that do not warrant the administrative overhead of material requirements planning These are typically dependent demand items MRP planned item An item planned by MRP during the MRP plannin
38. Calendar Date Range Mowawzus Bsswty si 2 Entera name for the workday calendar 3 Select a quarterly calendar type 4 4 5 Week Pattern Two four week periods followed by one five week period 5 4 4 Week Pattern One five week period followed by two four week periods Calendar Months Twelve periods per year based on calendar months 13 Periods Thirteen four week periods per year Note If you use Oracle Master Scheduling MRP choose the 4 4 5 Weekly Pattern or the 5 4 4 Weekly Pattern to report MRP information in weeks and months Otherwise if you choose the 13 Periods calendar or Calendar Months you can only report MRP information in monthly buckets Setting Up 1 37 See Also Enter a date range for the workday calendar The default end date is four years from the start date Note Days on and off are calculated based on the start date and the day of the week For example if you want a standard five day workweek to start on 01 AN you must enter the start date as the Monday before 01 JAN unless 01 JAN falls on a Monday Note Set profile option BOM Week or Period Start Date to determine the start date This profile option works in conjunction with the Workday Calendar See Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Continue creating the workday calendar by choosing one of the following buttons Workday Pattern Set workdays on or off Shifts Assign shifts to the workday calendar Dates
39. Choose Check for Loops from the Tools menu See Also Bill of Material Loop Report page 8 5 Bills of Material 2 23 Mass Changing Bills of Material 2 24 Use the Mass Change Bills window to mass change your manufacturing or engineering bills of material You can define a mass change to add delete or replace a component alter a component quantity or yield or change other component information You can mass change all using bills of material or choose a subset of bills by item range item category or item type You can mass change primary and alternate bills of material for each using assembly For engineering bills you can schedule the mass change for a future effective date For manufacturing bills you can implement the changes immediately You can also report effective changes for all using assemblies or components If you are using Oracle Engineering you can create an engineering change order ECO from the mass change order that affects both engineering and manufacturing bills You can then implement the ECO and report on any effected using assemblies Bills of Material or Engineering take into account all the actions you enter to determine if the change is applicable For example suppose you add component A and delete component B This change is made only if component A does not exist and component B does exist on the selected bills The change is applied only if both conditions are met In this example two records
40. Identification numbers are not unique For instance the same UN Number may correspond to 2 closely related but different types of materials underload A condition where required capacity for a resource or production is less than available capacity unit number effectively A method of controlling which components are used to make an end item based on an assigned end item unit number unit of measure The unit that the quantity of an item is expressed unit of measure class A group of units of measure and their corresponding base unit of measure The standard unit classes are Length Weight Volume Area Time and Pack unit of measure conversions Numerical factors that enable you to perform transactions in units other than the primary unit of the item being transacted unordered receipt A site option that lets you receive an unordered item You can later batch an unordered item to an existing purchase order or add it to a new purchase order unreleased job schedule A discrete job or repetitive schedule planned but not released for work to begin and not yet transactable Glossary 81 unreleased lines Order line details that are unfulfilled by Pick Release unscheduling The removal of the schedule status for an order line or detail if a line or detail is either demanded or reserved unscheduling will return the status to blank UOM See unit of measure Update WIP When Engineering automatically implements a released
41. Lead Time Offsetting Total Lead Time Cumulative Manufacturing Lead Time Cumulative Total Lead Time Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide A scheduling method that quickly estimates the start date of an order operation or re source Dynamic lead time offsetting sched ules using the organization workday calen dar The fixed lead time plus the variable lead time multiplied by the order quantity The planning process uses the total lead time for an item in its scheduling logic to calculate order start dates from order due dates The total time required to make an item if you had all raw materials in stock but had to make all subassemblies level by level Oracle Bills of Material automatically calculates this value or you can manually assign a value The total time required to make an item if no inventory existed and you had to order all the raw materials and make all subassemblies level by level Bills of Material automatically calculates this value or you can manually assign a value Figure 7 1 As described in the text above the following diagram illustrates the relationship between preprocessing processing and postprocessing lead times for manufactured items assembly A and subassembly B and purchased items component C This diagram also describes the cumulative manufacturing lead time and cumulative total lead time for a manufactured item assembly A Assembly A Made Subassembly B
42. Order Item e Standard bill of material with mandatory standard components e Item manufactured from mandatory standard components or purchased from a supplier Pick to Order Model PTO Configuration e Model bill of material with optional items and option selection rules e Pick slip used to kit included items and selected options Pick to Order Item Kit e Standard bill of material with mandatory included items Pick slip used to kit included items Hybrid e Pick to Order models with optional Assemble to Order items e Pick to Order model containing Assemble to Order model Multi Level Assemble to Order Model Multi Level ATO Configuration e A model bill of material with a non phantom model as a component Configure to Order 5 3 BOM Support for CTO e Configuration manufactured from mandatory components selected options configured sub assemblies or purchased from a supplier Multi Level Assemble to Order Items e Standard bill of material with standard components and configured components e Item manufactured from standard components and configured components Multi Organization Assemble to Order Model Multi Organization ATO e An ATO model which will be transferred from another organization Support assemble to order ATO pick to order PTO buy to order BTO and hybrid PTO ATO ATO ATO product structures Support for Multi level ATO PTO and BTO multi level ATO hybrid structures which en
43. Report Parameters See Also Use the Standard Operation Report to report standard operations to use in assembly routings Standard operations are default templates that you use with little or no modification in more than one routing If you assign a standard operation as the operation code in a routing the standard operation information is loaded into the routing You can then modify the standard operation information in the routing In the Submit Requests window select Standard Operation Report in the Name field Standard Operation Detail Indicate whether you want to print resource information associated with the standard operation Standard Operations From To To restrict the report to a range of standard operations select the beginning and ending standard operations Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Reports 8 27 Workday Exception Sets Report Use the Workday Exception Sets Report to report exception sets You can use workday exception sets to group workday changes for each organization For example you can define exception sets for holidays schedule maintenance or extended downtime You use exception sets in combination with your workday calendar the days on off pattern and shift on off pattern to generate a work pattern for your organization Report Submission In the Submit Requests window select Workday Exception Sets Report in the Name field See Also Submitting a Re
44. Resource batching enables you to use resources across multiple jobs By using a single resource to process multiple jobs 1 24 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide simultaneously you can prevent a resource from being underutilized Work scheduled using resource batching is characterized by equivalent work performed with the same manufacturing processes See Resource Batching Oracle Manufacturing Scheduling User s Guide Prerequisites L Before you can define resources set up your units of measure and unit of measure conversion rates Some resources may represent currency such as a fixed charge resource but currency resources cannot be scheduled since their unit of measure is not time based L Set the site level profile option BOM Hour UOM to hold the unit of measure that represents an hour Oracle Work in Process prevents you from scheduling resources whose unit of measure is not in the same unit of measure class as the hour unit or measure and has no conversions defined to the hour unit or measure To define a resource 1 Navigate to the Resources window Setting Up 1 25 Resources M1 T2534 Resource BlstN Inactive On D vj mann TNR Outside Processing WiEnabled dee 101 580 7740 0000 000 Sere eee 01580 7740 0000 000 Batchable Minimum Batch Capacity Batching Window 3 Maximum Batch Capacity PIS DAY Batch Capacity UOM 2 Enter a resource name unique to the organization to
45. Save from the File menu Attention You can commit a record without assigning planning percentages The default planning percent is 100 The default effectivity date is the system date Oracle Flow Manufacturing Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Creating a Flow Routing Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Bills of Material 2 51 2 52 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Routings CHAPTER T his chapter tells you everything you need to know to use routings including e Overview of Routings page 3 2 e Creating a Routing page 3 10 e Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 e Viewing Resource Usage page 3 25 e Routings Reference page 3 27 Routings 3 1 Overview of Routings See Also A routing defines the step by step operations you perform to manufacture a product Each routing can have any number of operations For each operation you specify a department that determines the resources you may use for that operation Primary and Alternate Routings page 3 2 Routing Revisions page 2 6 Creating a Routing page 3 10 Operations page 3 5 Resource Usage page 3 6 Defining a Department page 1 19 Defining a Resource page 1 24 Primary and Alternate Routings A primary routing is the list of operations most frequently performed to build a product You can define one primary routing and many alternate routings an item When you define a new primary routing you specify o
46. Scheduling page 6 2 Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Computed vs Assigned Lead Times See Also For manufactured items you can automatically compute manufacturing and cumulative lead times for a specific item or a range of items You can also maintain this information manually You must manually assign all lead time information for purchased items Note You can calculate manufacturing and cumulative lead times for manufacturing or engineering items Changing Lead Times Updating the values assigned to your lead times may impact functions that use dynamic lead time offsetting such as material and resource requirements planning Updating cumulative lead times can also impact material plans and available to promise calculations if these lead times are used to set time fences Overview of Manufacturing Scheduling page 6 2 7 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Item Lead Time Attributes For all scheduled time elements which are less than the standard workday the system will compute the lead time day by dividing the lead time element by 24 The standard workday is defined in the workday calendar Oracle Manufacturing stores the following lead time information for each item Fixed Lead Time Variable Lead Time Preprocessing Lead Time Postprocessing Lead Time Processing Lead Time Lead Time Lot Size The portion of manufacturing lead time that is indep
47. Suppliers List A list where you can set up your Approved Suppliers Sites and Items ASN Advanced Shipping Notice assemble to order ATO An environment where you open a final assembly order to assemble items that customers order Assemble to order is also an item attribute that you can apply to standard model and option class items assemble to order ATO item An item you make in response to a customer order assemble to order ATO model A configuration you make in response to a customer order that includes optional items assignment hierarchy You can assign sourcing rules and bills of distribution to a single item in an inventory organization all items in an inventory organization categories of items in an inventory organization a site and an organization These assignments have an order of precedence relative to one another assembly An item that has a bill of material You can purchase or manufacture an assembly item See also assemble to order bill of material assembly completion pull transaction A material transaction where you backflush components from inventory to work in process as you complete the operation where the component is consumed See operation completion pull transaction assembly completion transaction A material transaction where you receive assemblies into inventory from a job or schedule upon Glossary 6 completion of the manufacture of the assembly assembly move completion tra
48. This field is displayed for Shop Floor Management enabled organizations 9 Choose the Rates button to view the overhead rates for the department 1 20 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 10 Choose the Resources button to assign and update resources to the department Note If you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed the Departments form is used to group resources that may be needed together to perform tasks For example a warehouse may define a refrigerated picking depatement which has all the machine and manual resources associated to it that are required to perform a refreigerated picking task A warehouse can also use a picking department or a generic task department with all resources associated that are used for warehouse task managment See Set Up Departments Oracle Warehouse Management User s Guide See Also Assigning Resources to a Department page 1 21 Department Report page 8 18 Assigning Resources to a Department P Toassign resources to a department 1 Navigate to the Resources window You can do this by choosing the Resources button from the Departments window Setting Up 1 21 IE Resources M1 New Owned Resource Available 24 Hours ie CTP Schedule by Description I Share UOM Units Grou Instance z L v e mci Check CTP Borrowed Resource Owning Department Description UOM Units The Resources window is split into owned and borrowed resources 2
49. Times variable lead time rate Calculation 1 production rate day 1 1 production rate day The line fixed lead time fixed lead time i e the time required to build 1 assembly Order Quantity Bills of Material also computes the processing lead time as the time required to complete the second scheduled job where the job starts on the system date completion date of one item system date Processing lead time is presented in whole days rounded to the next day Manufacturing Lead Times 7 11 Example For example if for item A you had the following data e Lead time lot size 10 units e System date 01 JAN e End date for work in process job for 1 unit 10 JAN e End date for work in process job for 10 units 13 JAN Then fixed lead time completion date of one item system date 10 JAN 01 JAN 10 days Variable lead time completion date system date rate fixed lead time lead time lot size 13 JAN 01 JAN 10 10 13 10 10 0 3 days unit Processing lead time completion date system date 13 JAN 01 JAN 13 days Offset Computations The corresponding operation lead time percent for operations in the primary routing is updated automatically For example if the routing operations for item A had the following start dates on a job for 10 assemblies Bills of Material would compute 7 12 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide
50. Under standard costing you use the frozen costs for your cost transactions freight charges A shipment related charge added during ship confirmation and billed to your customer freight terms An agreement indicating who pays the freight costs of an order and when they are to be paid Freight terms do not affect accounting freight charges function A PL SQL stored procedure referenced by an Oracle Workflow function activity that can enforce business rules perform automated tasks within an application or retrieve application information The stored procedure accepts standard arguments and returns a completion result See also function activity function activity An automated Oracle Workflow unit of work that is defined by a PL SQL stored procedure See also function functional acknowledgment The acknowledgement to indicate the results of the syntactical analysis of electronically Glossary 32 encoded documents Applies to a functional group and can include detail functional currency Currency you use to record transactions and maintain your accounting information The functional currency is generally the currency used to perform most of your company s business transactions You determine the functional currency for the set of books you use in your organization Also called base currency funds available The difference between your budget less encumbrances of all types and actual expenditures funds checking The proce
51. User s Guide Overview of Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Extended Quantity Field The extended quantity of the component used in the parent item is calculated as follows explosion quantity of parent item x component usage quantity component yield 1 shrinkage rate for parent See Also Two Level Master Scheduling Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Bills of Material 2 41 Supply Subinventory and Locator Fields See Also Work in Process pulls components from the supply subinventory and the locator within the subinventory during backflushing Assign a supply subinventory and locator if applicable to components that have a supply type of Assembly pull or Operation pull You must specify a supply locator if you have mandatory locator control for the supply subinventory The system validates any item subinventory and locator restrictions you defined during your Oracle Inventory setup Overview of Material Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Mutually Exclusive and Optional Fields The following pertains to options for model and option class bills All components are mandatory on standard and planning bills Model and option class bills can have both mandatory and optional components The Optional field indicates whether the component is mandatory or optional The Mutually Exclusive field applies only to option class bills and indicates whe
52. Window Assigning Resources to a Department 1 10 Resources window Assigning Operation Resources 3 18 Assigning Resources to a Department 1 20 Defining a Resource 1 9 1 24 Revision item 2 20 when creating a bill 2 11 Revisions item 2 5 routing 2 5 Rolling Up Cumulative Lead Times 7 18 Routing Assigning a Completion Subinventory and Locator 3 16 backflush transactions 3 5 configuration item 5 34 create 3 10 Creating a Routing Revision 3 16 Dynamic Routing 3 4 engineering 3 3 Lot Based Routing Flow Routing 3 4 operation sequence inheritance 5 20 operations 3 5 option dependent steps 3 6 sequence 3 5 standard 3 5 option dependent steps 5 18 5 20 outside operations 3 9 Overview 3 2 Primary Routings Alternate Routings 3 2 resource usage 3 6 switching between Primary and Alternate 3 14 Routing revision 3 11 Routing revisions 2 5 Routings copying 2 14 importing See Importing bills and routings referencing 2 16 Routings window Creating a Routing 3 11 Referencing Common Bills and Routings 2 16 2 17 S Sales order number 5 24 Schedule when scheduling an operation 3 30 Scheduling detailed 6 3 discrete jobs 6 3 dynamic lead time 6 5 operations 6 3 operations based on resources 3 6 repetitive assembly 6 4 creating a workday calendar 1 30 1 36 Sequence numbe
53. Work Breakdown Structure project work order less completion A WIP transaction that you can complete assemblies for a project and task without referencing a job or repetitive schedule Project work order less completion automatically backflushes all operation pull assembly pull and push components from project locators for hard pegged components and from common locators for non hard pegged components projected available balance Quantity on hand projected into the future if scheduled receipts are rescheduled or cancelled and new planned orders are created as per recommendations made by the planning process Calculated by the planning process as current and planned supply nettable quantity on hand scheduled receipts planned orders minus demand gross requirements Note that gross requirements for projected available includes derived demand from planned orders Note also that the planning process uses suggested due dates rather than current due dates to pass down demand to lower level items See current projected on hand Glossary 58 projected on hand The total quantity on hand plus the total scheduled receipts plus the total planned orders promise date The date on which the customer promises to pay for products or services The date on which you agree you can ship the products to your customer or that your customer will receive the products proprietary account An account segment value such as 35
54. You must define both the primary and alternate routing before you are able to perform the switch 3 14 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P To switch between a primary and alternate routing 1 2 Navigate to the the Routings window Perform a query to display the alternate routing which you would like to switch to the primary routing Choose the Tools menu and select Switch to Primary After the switch is completed a message will appear confirming the switch Choose OK Routings 3 15 Assigning a Completion Subinventory and Locator gt Toassign a completion subinventory and locator 1 Navigate to the Routing Details window You can do this by choosing the Routing Details button from the Routings window IB Routing Details M1 Item Alternate Priority Po Product Family Completion Subinventory Locator Comment Common Routing Item 2 Enter the completion subinventory and locator See Also Completion Subinventory and Locator page 3 27 Creating a Routing Revision gt Tocreate or update a routing revision 1 Navigate to the Routing Revisions window You can do this by choosing the Revision button from the Routings window 2 Enter the routing revision 3 16 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 3 Enter an effective date and time The implementation date which is either the date the revision was added or the date the routing was transferred fro
55. a forecast into another forecast or a master schedule into another master schedule The load process shifts any entries on the source forecast or schedule onto the destination forecast or schedule forward or backward by this many days Glossary 12 category Code used to group items with similar characteristics such as plastics metals or glass items category set A feature in Inventory where users may define their own group of categories Typical category sets include purchasing materials costing and planning charge type See autocharge chase production strategy A production strategy that varies production levels to match changes in demand This production strategy results in minimal inventory carrying costs at the expense of fluctuating capacity requirements check funds To certify whether you have funds available to complete your requisition or purchase order The difference between the amount you are authorized to spend and the amount of your expenditures plus encumbrances equals your funds available You can certify funds available at any time when you enter a requisition or a purchase order You can track funds availability at different authority levels on line close A purchase order is automatically closed once it is received if you require a receipt and is billed for all purchase order shipments Since you do not require or expect any further activity Purchasing closes the purchase order You can also manu
56. a resource typically in hours required at standard and the actual amount used to manufacture an assembly elapsed time The clock time between start and completion For example if the build time of a resource is 10 hours but you only schedule 5 hours of work a day the elapsed time is 29 hours electronic commerce Conducting business via an electronic medium This includes methods of exchanging business information electronically such as Electronic Data Interchange EDI FAX email and eforms Electronic Data Interchange EDI Exchanging business documents electronically between trading partners EDI subscribes to standard formats for conducting these electronic transactions as stated by various standards electronic funds transfer A method of payment in which your bank transfers funds electronically from your bank account into another bank account In Oracle Payables funds are transferred from your account into that of a supplier This information is sent to the bank in a file elemental variance A work in process variance between the standard of an assembly and the actual charges to a standard job or repetitive schedule distributed by cost element employee supervisor hierarchy An approval routing structure based on employee super visor relationships See position hierarchy encumbrance See purchase order encumbrance encumbrance type An encumbrance category that allows you to track your expenditures according to
57. an agreement You can assign discounts to agreements that are automatically applied You can refer to an agreement when you enter an order for a particular customer and have relevant default values automatically fill in the order using standard value rule sets See also customer family agreement generic agreement agreement type A classification for agreements Reference agreement types in defining discounts or automatic note rules classify your agreements to control selection of agreements during order entry and for reporting purposes alert A specific condition defined in Oracle Alert that checks your database and performs actions based on the information it finds there alert action In Oracle Quality an electronic mail message operating system script SQL script or concurrent program request that is invoked when specified action rule conditions are met Glossary 4 alert input A parameter that determines the exact definition of an alert condition You can set the input to different values depending upon when and to whom you are sending the alert For example an alert testing for users to change their passwords uses the number of days between password changes as an input Oracle Alert does not require inputs when you define an alert alert output A value that changes based on the outcome at the time Oracle Alert checks the alert condition Oracle Alert uses outputs in the message sent to the alert recipient although
58. an asset until you consume it You recognize the cost of an inventory item as an expense when you consume it or sell it You generally value the inventory for an item by multiplying the item standard cost by the quantity on hand inventory organization An organization that tracks inventory transactions and balances and or that manufactures or distributes products inventory parameters The set of controls default options and default account numbers that determine how Inventory functions inventory transaction A record of material movement The basic information for a transaction includes the item number the quantity moved the transaction amount the accounting flexfields and the date See material transaction invoice A document you create in Oracle Receivables that lists amounts owed for the purchases of goods or services This document may list any tax and freight charges A summarized list of charges including payment terms invoice item information and other information that is sent to a customer for payment invoice batch A group of invoices you enter together to ensure accurate invoice entry Invoices within the same batch share the same batch source and batch name Receivables displays any differences between the control and actual counts and amounts An invoice batch can contain invoices in different currencies A Payables feature that allows you to enter multiple invoices together in a group You enter the batch
59. are transferred to stock and a credit can be issued If unacceptable the items can be returned to the customer or scrapped receiving open interface A set of interface tables in Purchasing that lets you import information from outside of Purchasing from Oracle or non Oracle applications Some examples of information imported into the receiving open interface are Advance Shipment Notices ASNs The receiving open interface validates the information before importing it into the Purchasing application receiving organization For drop ship orders the purchasing organization that records receipt of a drop shipped item Glossary 62 recipient Anyone that receives a mail message as a result of mail message action rule processing reciprocal customer relationship An equal relationship shared between two customers Both customers share agreements enter invoices against each others commitments and pay off each other s debit items record identifier A record identifier consists of either one or two characters which Oracle Bills of Material uses to identify each record type For example Oracle Bills of Material can identify a payment record in BAI bank files because this record always starts with the character 0 in the first position of the record Reduce MPS Anitem attribute the Planning Manager uses to decide when to reduce the quantity on master production schedule entries for the item to zero A value of None means the Plannin
60. assigning to a different operation and so on or the item lead times roll up the cumulative lead times 7 18 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also gt To roll up cumulative lead times 1 po Wi Ox 99 93 d 10 Navigate to the Calculate Lead Times window See Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Select Request for the Type Select Rollup Cumulative Lead Times for the Name Indicate a range of items or a specific item If you chose a specific item enter the item Optionally enter a revision for the item Enter the date and time to explode the bill of material If you chose to roll up cumulative lead times for a range of items enter a beginning and ending range If you chose to roll up cumulative lead times for a range of items you may enter a category set to roll up the cumulative lead times of the items associated with this category set The default is the category set you defined for your functional area If you chose to enter a category set enter a beginning and ending category Attention You can calculate lead times from the Routings form when creating or updating a routing See Creating a Routing page 3 10 Manufacturing Lead Time Computations page 7 6 Manufacturing Lead Times 7 19 7 20 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide CHAPTER Sse Reports T his chapter describes Oracle Bills of Material reports Each description includes a sample report with a descri
61. bill of material You can multiply the component usage by an explosion quantity to get an extended quantity In the Submit Requests window select Bill of Material Structure Report in the Name field All Organizations Choose one of the following options No Report the bill structure for the current orga nization Yes Report the bill structure for all organizations having the same item master organization as the current organization and for only those organizations accessible by the user responsi bility Organization Hierarchy Enter a valid organization hierarchy name from the list of values If the value for the All Organizations parameter is set to No and you have provided a value for the Organization Hierarchy parameter then the report will provide bill structure information for the current organization and all organizations below the current organization in the specified organization hierarchy If this parameter is left blank and the All Organizations parameter is set to No then the report will provide bill structure information for the current organization You can enter a value in this field only if you have entered No in the All Organizations field Item Selection Choose one of the following options Reports 8 7 8 8 Range Report the bill structure for the range of items you specify Specific Report the bill structure for the specific item you specify Item Enter a specific item to report
62. bills and routing operations 2 15 Copy window Copying Bill and Routing Information 2 15 Copying Calendar and Shift Information 1 39 Cost rollup 3 13 3 21 configuration item 5 36 Cost type for overhead and resource associations 1 28 for resource overhead rate associations 1 28 Costed resource 1 26 3 9 Costing information 2 28 Count point 3 23 3 27 Cumulative lead time computations 7 14 manufacturing lead time 7 14 total lead time 7 15 Cumulative lead times rolling up 7 18 Cumulative manufacturing lead time calculation 7 14 7 15 Cumulative total lead time calculation 7 15 D Dates effective from and effective date 2 12 2 35 effective to and inactive after 2 35 inactive on 2 35 release dates 5 25 Delete entity and deletion constraints 1 16 Delete if in deletion constraints 1 16 Delete Items report 8 15 Delete Operation window Deleting Components and Operations 4 6 Delete processed rows importing bills and routings 1 45 Deletion 4 2 component 4 4 components and operations 4 6 constraints predefined 4 8 Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations 4 3 operation 4 5 Deletion constraint 1 11 Deletion Constraints window Creating Custom Deletion Constraints 1 16 Deletion group 4 3 Department 1 18 1 19 for standard operations 3 23 Department
63. calculates this value Purchased items have no cumulative manufacturing lead time cumulative total lead time The total time required to make an item if no inventory existed and you had to order all the raw Glossary 18 materials and make all subassemblies level by level Bills of Material automatically calculates this value current aggregate repetitive schedule The sum of all current work in process repetitive schedules for an item for all lines for a given period in terms of a daily rate and a start and end date Current aggregate repetitive schedules can be firm or partially firm If all current repetitive schedules for an item are firm then the current aggregate repetitive schedule for the item is also firm If some but not all the current repetitive schedules for an item are firm then the current repetitive schedule is partially firm current average cost The current weighted average cost per unit of an item before a transaction is processed See new average cost current on hand quantity Total quantity of the item on hand before a transaction is processed current date The present system date current projected on hand Quantity on hand projected into the future if scheduled receipts are not rescheduled or cancelled and new planned orders are not created as per recommendations made by the planning process Calculated by the planning process as current supply nettable quantity on hand scheduled receipts g
64. can choose to include all or a subset of sales orders specify whether to consider demand time fence and specify whether to consume the source forecast during the load You can also specify update options to control consumption of the source forecast during the load When copying master schedules you can choose to modify the source master schedule by a specified number of carry forward days When loading sales orders you can choose to load all or a subset of sales orders and you can specify whether to consider the demand time fence during the load You can use the master schedule interface table to load master schedules from external sources material interface The ability of a project task to be associated with either resources or items Items are associated with a project may be procured through purchasing issued through Inventory transactions to the project or to be supplied by a WIP job in Work In Process material overhead A rate or amount you allocate to the cost of your item usually based on the total material value of the item Typical examples include material handling Glossary 41 purchasing and freight expenses You may also charge material overhead on assembly completions and purchase order receipts as a fixed amount per item or lot or base it on your activity costs See also overhead material overhead default Defaults you create for your material overheads Used when you define your items Your material overhea
65. can choose to overwrite all or a subset of existing entries in the destination forecast specify whether to explode the source forecast and specify whether to consume the source forecast You can choose to modify the source forecast by a modification percent or roll the source forecast forward or backward by a specified number of carry forward days You can also load compiled statistical and focus forecasts from Inventory and you can use the forecast interface table to load forecasts into Master Scheduling MRP from external sources forecast only For a Planning Schedule indicates that the schedule forecast requirements include Unimplemented Planned Orders and Approved Requisitions forecast set A group of complementing forecasts For each forecast set you specify a forecast level consumption use update time fence days outlier update percents disable date default time bucket and demand class A forecast set can have one or many forecasts within it foreign currency A currency you define for your set of books for recording and conducting accounting transactions in a currency other than your functional currency When you enter and pay an invoice ina foreign currency Oracle Bills of Material automatically converts the foreign currency into your functional currency based on the exchange rate you define See also exchange rate functional currency forward An action you take to send a document to another employee without
66. classes 1 9 1 17 Department Classes window Creating a Department Class 1 17 Departments window Defining a Department 1 10 1 19 Descriptive element 2 18 Descriptive Elements window Assigning Descriptive Elements 2 14 2 18 Detailed scheduling 6 3 Differences only 2 31 Discrete job scheduling 6 3 Display option 2 28 Dynamic lead time offsetting 6 5 6 7 Dynamic Routing See Routing Dynamic E Effectivity dates See Dates Employees window Defining a Resource 1229 Enable outside processing 1 26 Engineering bills of material 2 3 Index 3 Equipment Types window Defining a Resource 1 29 Exception template name 1 35 Exception template name 1 8 Exception Templates window Creating a Workday Exception Template 1 34 1 35 Exceptions window Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions 1 43 Extended quantity 2 39 calculation 2 39 F Failure message deletion constraint 1 17 Fixed lead time calculation 7 9 Flow Routing See Routing Flow Routing Folders Bills Summary window 2 11 Routings Summary window 3 11 Funds checking See Glossary Funds reservation See Glossary G General ledger account See Absorption account Group 4 3 I Implemented only 2 28 Import bills of material 1 45 Import Item Information window Importing Bills and Routings 1 45 Import routings 1
67. date for a forecast entry for anitem A forecast for an item has a forecast date and an associated quantity forecast demand A part of your total demand that comes from forecasts not actual sales orders forecast end date A forecast end date implies that until that date the same quantity is scheduled for each day week or period that falls between the forecast date and the end date A forecast date with no forecast end date is the quantity for that particular day week or period depending on the bucket size forecast end item The parent item for components that receive exploded forecasts during forecast explosion Used to identify the highest level planning or model item from which forecasts for a component can be exploded forecast entry A forecast for an inventory item stated by a date an optional rate end date and quantity forecast explosion Explosion of the forecast for planning and model bills of material The forecasted demand for the planning or model bill is passed down to create forecasted demand for its components You can choose to explode the forecast when loading a forecast forecast level The level at which a forecast is defined Also the level at which to consume a forecast Example forecast levels include items customers customer bill to and customer ship to locations forecast load The process of copying one or more source forecasts into a single destination forecast When copying forecasts you
68. departure material transaction Transfer between issue from receipt to or adjustment to an inventory organization subinventory or locator Receipt of completed assemblies into inventory from a job or repetitive schedule Issue of component items from inventory to work in process Maximum Order Quantity An item attribute the planning process uses to modify the size of planned order quantities or repetitive daily rates for the item For discretely planned items when net requirements exceed the maximum order quantity the planning process suggests the maximum order quantity For repetitively planned items when average daily demand for a repetitive planning period exceeds the maximum order quantity the planning process suggests the maximum order quantity as the repetitive daily rate Use this attribute for example to define an order quantity above which you do not have sufficient capacity to build the item maximum rate The maximum number of completed assemblies a production line can produce per hour memory based planner The process in the memory based planning engine that performs a gross to net explosion Under the standard planning engine the planner performs memory based planner functions memory based planning engine A planning engine that drives the planning process It performs the gross to net explosion in memory and offers a short overall planning run time It employs a high degree of concurrency among snapsho
69. describe the resource For example you could assign ASI to signify assembler grade 1 or WE for welder 3 Optionally enter an inactive date after which you can no longer assign this resource 4 Select a resource type Amount Currency the set of books currency as defined in Oracle General Ledger Machine Miscellaneous Person or physical Space 5 Enter a unit of measure UOM that describes how you measure the resource You can update this if the BOM Update Resource VOM profile option is set to Yes Note This field is protected from changes if this resource is used for any operation with the Schduled field set to Yes and if you have previously set it as a time based UOM See Assigning Operation Resources page 3 18 1 26 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 10 11 Select a charge type When an operation is completed Oracle Work in Process records the units applied to the job or repetitive schedule in the resource unit of measure for all resources you charge manually or automatically See Charge Types page 3 30 Select a basis type by which to charge and schedule the resource Item Charge and schedule the resource where the resource usage quantity is the amount required per assembly unit you make Lot Charge and schedule the resource where the resource usage quantity is the amount required per job or schedule Select an expenditure type for this resource If the Project Cost Collection Enable
70. describes new features in 111 This information is updated for each new release of Oracle Bills of Material The new features section also includes information about any features that were not yet available when this guide was printed For example if your administrator has installed software from a mini pack or an upgrade this document describes the new features Online help patches are available on MetaLink Preface xiii Related User s Guides e 11i Features Matrix This document lists new features available by patch and identifies any associated new documentation The new features matrix document is available on MetaLink e Readme File Refer to the readme file for patches that you have installed to learn about new documentation or documentation patches that you can download Oracle Bills of Material shares business and setup information with other Oracle Applications products Therefore you may want to refer to other user s guides when you set up and use Oracle Bills of Material If you require printed guides you can purchase them from the Oracle Store at http oraclestore oracle com Guides Related to All Products Oracle Applications User s Guide This guide explains how to enter data query run reports and navigate using the graphical user interface GUI available with this release of Oracle Bills of Material and any other Oracle Applications products This guide also includes information on setting user prof
71. entities are deleted The delete concurrent program updates the entity s status to Error Check OK or Deleted A status of Pending indicates the delete program has not run yet P To review errors 1 Choose the Errors button to see why the entity could not be deleted Do this from either the Components Operations or Delete Groups windows Deleting Information 4 5 2 See Also Choose the View Constraint button or the drill down indicator to see the violated deletion constraint Item Deletion Oracle Inventory User s Guide Deletion Constraints page 4 8 Creating Custom Deletion Constraints page 1 16 Deleting Components and Operations page 4 6 Delete Items Report page 8 15 Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals Deleting Components and Operations 4 6 You can delete components from the Bills of Material or operations from the Routings window gt Todelete components and operations 1 2 Navigate to either the Bills of Material or Routings windows Do one of the following e If deleting a component select a component e If deleting an operation select an operation Choose either the Delete Record icon or Delete from the Edit menu The Delete Component or Delete Operation window appears A default value for the delete group name may appear depending upon the last entity deleted Do one of the following accept the default delete group name
72. facilitate bill of resource generation and capacity planning in Oracle Capacity Context Perform this step once per installation See Also Defining a Resource page 1 24 Setting Up 1 9 1 10 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Define Simulation Sets Optional You can group deviations to available resource capacity for resource shifts and use each set in shop floor scheduling and capacity planning Context Perform this step once per installation See Also Defining a Resource page 1 24 Define Locations Optional You define delivery locations for departments with outside processing resources Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Defining a Resource page 1 24 Define Departments Optional You can define departments as areas within your organization where you perform work and or collect costs Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Defining a Department page 1 19 Assign Resources and Resource Shifts to Departments Optional You can assign resources to a department and then assign shifts to those resources You can group department resources by resource group and assign a simulation set with capacity modifications for each resource shift Default If you skip this step lt enter value here gt will be used as the default value Context Perform this step once per organizational department See Also Assigning Res
73. field set to No since the new item is a mandatory item with no options in its bill The routing for the Laptop Computer configuration includes step 25 to Clean processor since the 486 processor was chosen which referenced step 25 Since step 25 is Option Dependent in the model routing it would have been dropped if you had not chosen the 486 processor option 5 34 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also You can create ATO configurations with flow routings You can define multiple routings for an ATO model and designate them as a flow or non flow routing AutoCreate Configuration Items uses the primary routing of the base model and creates a flow routing if the primary routing is a flow routing and vice versa The following table presents a discrete routing for a configuration item Discrete Routing for Configuration Item Option Operation Operation Dependent Department Description Casing Cut and smooth case edges Assembly 1 Attach keyboard and cable Assembly 1 Clean processor Assembly 2 Insert processor into board Assembly 3 Attach monitor cable glare screen Packaging Wrap OS kit with power supply In a flow manufacturing environment routings are structured with operations processes and events Operations and processes have networks associated with them and events are assigned to the operations and processes When a configured routing is created in a flow environment Bills of Material copies the entir
74. general ledger account number affected by receipts issuances and shipments of an inventory item Oracle Order Entry allows dynamic creation of this account number for shipments recording using the OE Account Generator item type in Oracle Workflow See also Account Generator cost subelement A subdivision of cost element You can define unlimited cost subelements for each cost element cost type A set of costs for items activities resources outside processing and overheads You may have unlimited cost types for each organization but only one is used to record cost transactions The Frozen Standard cost type is used for standard costing the Average Costs type is used for Average costing Others could be defined for simulation or temporary purposes cost variance The difference between the actual and expected cost Oracle Manufacturing and Payables supports the following cost variances invoice price resource rate and standard cost variances cotermination Setting the same end date for all ordered or renewed service programs count point operation A default operation to move to and from where you record move and charge resource transactions Also known as pay point credit check An Oracle Order Entry feature that automatically checks a customer order total against predefined order and total order limits If an order exceeds the limit Oracle Order Entry places the order on hold for review by your finance group See also c
75. group of users that use the engineering change order system You assign users to an ECO department to control access to your ECOs engineering change order reason The purpose of an ECO engineering change order status A classification you can use to track and control an ECO s life cycle ECO statuses include Glossary 26 Open Hold Release Schedule Implement and Cancelled engineering change order type An ECO field that identifies the originating ECO department and the items you can include on an ECO manufacturing or engineering engineering item A prototype part material subassembly assembly or product you have not yet released to production You can order stock and build engineering items entity A data object that holds information for an application event alert An alert that runs when a specific event occurs that you define For example you can define an event alert to immediately send a message to the buyer if an item is rejected on inspection exception An occurrence of the specified condition found during an alert check For example an alert testing for invoices on hold may find five invoices on hold or none Each invoice on hold is an exception exception message A message received indicating a situation that meets your predefined exception set for an item such as Items that are overcommitted Items with excess inventory and Orders to be rescheduled out exception reporting An integrated sys
76. include WIP Sales Order and Internal Sales Order The default number of days is 90 Note You can delete item information for completed configurations from the database including the bills of material and routings The ability to delete configuration items is subject to the same deletion constraints that operate for other item types as well Deletion Constraints page 4 8 Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations page 4 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide CHAPTER Manufacturing Scheduling T his chapter tells you everything you need to know about manufacturing scheduling including Overview of Manufacturing Scheduling page 6 2 Detailed Scheduling page 6 3 Repetitive Line Scheduling page 6 4 Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting page 6 5 Required Lead Time Information page 6 7 Lead Time Offsetting Computations page 6 8 Manufacturing Scheduling 6 1 Overview of Manufacturing Scheduling Oracle Manufacturing schedules production orders and operation dates using three scheduling methods e detailed scheduling e repetitive line scheduling e dynamic lead time offsetting Oracle Manufacturing Products and Scheduling The following table lists the Oracle Manufacturing products that schedule orders and operations and indicates their scheduling method Manufacturing Scheduling Product Oracle Work in Process Oracle Work in Process Oracle Bills of Material Or
77. it will always calculate both However you can remove the Lead Time calculation activity from the workflow if you do not want to perform lead time calculations Program Parameters Definition Release Date Option When you start the AutoCreate Configuration Items concurrent program you can specify Release Offset Days or Flow Schedule start date to help you minimize the impact of order changes on the planning process By entering the Release Offset Days you can create configuration items only for sales orders whose work order or flow schedule must be released within that number of days In other words Configure to Order 5 25 if you specify Release Offset Days 2 then you only create configuration items for orders whose work order or flow schedule must begin within two days The AutoCreate Configuration Item process searches your new orders finds your orders for assemble to order models and assigns an estimated work order or flow schedule release date to these order lines Oracle Manufacturing computes the estimated work order or flow schedule release date by offsetting the scheduled ship date by the order lead time through the workday calendar Using the lead time information for the model item as specified in the item master Oracle Manufacturing calculates order lead time as follows fixed lead time quantity x variable lead time After assigning the estimated work order or flow schedule release dates to the new orde
78. item Component requirements are calculated by multiplying the component usage quantity by the explosion quantity and then multiplying the component planning percent Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Creating Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals 8 10 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bills of Material Parameters Report Use the Bills of Material Parameters Report to report bill of material default parameters You use these parameters to define modes of operation and default values for Oracle Bills of Material Report Submission In the Submit Requests window select Bills of Material Parameters Report in the Name field See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Reports 8 11 Consolidated Bill of Material Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Consolidated Bill of Material Report to summarize component usage at all levels for a manufacturing bill of material In the Submit Requests window select Consolidated Bill of Material Report in the Name field Item Selection Choose one of the following options Range Report the consolidated bill for the range of items you specify Specific Report the consolidated bill for the specific item you specify Item Enter a specific item Alternate Selection Choose one of the following options All Report the consolidated bill for the primary and alternate ass
79. item An item you want to order but do not want to maintain in the Items window You define a one time item when you create a requisition or purchase order You can report or query on a one time item by specifying the corresponding item class one time note A unique message you can attack to an order return order line or return line to convey important information open Anopen purchase order exists if the purchase order has any lines that have not been fully invoiced and are not cancelled If you require receipt for items you order an open purchase order exists if any lines have not been fully received and fully invoiced and are not cancelled open interface A Manufacturing function that lets you import or export data from other systems through an open interface An example is a bar code reader device accumulating data you later import into your manufacturing system for further processing open requirement A WIP material requirement you have not yet transacted to a discrete job or repetitive schedule It equates to the component quantity required less any quantity issued operating script action An operating system script invoked by action rule processing in Oracle Quality operating unit An organization that partitions data for subledger products AP AR PO OE Itis roughly equivalent to a single pre Multi Org installation operation A step in a manufacturing process where you perform work on add value to and consu
80. items You define it by setting the OE Item Validation Organization profile option You must define all items and bills in your Item Validation Organization but you also need to maintain your items and bills in separate organizations if you want to ship them from other warehouses Order Entry refers to organizations as warehouses on all Order Entry forms and reports See also organization J job A category of personnel in your organization Examples of a typical job include Vice President Buyer and Manager See also position job costing A method of collecting and reporting costs for each individual discrete job Includes costs in due to material resource and overhead transactions and costs out due to completions scrap and variances Used for standard and non standard asset discrete jobs job status An Oracle Manufacturing function that lets you describe various stages in the life cycle of a discrete job and control activities that you can perform on the job just in time delivery JIT To have only the required inventory delivered exactly when needed K kanban A visual signal to drive material replenishment A Kanban system delivers material into production as needed to meet demand kanban A visual signal to drive material replenishment A Kanban system delivers material into production as needed to meet demand key flexfield A set of segments You choose the number of segments you want the length of each s
81. items or extracted materials that are converted by the manufacturing process into components and or products read consistency A consistent view of all table data committed by transactions and all changes made by the user up to the time of the read receipt A shipment from one supplier that can include many items ordered on many purchase orders receipt exception A control that you can set to indicate to your accounts payable group that you want to place the corresponding invoice on hold until further notice You designate whether your purchase order shipment Glossary 61 should be a receipt exception when you receive the item receipt line An individual receipt transaction that identifies receipt of an item against a purchase order shipment receipt routing A method of simplifying transaction entry by specifying routing steps for receipts receipt traveler An internal routing ticket you place on received goods to show their final destination received quantity The quantity of an inventory item returned by a customer for which you are not issuing a credit Sometimes this is temporary while you evaluate the condition of the item at other times you return the items to the customer or keep them but do not allow a credit See also accepted quantity receiving and inspection A condition of a returned inventory item signifying it has been received but is being inspected for damage If in acceptable condition the items
82. its bill structure Alternate Selection Choose one of the following options All Report the bill structure for the primary and alternate assemblies Primary Report the bill structure for only the primary assembly Specific Report the bill structure for the alternate as sembly you specify Alternate Enter a specific alternate to report Revision Enter a revision for the item The bill structure associated with this revision is printed Date Enter a revision date and time If you entered a specific item and a revision the date defaults to the highest date of the revision The bill structure effective as of this date and time is printed Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the beginning and ending item numbers Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Category Set Enter a category set The bill structure information associated with this category set is reported The category set you defined for your functional area is the default Categories From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending category Levels to Explode Enter the number of levels to explode for the bill of material The default is the value specified when bill of material parameters were defined Implemented Only Indicate whether to report only implemented or all components used by assemblies as of the effective date Display Option Choos
83. just like a standard item Note Preconfiguring also creates routing See Also Profiles Oracle Configure To Order Implementation Manual Configuration Item Catalog Bills of Materials helps you catalog your configurations so you can easily search for a pre existing configuration item definitions or on hand configurations Configure to Order 5 37 The AutoCreate Configuration Item concurrent program automatically assigns the new configuration item to the same Item Catalog Group as the model and assigns catalog descriptive element values based on the options chosen depending on how you setup your item catalog and model and option class bills And you can specify that certain catalog descriptive elements should become part of the configuration item s description For example you could define item catalog groups for personal computers processors monitors and operating systems and assign descriptive elements to each that represent key characteristics of items in that group The Personal Computers catalog group might have all descriptive elements while the catalog groups for the main components of a personal computer would have only the element that applies to that type of component The following table presents catalog groups Catalog Groups Include in Item Catalog Group Element Name Description Personal Computers Processor Type Personal Computers Monitor Personal Computers OS Processors Processor Type
84. material and is no longer controlled through an ECO Implementation date does not necessarily equal the effective date incident An entry logged in Oracle Service to record a customer s request for product service You can log a different incident for each issue a customer reports including questions about products problems using the products requests for preventive maintenance and requests for service contract renewals included item A standard mandatory component in a bill indicating that it ships if shippable whenever its parent item is shipped Included items are components of models kits and option classes independent demand Demand for an item unrelated to the demand for other items initialization Defines cycle count classes and items based on an already existing ABC compile inspection A procedure you perform to ensure that items received conform to your quality standards You can use inspections to prevent payment for goods and services that fail to meet your quality standards intangible item A non physical item sold to your customers such as consulting services or a warranty Intangible items are Glossary 34 non shippable and do not appear on pick slips and pack slips See also shippable item inter organization transfer Transfer of items from one inventory organization to another You can have freight charges and transfer credits associated with inter organization transfer You can choose to ship it
85. number that identifies the original sales order for the returning item See also reference document type reject For Oracle Automotive Oracle Service and Oracle Work in Process reject is an intraoperation step in an operation where you can record assemblies that require rework or need to be scrapped For Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Quality reject is an option you use to indicate that you do not want to approve a document Purchasing returns the document to its owner for modification and resubmission if appropriate reject over quantity tolerance An option you use to disallow receipts that exceed the tolerance level related item An acceptable substitute you define for an item so that you may receive the item if your supplier cannot ship the original item on the purchase order release An actual order of goods and services you issue against a blanket purchase agreement The blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and the prices of the items The release specifies the actual quantities and dates ordered for the items You identify a release by the combination of blanket purchase agreement number and release number release date The date when you release a discrete job or repetitive schedule to the shop floor signifying that work can begin and the discrete job or repetitive schedule becomes transactable release only For a Shipping Schedule Indicates that the schedule release requirements include Appr
86. numeric measurements See collection element types variable lead time The time required to produce one additional unit of an assembly To compute an item s total lead time multiply variable lead time by order quantity and add an item s fixed lead time variance An accounting term used to express the difference between an expected cost and an actual cost A variance can be favorable or unfavorable Variances are usually written directly to the income statement as a period expense variance account An account where you record your variance charges You can maintain several variance accounts in your work in process system depending on what you are charging and which class you use vehicle An exact instance of a vehicle type for example truck123 This information is sent to the customer through the Advance Ship Notice vehicle type The outermost container such as a truck or railcar vendor See supplier W warehouse See organization warranty A non billable zero monetary service item attached directly to a product at shipment waybill A document containing a list of goods and shipping instructions relative to a shipment waybill number The number associated with a waybill that you record for the shipping batch at ship confirmation WIP See work in process WIP accounting class A set of accounts that you use to charge the production of an assembly You assign accounting classes to discrete jobs and repetitiv
87. of their respective owners Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Contents Preface Preface 4 easet Rh Sie aces RAUS Gea eee IRR Riera aper iii Audience for This Guide ecrire iv How To Use Ihis Guide err br RR RRRRESS iv Documentation Accessibility 0 0 00 cece eee iv Other Information Sources 6 6 0 6 cece eee eee eee v Online Documentation ire Rien RE e Ur RETE v Related User s Guides eese erred vi Guides Related to All Products 0000 vi User Guides Related to This Product sse vi Installation and System Administration viii Other Implementation Documentation x Training and Support 0 0 cece eee eens x About Oracle 23 0124 cdtbeot seine hr RI ed xi Your Feedback 4i eer teet pe xii Chapter 1 Setning We sb PEE 1 1 Overview of Setting Up c0 ceceevaees c eee eaten ea 1 2 Related Product Setup Steps 0 6 0 e cece eee eee 1 2 Setup Flowchart and Checklist 0 00000 ee 1 4 Setup STEPS sette br pL EVER UE PEE RUP EP dh 1 7 Defining Bills of Material Parameters 1 13 Creating Alternates nassertorri toniet piest EEE E 1 15 Creating Custom Deletion Constraints 1 16 Creating a Department Class 6 0000 e eee eee 1 18 Defining a Department 0 066 1 19 Contents iii Chapter 2 Assigning Resources to a Department sss
88. optional items available when orders are placed for components on option class bills If you enter a minimum sales order quantity you must also enter a maximum sales order quantity You can only enter a minimum and maximum quantity range that contains the quantity for the component If you update the component quantity the minimum and maximum values are changed to include the new component quantity De Attention These attributes do not apply to mandatory standard components If the component is an option class item you must indicate whether you want to override the default quantity for the option class when a sales order is entered the default Option class quantities affect the mandatory standard components assigned to the option class If you select None for the Basis field Oracle Order Management can override the default quantity for the option class Order Management defaults the total quantity to release as the component quantity multiplied by the option class extended quantity If you select Option class for the Basis field Order Management cannot override the default quantity for the option class Order Management calculates the total quantity to release as the component quantity multiplied by the option class extended quantity Bills of Material 2 43 Note Set the basis to Option class for an ATO option class component When creating a configuration bill Oracle Manufacturing computes the total quantity required for a ma
89. planning process ignores it prerequisite A combination of a specific order cycle action and an associated result that must occur before an order progresses to its next action in an order cycle See also cycle action order cycle passing result previous level costs The material material overhead outside processing resource and overhead costs of the components used in the manufacture of an assembly price adjustment The difference between the list price of an item and its actual selling price Price adjustments can have a positive or negative impact on the list price Price adjustments that lower the list price are also commonly known as discounts Price adjustments can be for an order line or the entire order price breakline Supplier pricing information for an item or purchasing category on a quotation The price you enter on a price break line depends on the quantity you order from your supplier Usually suppliers provide you with price break line structures to indicate the price you would pay for an item depending on the quantity you order Generally the more you order the less expensive your unit price Also depending on the quantity you order a supplier may provide you with different purchase conditions such as advantageous payment or freight terms when you buy in large quantities price list A register of all the products you offer and the selling price for each pricing components Combinations of pricing para
90. processing enabled 1 26 Outside processing operation 3 9 Overhead 1 10 to associate to resource 1 28 Owning department for borrowed resources 1 21 P Parameters window Defining Bill of Material Parameters 1 12 Perform lead time calculation 5 25 Personal profile option bill of material access 2 9 Phantoms 1 13 2 3 Pick to Order ATP check 5 15 basis option class 5 14 catalog configurations 5 21 deactivate configuration item 5 41 hybrid 5 3 Kit 5 3 model 5 3 model bill 5 8 5 17 option class bill 5 10 option dependent routing steps discrete manufacturing 5 18 flow manufacturing 5 20 Index 5 planning bill 5 6 standard bills 5 12 Plan 2 25 Planned order release date calculation 6 9 Planning bills of material 2 3 Planning percent 2 13 2 38 Primary and alternate bills 2 5 Primary and Alternate Routings 3 2 Primary bills of material 2 5 Processes Autocreating configuration items 5 24 Calculating Manufacturing Lead Times 7 17 Deactivating Configuration Items 5 41 Importing Bills and Routings 1 45 Rolling Up Cumulative Lead Times 7 18 Processing lead time 7 3 calculation 7 11 Product Families 2 46 assigning members 2 47 Create 2 46 Setting Planning Percentages 2 48 Profile options 1 46 Profile options 1 7 Proprietary account See Glossary
91. product The primary routing is the default routing for defining a job and calculating manufacturing lead times primary salesperson The salesperson that receives 100 of the sales credits when you first enter your order invoice or commitment primary unit of measure The stocking unit of measure for an item in a particular organization prime cost A cost which is charged directly to a work in process job or subinventory Any labor or non labor resource or material is a prime cost overheads are not priority See line priority process A set of Oracle Workflow activities that need to be performed to accomplish a business goal See also Account Generator process activity process definition process activity An Oracle Workflow process modelled as an activity so that it can be referenced by other processes also known as a subprocess See also process Glossary 56 process definition An Oracle Workflow process as defined in the Oracle Workflow Builder See also process processing days See repetitive processing days processing lead time The time required to procure or manufacture an item For manufactured assemblies processing lead time equals the manufacturing lead time processing status The processing state of a row record in an open interface table Common statuses include but are not restricted to Pending Running and Error See repetitive processing days product A finished item that you sell See also
92. quantity The quantity can differ from the component usage quantity Oracle Master Scheduling MRP reports these substitutes on some planning reports such as the MRP Detail Report Oracle Work in Process does not consider substitute items in its pick lists Planning bills and model option class and planning components cannot have substitute components gt To assign substitute components 1 Navigate to the Substitute Components window Do this by choosing the Substitutes button from the Bills of Material window 2 Enter a substitute item for the component If you are using Bills of Material use a manufacturing item if you are using Oracle Engineering use an engineering or a manufacturing item 3 Enter the quantity of the substitute item needed to replace the full component quantity This quantity can differ from the bill usage quantity of the component Defining Item Revisions P Todefine an item revision 1 Navigate to the Item Revisions window Do this by choosing the Revisions button from the Bills of Material window 2 Enter an alphanumeric revision for the item 3 Enter the effective date of the item revision Bills of Material 2 21 See Also Item and Routing Revisions page 2 6 Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents See Also You can attach documents to bills of material or to routing operations To define bill or routing operation documents m Navigate to either the Bill Docum
93. revised item the work in process requirements are automatically updated for the revised item upper and lower specification limits Defines a valid range of acceptable values usage An attribute of your standard and one time notes that determines how Purchasing should handle them usage quantity The quantity of a component including component yield required to produce one assembly in a discrete job or repetitive schedule as stated on the bill of materials usage rate The amount of a resource consumed at an operation usage variance A quantity variance defined as the difference between the amount of material required at standard and the actual amount you use to manufacture an assembly use up item A revised component whose MRP planned order date and lead time offset determine the effective date of the revised item utilization Ratio of direct time charged to the clock time scheduled for the resource V valuation account Your inventory and work in process asset accounts set up in Inventory Work in Process and Purchasing Glossary 82 value Data you enter in a parameter A value can be a date a name or a code depending on the parameter value added See outside processing value basis An attribute you associate with a line type to indicate whether you order items for this line type by quantity or amount VAN S Value Added Network Supplier variable collection element A collection element that represents
94. sche ma Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s GuideOracle Configurator Administration Guide 8 30 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide APPENDIX Oracle Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths T his appendix shows you the default navigator path for each Oracle Bills of Material window Refer to this appendix when you do not already know the navigator path for a window you want to use Oracle Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths A 1 Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths For windows described in other manuals Refer to this manual for a complete window description Gk Oracle General Ledger User s Guide AR Oracle Human Resources User s Guide toe Oracle Purchasing User s Guide Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Oracle System Administrator s Guide Oracle Applications User s Guide Although your system administrator may have customized your navigator typical navigational paths are presented in the following table Note Text in brackets indicates a button Bill of Material Responsibility Add Range page 2 20 Bills gt Bills gt Designators gt Add Range Alternates page 1 15 Setup gt Alternates Bill Components Comparison page Bills gt Comparison 2 32 Bill Details page 2 17 Bills gt Bills gt Bill Details Bill Documents page 2 22 Bills Documents Bills of Material page 2 10 Bills gt B
95. selected Attention When an item is included in a product family it will be automatically assigned to the same category as the family item Commit the record by selecting Save from the File menu Attention You can commit a record without assigning planning percentages The default planning percent is 100 The default effectivity date is the system date 2 50 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also Oracle Flow Manufacturing Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Mixed Model Map Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Setting Planning Percentages for Product Family Members Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Creating a Flow Routing Oracle Flow Maufacturing User s Guide Setting Planning Percentages for Product Family Members Prerequisites QO To assign planning percentages you must first create a product family item and assign member items See Defining Product Families page 2 49 and Assigning Product Family Members page 2 50 gt To assign planning percentages to product family members 1 See Also Navigate to the Product Family window Do this by selecting Defining Product Families from the Bills of Material menu To assign planning percentages for a member item choose the Allocation button Enter the product family member s planning factor Enter effectivity dates for the item Effectivity dates cannot overlap Optionally enter comment text Commit the record by selecting
96. selection screen L LIFO last in first out costing method A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation Inventory balances and values are Glossary 37 updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed It assumes that the most recent inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped The ending inventory consists of old goods acquired in the earliest purchases or completions labor efficiency variance The difference between actual and standard man hours of work last unit completion date The date and time you plan to complete production of the last assembly on a repetitive schedule This date equates to the first unit completion date plus processing days last unit start date The date and time you plan to begin production of the last assembly on a repetitive schedule This date is the first unit start date plus processing days lead timeline The production line Bills of Material uses to calculate the processing lead time for a particular repetitive assembly since lead times may vary on different production lines lead timelotsize The item quantity used to compute the fixed and variable portions of manufacturing lead time For manufactured items the processing lead time represents the time required to build this quantity lead time percent A routing operation field that represents the percent of an item s manufacturing lead time required to complete all previous operations in
97. tabbed region and select Count Point and Autocharge options See Count Point and Autocharge page 3 27 See Charge Type page 3 30 Indicate whether to backflush components on shop floor moves at this operation A backflush transaction automatically pulls Operation pull components from inventory Work in Process also pulls all Operation pull components at non backflush operations preceding this operation through the previous completed backflush operation See Backflush Transaction Options Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Enter the minimum transfer quantity of assemblies to move from this operation to the next Work in Process will warn you if you attempt to move a number less than this value If you used a standard operation this value defaults to minimum transfer quantity defined for the standard operation Otherwise the default is 0 Open the Operation Yield tabbed region You can define routing networks for Standard Flow and Lot based routings If the routing is lot based then the Yield CUM Yield Reverse CUM Yield and Include in Rollup fields will display To enable Operation Yield in Shop Floor Management enter expected operation yields for each operation listed For example enter 0 9 for a 90 yield These fields are displayed for Shop Floor Management enabled organizations Indicate whether the operation yield is to be considered in the rollucost rollup as required by the costing team To calculate lead time
98. the routing For example if the manufacturing lead time for the assembly is ten days and an operation starts on day three the lead time percent is 20 Bills of Material calculates this value when you compute manufacturing lead times Master Scheduling MRP uses lead time percentage to schedule material Glossary 38 requirements at an operation and Capacity uses it to plan capacity requirements lead time rollup A Bill of Material program that computes cumulative lead times for items legal entity Anorganization that represents a legal company for which you prepare fiscal or tax reports You assign tax identifiers and other relevant information to this entity level production strategy A production strategy that maintains stable production levels despite changes in demand The level production strategy results in minimal fluctuations in capacity requirements at the expense of additional inventory carrying costs LIFO costing Costing method where it is assumed that items that were received most recently are transacted first line balancing Organizing work on the production line so that resources can be synchronized to daily demand license plate number LPN LPNs are unique identifiers used to store and transact inventory throughout the supply chain They store a container s contents including item revision lot and serial numbers and quantity line lead time The time required to complete the first assembly on a prod
99. the plan is generated on anon workday plus the value you enter here PO See purchase order PO move resource An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order PO move resources also automatically initiate shop floor move transactions upon receipt PO receipt resource An outside resource that is automatically charged upon receipt of a purchase order pooled location The destination in which several shipments are delivered and then grouped together to form a larger shipment Glossary 54 pooled ship to The delivery point for consolidated shipments gathered from multiple locations that will be shipped to an intermediate and or ultimate ship to location position A specific function within a job category Examples of typical positions associated with the Vice President job include Vice President of Manufacturing Vice President of Engineering and Vice President of Sales See job position hierarchy A structure of positions used to define management line reporting and control access to employee information postprocessing lead time The time required to receive a purchased item into inventory from the initial supplier receipt such as the time required to deliver an order from the receiving dock to its final destination potential material shortage Unsatisfied demand potential shortage A potential shortage exists when demand is unsatisfied You configure the jobs and schedules to be
100. the same calendar and exception template Changes to your workday information impacts your material plans capacity plans scheduling and any other function in Oracle Manufacturing that uses the workday calendar This does not apply if you are building a calendar for the first time gt To build the workday calendar m From the Tools menu choose Build or Rebuild See Also Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 1 44 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Importing Bills and Routings See Also The Bill and Routing Open Interface programs allow you to import bill and routing information Imported bills include revision component substitute component and reference designator information Imported routings include routing revision operation instruction and resource information To import bills and routings 1 2 Navigate to the Import Item Information window Indicate whether to include all organization codes in the bill of material and routing interface tables or just the current organization Attention If you specify just the current organization rows in the interface tables that do not have either an organization code or an organization ID assigned are ignored Indicate whether to import routings from the interface tables Indicate whether to import bills of material from the interface tables Indicate whether to delete processed rows from the bill of material and routing interface tables
101. this structure can correspond to your company budget account and project account numbers For simplicity Inventory and Oracle Manufacturing use the term account to refer to the accounting flexfield accounting flexfield limit The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a particular range of accounting flexfields Glossary 2 accounting period The fiscal period a company uses to report financial results such as a calendar month or fiscal period accounting rule start date The date Oracle Receivables uses for the first accounting entry it creates when you use an accounting rule to recognize revenue If you choose a variable accounting rule you need to specify a rule duration to let Oracle Receivables know how many accounting periods to use this accounting rule accounting rules Rules that Receivables AutoInvoice uses to specify revenue recognition schedules for transactions You can define an accounting rule where revenue is recognized over a fixed or variable period of time For example you can define a fixed duration accounting rule with monthly revenue recognition for a period of 12 months accounts payable accrual account The account used to accrue payable liabilities when you receive your items Always used for inventory and outside processing purchases You can also accrue expenses at the time of receipt Used by Purchasing and Inventory the accounts payable account represents your non invoiced receip
102. throughout the multilevel structure starting with this level Alternate Selection Choose one of the following options Reports 8 5 See Also All Verify the bill structure for both the primary and alternate assemblies Primary Verify the bill structure for the primary as semblies only Oracle Bills of Material dis plays this option as the default Specific Verify the bill structure for a specific alternate only Alternate Enter an alternate for the item The bill structure for item associated with this alternate is checked Revision Enter a revision for the item Date Enter the date and time to explode the bill of material Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the begining and ending item numbers Category Set Enter a category set The bill structure associated with this category set is checked The default is the category set you defined for your functional area You can enter a value in this field only if you entered Range in the Item Selection field Category From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending category Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bill of Material Structure Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Bill of Material Structure Report to report the detail for all levels of an engineering or manufacturing
103. to it you are prompted to enter a valid resource used in processing the WIP lot Item or Lot Based Resources You can specify resource usage as a fixed rate per job for activities such as setup and teardown and variable rates for resources whose usage depends on the number of units processed For lot based resources you choose the Lot basis type and your usage rate is fixed and for item based resources you choose the Item basis type to indicate that your usage rate is variable 3 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide For example you might define an operation where you schedule lot based and item based resources as presented in the following table Scheduling by Item or Lot Operation Resource Activity Resource Usage UOM Basis Resource Sequence Sequence Unit Cost LS CN CC CC Oracle Cost Management divides lot based resource usages by lot size to determine item costs For example you might define a lot based resource that represents time spent setting up a machine and a resource that represents the time to teardown the machine for the next job or schedule You could schedule and collect costs for both the setup and teardown resources Resource Scheduling You can specify usage rates either as resource units per item unit or the inverse item units per resource unit For example you could specify usage rate for a machine hour resource in either units per hour or hours per unit For each routing operation you can spec
104. total requisition limit The maximum amount you authorize an employee to approve for a specific requisition trading partner Any company that sends and receives documents via EDI transaction cost The cost per unit at which the transaction quantity is valued transaction date The date you enter and Oracle Manufacturing maintains for any manufacturing transaction The date must fall within an open accounting period and be greater than the release date for transactions on a discrete job or repetitive schedule transaction interface An open interface table through which you can import transactions See open interface transaction manager A concurrent program that controls your manufacturing transactions transaction quantity The quantity of a transaction transaction set A complete business document such as an invoice a purchase order or a remittance advice Synonym for document or message transaction set line item area The line item area encompasses the actual business transaction set and includes information such as quantities descriptions and prices transaction set summary area The summary area contains control information and other data that relate to the total transaction transaction type An invoice control feature that lets you specify default values for invoice printing posting to the general ledger and updating of open receivable balances The kind of action performed on an asset Transaction types inc
105. transaction history last forecast quantities and or information specified by the user to determine expected demand status check A set of tests Purchasing performs on a purchasing document to ensure it is in a valid state before performing an approval action subassembly An assembly used as a component in a higher level assembly subinventory Subdivision of an organization representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items such as a storeroom or receiving dock submission check A set of tests on a purchasing document to ensure it is ready to be submitted for approval processing submit To send a document to another employee without attempting to approve or reserve funds for it yourself substitute item An item that can be used in place of a component Master Scheduling MRP suggests substitutes items on some reports substitute receipt An option that lets you receive predefined acceptable substitutes for any item suggested aggregate repetitive schedule The optimal repetitive schedule suggested by MRP to satisfy a given master schedule The optimal schedule represents aggregated production for all lines and considers the constraints of planning periods item lead time firm schedules time fence control acceptable rate changes and overrun amounts suggested repetitive schedule The schedule for an individual production line for a specific item that is derived from the Suggested aggregate schedule
106. two or more organizations manufacture the same item using the same bill of material you can define the bill in one organization and reference it from the other organizations Necessary changes must then be made to the referenced bill You can create a common bill within the same organization and across multiple organizations You have the option to create common bills in all organizations under the current organization in the chosen organization hierarchy or create common bills in all organizations that have the same item master organization as the current organization and are accessible by the user responsibility Sharing bills across multiple organizations minimizes the maintenance of your bills of material When you enter orders for models kits and assemblies in Oracle Order Management you must define all bills of material in your item master organization your OE Item Validation Organization profile option value Using common bills of material you can share bills of material that exist in your manufacturing organizations with your item master organization When you define a bill for a new assembly you can reference another assembly and organization as a common bill of material You do not need to make any further entries for the bill of material The following notes apply to bills of material e You can only reference bills from organizations that have the same item master organization as the current organization Bills of Mat
107. use the same item in multiple forecasts For each inventory item you specify any number of forecast entries forecast all For a Planning Schedule This indicates that schedule forecast requirements include Unimplemented Planned Orders Approved Requisitions and Approved Supply Agreement Releases Glossary 30 forecast consumption The process of subtracting demand generated by sales orders from forecasted demand thereby preventing demand being counted twice in the planning period Forecast Control An item attribute used to determine the types of demand you place for the item Master Scheduling MRP uses the option you choose here to guide the behavior of the key processes involved in two level master scheduling forecast explosion forecast consumption planning production relief and shipment relief This attribute is only appropriate for items that are models option classes options or mandatory components of models and option classes A value of Consume means you forecast demand for the item directly rather than exploding forecast demand to the item using the forecast explosion process A value of Consume and derive means you forecast demand for the item directly or you explode forecast demand to the item using the forecast explosion process or you use a combination of both methods to forecast demand for the item A value of None means you place sales order demand but do not forecast demand for the item forecast date The
108. where the parent item is an option class or model and there is an open sales order for the parent item an item bill or component that is affected by a pending ECO mandatory standard components if there is demand for it Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations page 4 2 Item Deletion Oracle Inventory User s Guide Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide E Configure to Order CHAPTER T his chapter provides an overview of how to use the configure to order features within Oracle Bills of Material including e Overview of Configure to Order page 5 2 e Model and Option Class Bills of Material page 5 5 e AutoCreate Configuration Items page 5 24 e Deactivating Configuration Items page 5 41 Configure to Order 5 1 Overview of Configure To Order Information Sources Oracle Manufacturing enables you to define options available for products and to process orders for unique product configurations while maintaining control of inventory planning and cost accounting A Configure to Order environment is one where the product or service is assembled or kitted on receipt of the sales order Oracle Applications supports the Configure to Order environment with a range of features in order entry demand forecasting master scheduling production shipping and financial accounting Configure to Order includes Pick to Order PTO and Assemble to Order ATO items models and hybrids supports
109. you do not have to display all outputs in the alert message alpha smoothing factor A value between 0 and 1 used in statistical forecasting calculations for smoothing demand fluctuations Inventory uses the factor to determine how much weight to give to current demand when calculating a forecast alphanumeric number type An option for numbering documents employees and suppliers where assigned numbers can contain letters as well as numbers alternate bill of material An alternate list of component items you can use to produce an assembly alternate routing An alternate manufacturing process you can use to produce an assembly alternate unit of measure All other units of measure defined for an item excluding the primary unit of measure amount based order An order you place receive and pay based solely on the amount of service you purchase anchor date The start date of the first repetitive planning period It introduces consistency into the material plan by stabilizing the repetitive periods as time passes so that a plan run on any of the days during the first planning period does not change daily demand rates annual carrying cost Cost of carrying inventory defined as a percent of the dollar value of inventory per year ANSI American National Standards Institute which establishes national standards for the United States The parent organization for X12 and also serves as the North American representative to ISO
110. your general ledger revenue sales credit Sales credit you assign to your salespeople that is based on your invoice lines The total percentage of all revenue sales credit must be equal to 10076 of your invoice lines amount Also known as quota sales credits See also non revenue sales credit sales credit Glossary 67 reversing transaction A transaction that reverses a previously processed material move resource or overhead transaction revised component Component changes to an assembly that is a revised item on an ECO revised item Any item you change on an engineering change order Revised items may be purchased items subassemblies finished goods revised item status A classification you can use to track and control a revised item s life cycle Revised item statuses include Open Released Scheduled Hold Implemented and Cancelled revision A particular version of an item bill of material or routing revision control An inventory control option that tracks inventory by item revision and forces you to specify a revision for each material transaction revision quantity control A condition placed on an item that ensures that you always identify an item by its number and its revision Certain items require tighter controls than other For instance you may want to control the quantities you have in inventory for an item by revision For another item you may just want to know the quantities you have on hand acr
111. 00 that is assigned one of the five proprietary account types protection level In Oracle Workflow a numeric value ranging from 0 to 1000 that represents who the data is protected from for modification When workflow data is defined it can either be set to customizable 1000 meaning anyone can modify it or it can be assigned a protection level that is equal to the access level of the user defining the data In the latter case only users operating at an access level equal to or lower than the data s protection level can modify the data See also Account Generator PTO item See pick to order item PTO model See pick to order model pull transaction A material transaction that automatically issues component items into work in process from inventory when you move or complete the assembly Also known as post deduct or backflush See backflush transaction purchase order A type of purchase order you issue when you request delivery of goods or services for specific dates and locations You can order multiple items for each planned or standard purchase order Each purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute each shipment across multiple accounts See standard purchase order and planned purchase order purchase order encumbrance A transaction representing a legally binding purchase Purchasing subtracts purchase order encumbrances from funds available when you approve a purchase order If you cancel a pu
112. 110 flexfield A field made up of segments Each segment has a name you assign and a set of valid values See also descriptive flexfield and key flexfield Glossary 29 flexfield segment One of the parts of your key flexfield separated from the other parts by a symbol you choose such as or Each segment typically represents a cost center company item family or color code flow charging A repetitive transaction method where you charge material move resource and overhead transactions to a specific assembly on a line rather than a specific repetitive schedule See repetitive allocation flow manufacturing Manufacturing philosophy utilizing production lines and schedules instead of work orders to drive production Mixed models are grouped into families and produced on lines balanced to the TAKT time FOB See freight on board focus forecasting A simulation based forecasting process that looks at past inventory activity patterns to determine the best simulation for predicting future demand folder A flexible entry and display window in which you can choose the fields you want to see and where each appears in the window forecast An estimate of future demand on inventory items A forecast contains information on the original and current forecast quantities before and after consumption the confidence factor and any specific customer information You can assign any number of inventory items to the forecast and
113. 2 Wt Vol of Keyboard 1 Wt Vol of CPU OC 1 Wt Vol of 486 Processor 1 1 Wt Vol of Monitor 111 2 Note that the weight and volume of the Laptop manual a required item should be included in the weight and volume assigned to the Laptop Computer Model since required items are not included in the weight and volume calculations Similarly the weight and volume of the Monitor Manual a required item should be included in the weight and volume assigned to the Monitor Option Class Configure to Order 5 31 Resulting Bills of Material Single Level Bill of Material Bills of Material creates the new configuration item and then if there are no sub assembly non phantom models in the structure assigns a single level bill of material with the following components Options from the sales order e Mandatory components of the model and any option class that was included on the sales order e The Model and each Option Class included on the sales order The model and option classes appear on configuration bills as phantom components only to consume forecast and to consume master schedules Material Requirements Planning and Work In Process do not use them since all mandatory components from the model and option classes are also included directly on the single level bill If you do not forecast or master schedule options and option classes they perform no function on configuration bills but they are still i
114. 44 Bill Component Validation Rules page 2 46 Consolidated Bill of Material Report page 8 12 Access Control by Item Type See Also Control access to bills of material by item type using the following profile options e BOM Standard Item Access e BOM Planning Item Access e BOM Model Item Access also controls access to option class items Each profile option can have either a Yes or No value A Yes value indicates that you can create and update bills for the associated item type For example you might specify No at the site level for BOM Standard Item Access profile to restrict access for creating standard bills But you might specify Yes for BOM Planning Item Access profile option at the user level for specific engineers so they can update engineering bills of material for planning items Note Profiles are ignored in query mode A user with no access to any type of item can query all types of bills Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Bills of Material 2 9 Creating a Bill of Material 2 10 A bill of material contains information on the parent item components attachments and descriptive elements Each standard component on a bill can have multiple reference designators and substitute components You can create either an engineering or manufacturing bill copy an existing bill or reference a common bill When you create a bill it exists
115. 45 Importing Bills and Routings 1 45 Inactive status 1 12 Include on ship docs 2 42 Included in cost rollups 2 13 Increment revision 2 23 Indented Bills of Material Window Viewing an Indented Bill of Material 2 27 Index 4 Indented Bills of Material window Viewing an Indented Bill of Material 2 27 Integer Requirements 2 13 2 38 Inverse rate or amount See Usage rate or amount Item based resources 3 6 creating a bill 2 11 for routings 3 11 preconfiguring 5 36 scheduling 3 7 to delete 4 4 usage 2 32 Item revisions 2 5 defining 2 14 2 20 Item Revisions window Defining Item Revisions 2 20 Item selection to calculate lead times 7 18 Item sequence on bills of material 2 34 Item WhereUsed window Viewing Item Usage 2 32 L Lead time 2 28 computing manufacturing 3 14 7 2 7 3 computing operation percents 7 12 configuration item 5 26 discrete manufacturing 5 26 flow manufacturing 5 27 cumulative manufacturing 7 14 cumulative total 7 15 dynamic offsetting 6 5 6 7 fixed 7 7 7 11 7 12 processing 7 3 rollup 3 14 variable 7 7 7 11 7 12 Lead time percent 3 13 Location department 1 10 1 19 Locator See Completion locator Supply locator Loops in bills of material See Checking for Bill Loops Lot Based Routing See Routing Lot Based Lot based resou
116. A method of classifying items in decreasing order of importance such as annual dollar volume or your company s transaction history absorption account The offset or contra account for any cost charged to your inventory or work in process value For example when you perform a purchase order receipt and the item has a material overhead rate you debit your inventory valuation account and credit your material overhead absorption account for the material overhead cost You have absorbed expenses from your general ledger accounts into your inventory At the month end you compare your absorption accounts against expenses incurred in your general ledger and write the difference off to your income statements accept An action to indicate that you accept the previous approver s authorization Acceptable Early Days An item attribute the planning process uses to decide when to suggest rescheduling orders for the item to an earlier date The planning process only suggests rescheduling orders for the item if the order is due to be received into inventory before the acceptable early date This attribute is used when it is more economical to build and carry excess inventory for a short time than it is to reschedule the order This attribute applies to discretely planned items only The attribute for repetitively planned items is Overrun Percentage Acceptable Rate Decrease An item attribute the planning process uses to decide how much to dec
117. Amount in either the Usage or Inverse fields That is enter the resource consumed at the operation per item or per lot or it s inverse Entering a value for either field updates the other field Resources with time based unit of measures must have usage rates greater than zero Enter an inverse when you know the number of units a resource can process rather than the duration an assembly unit consumes the resource For example if you know a resource can process 10 units per hour enter 10 for the inverse Usage or Inverse can be negative only for resources that cannot be scheduled and where the charge type is neither PO move nor PO receipt Open the Scheduling tabbed region and enter the Schedule Sequence Number Two or more resources can be scheduled to be working concurrently within the same job operation Simultaneity is implemented by having more than one resource with the same Schedule Sequence Number Note The Schedule Sequence Number field is independent of the resource sequence which is used only as part of the primary key to list the resources The Schedule Sequence Number will show the actual sequence of each resource used in the operation and will group the resources together for alternate resourcing Enter the number of assigned units to the resource See Resource Usage page 3 6 If the unit of measure of the resource is time based select a schedule value See Schedule page 3 30 and Defining a Resource p
118. E 01 JAN 2005 fl Show March Show 201 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thr Fri Sat 26 27 x 5 6 EE E a Exception On 1 42 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 2 Select individual days of the month to toggle them on or off Days you change become either workday or shift exceptions depending on how you entered the window 3 Save your work gt To load existing workday or shift exceptions 1 Navigate to the Exceptions window Do this by choosing the Exception List button from the Calendar Dates window 2 Chooses the Load button and select whether existing exceptions should be applied from a template a calendar or a shift If you select Template enter a template name If you select Calendar enter a calendar name If you select Shift enter the calendar name that the shift belongs to and the shift number 3 When finished choose OK to save your work See Also Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Creating a Workday Exception Template page 1 34 Reviewing the Workday Calendar P To review the calendar m Navigate to the Calendar Dates window or Shift Calendar Dates window Do this by choosing the Dates button from either the Workday Calendar or Shifts windows See Also Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Setting Up 1 43 Building the Workday Calendar Caution Rebuilding an existing workday calendar affects all organizations that reference
119. For example when you order a computer the monitor is an option class and the specific type of monitor you order is an option within that option class An option class bill can be either assemble to order or pick to order Planning Bill of Material A planning bill of material is a bill of material structure that includes a percentage distribution for its components The percentages associated with the components on a planning bill of material do not need to add to 100 You can define alternate and common planning bills where the bill you reference as a common must be another planning bill Planning items can be nested within one another any number of times When you nest planning items Oracle Master Scheduling explodes forecasts level by level and applies planning percentages at each level Engineering Bills of Material You can define an engineering bill of material as an alternate for a manufacturing bill The typical use for an alternate engineering bill is to prototype variations from the primary bill that produce the same assembly You can specify a list of item catalog descriptive elements for model and option class engineering bills After you release the engineering bill to manufacturing and take customer orders for specific configurations Bills of Material creates the new configuration item and automatically assigns values to each catalog descriptive element Oracle Engineering users are allowed to assign manufacturing and e
120. House ACH A nationwide network operated by the Federal Reserve used to connect banks together for the electronic transfer of funds automatic note A standard note to which you assign addition rules so it can be applied automatically to orders returns order lines and return lines See also one time note standard note automatic numbering A numbering option Purchasing uses to assign numbers to your documents employees or suppliers automatically automatic rescheduling Rescheduling done by the planning process to automatically change due dates on scheduled receipts when it detects that due dates and need dates are inconsistent automatic sourcing A Purchasing feature which allows you to specify for predefined items a list of approved suppliers and to associate source documents for these suppliers When you create a requisition or purchase order line for the item Purchasing automatically provides appropriate pricing for the specified quantity based on the top ranked open source document for the supplier with the highest percentage allocation autonumber A function to automatically default engineering change order ECO numbers when you create a new ECO You can define an autonumber prefix and sequence for all users across all organizations all users in one organization Glossary 7 one user across all organizations and one user in one organization autorelease To automatically release the next available repetitive
121. Length class You define your base unit of measure when you create your unit class batch sources A source you define in Oracle Receivables to identify where your invoicing activity originates The batch source also controls invoice defaults and invoice numbering Also known as invoice batch sources best discount The most advantageous discount for the customer For example suppose you have a customer discount of 15 and a item discount of 25 for Product B If you enter an order line for the customer for Product A the line is discounted 15 If you enter an order line for the customer for product B the line is discounted 25 bill of distribution Specifies a multilevel replenishment network of warehouses distribution centers and manufacturing centers plants bill of lading A carrier s contract and receipt of goods transported from one location to another bill of material A list of component items associated with a parent item and information about how each item relates to the parent item Oracle Manufacturing supports standard model option class and planning bills The item information on a bill depends on the item type and bill type The most common type of bill is a standard bill of material A standard bill of material lists the components associated with a product or subassembly It specifies the required quantity for each component plus other information to control work in process material planning and other O
122. MRP divides the suggested aggregate schedule for a specific line and item based on the production line attributes priority minimum and maximum rates supply chain planning The development and maintenance of multi organizational distribution and manufacturing plans across a global supply chain summary message action A message representing one or more exceptions The message may include introductory and closing paragraphs separated by the exceptions listed in a columnar report format supplier Provider of goods or services supplier product number The number your supplier assigns to an item You and your supplier can have different item naming conventions You can identify the item with one number Item while your supplier identifies this item using another number Supplier Product Number Using and referencing supplier product numbers helps Glossary 77 you speed up your purchasing cycle By referencing a number your supplier knows you can help your suppliers understand your purchase orders and RFQs better supplier purchasing hold A hold condition you place on a supplier to prevent new purchasing activity on the supplier You cannot approve purchase orders for suppliers you placed on hold supplier quotation list A list of suppliers who can provide goods or services you need You often define a supplier quotation list for an item or class of items You can use a supplier quotation list to generate multiple copies of a
123. Material A standard bill of material is the most common type of bill and lists the mandatory components the required quantity of each component and information to control work in process material planning and other Oracle Manufacturing functions Examples include bills for manufacturing assemblies pick to order bills kit bills and phantoms A configuration bill a type of standard bill is a set of option choices made from a model bill that comprise a buildable sellable product Configuration items and bills are automatically created from model bills after a customer chooses options on a sales order Or you can manually create configuration bills by choosing options directly from a model bill Model Bill of Material A model bill of material defines the list of options and option classes you can choose in Oracle Order Management to order a configuration A model bill also specifies mandatory components or included items that are required for each configuration of that model You do not order or build the model itself you order and build configurations of the model A model bill can be either assemble to order or pick to order 2 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Option Class Bill of Material An option class is an item that groups optional components on a bill An option class is an item that becomes a level in your model bill of material Option classes can also have mandatory components that apply for all of its options
124. Minneapolis Merrill Aviation s Hub context sensitive segment A descriptive flexfield segment that appears in a second pop up window when you enter a response to your context field prompt For each context response you can define multiple context segments and you control the sequence of the context segments in the second pop up window Each context sensitive segment typically prompts you for one item of information related to your context response contract An agreement between you and a supplier for unspecified goods or services This agreement may include terms and conditions committed amount and an effective and expiration date You reference contract purchase agreements directly on standard purchase order lines Purchasing monitors the amount you have spent against contract purchase agreements conversion Converts foreign currency transactions to your functional currency See also foreign currency conversion conversion formula The number that when multiplied by the quantity of one unit of the source base unit gives you the quantity of one unit of the destination base units in the interclass conversion The number is also the conversion between units for standard unit conversion or item specific conversion copy An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer designate a specific requisition line as the source of information that Purchasing copies to the purchase order or RFQ line corporate exchange rate An exchange rate you
125. Number generated by the Demand Processor to guarantee a unique production sequence code for departure planning The customer production sequence number may be insufficient because it is not necessarily unique planned purchase order A type of purchase order you issue before you order actual delivery of goods and services for specific dates and locations You normally enter a planned purchase order to specify items you want to order and when you want delivery of the items You later enter a shipment release against the planned purchase order when you actually want to order the items planner One of the processes that comprise the planning process performed by the memory based planner The planner uses the low level codes calculated by the exploder together with the supply and demand information gathered by the snapshot and calculates net material requirements for every planned item associated with the master schedule used to drive the planning process planner delete worker An independent concurrent process launched by the memory based planner that removes previous plan output from the tables It runs only when the memory based planner runs without the snapshot Planner Workbench You can use the Planner Workbench to act on recommendations generated by the planning process for a plan You can implement planned orders as discrete jobs or purchase requisitions maintain planned orders reschedule scheduled receipts and implement
126. O model See assemble to order model ATP See available to promise ATT See available to transact ATR See available to reserve attribute See activity attribute item type attribute attribute collection element A collection element that represents the outcome of a process See collection element types authorization check A set of tests on a purchasing document to determine if the document approver has sufficient authority to perform the approval action AutoAccounting A feature used by Oracle Projects to automatically determine the account coding for an accounting transaction based on the project task employee and expenditure information A feature that lets you determine how the Accounting Flexfields for your revenue receivable freight tax unbilled receivable and unearned revenue account types are created autocharge A method of charging a discrete job or repetitive schedule for the resources consumed at an operation autoimplement To implement an ECO s revised item automatically on its effective date by setting the revised item status to Scheduled and running the autoimplement manager autoimplement manager An Engineering program that automatically implements all ECO revised items with a status of Scheduled and whose effective date is less than or equal to the current date AutoInvoice A program that imports invoices credit memos and on account credits from other systems to Receivables Automated Clearing
127. Optional Fields 2 42 Check ATP Available To Promise Field 2 43 Minimum and Maximum Quantity Fields 2 43 Basis Field eere xtd ee ecantcer Feste enceinte std 2 43 Shipping Details Fields ccc eee nn 2 44 Bill Component Validation Rules 000 2 46 Creating a Product Family 0 c cece e ene eee 2 49 Assigning Product Family Members 2 50 Setting Planning Percentages for Product Family Members 2 51 Rou tings ce era e eI RP ERO AE RR RES SEES S RR EE 3 1 Overview of Routings 2s5ci ee kebensek agao ACER eR se 3 2 Primary and Alternate Routings 005 3 2 Dynamic Routings esien ccc eee eee 3 4 Operations srr serro aE boa spe ree dea 3 5 Resource Usage xssessxsxs o pheR ER Pee Ce ee ga 3 6 Creating a RoUtlng xc dees arte aac OSEE I ORE eR ERR CER 3 10 Switching Between Primary and Alternate Routings 3 14 Assigning a Completion Subinventory and Locator 3 16 Creating a Routing Revision 00 0 e ee aeee 3 16 Assigning Operation Resources 0000 e eee eee 3 18 Rolling Up Costs cerne dent Geant 3 21 Creating a Standard Operation E eee 3 22 Viewing Resource Usage 0 6 cece cece cece 3 25 Routings Field Reference 2 00 66 66 cece cee cee eee 3 27 Completion Subinventory and Locator Fields 3 27 Count Point and Autocharge Fields
128. Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide RELEASE 11 June 2002 Part No A75087 04 ORACLE Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Release 11i The part number for this book is A75087 04 Copyright 1996 2002 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Primary Authors Tyra Crockett Major Contributors Kurt Thompson Tony Gaughan Amy Sonczalla Contributors Sachin Patel Girish Divate Rahul Chitko Vikram Basappa Julie Maeyama Mani Govindaraju Bastin Gerald Valerie Dubois Usha Arora The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs except to the extent required to obtain interoperability with other independently created software or as specified by law is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the documentation please report them to us in writing Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose wit
129. P 2 24 Index 8 Usage rate or amount 3 19 3 20 Use up 2 25 Use up item 2 25 V Validation rules bill and component 2 43 Variable lead time calculation 7 8 7 10 Variable lead time rate calculation 7 9 Variance account for costed resources 1 27 Viewing Item Usage 2 32 Viewing Resource Usage 3 25 W Weight and Volume 5 30 Workday calendar assigning to organization 1 9 building 1 8 1 44 Workday Calendars window Creating a Workday Calendar 1 37 Workday Patterns window Creating a Workday Pattern 1 40 Y Yield 2 13 2 37 3 13 3 23 calculation 2 37 Reader s Comment Form Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Release 11 A75087 04 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this publication Your input is an important part of the information we use for revision e Did you find any errors e ls the information clearly presented e Do you need more information If so where e Are the examples correct Do you need more examples e What features did you like most about this manual What did you like least about it If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the topic chapter and page number below Please send your comments to Oracle Manufacturing Applications Documentation Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Park
130. Purchase price variance account 1 27 Q Quantity for bill components 2 12 minimum and maximum 2 41 of substitute item 2 19 Quantity related 2 18 Quarterly types of workday calendar 1 37 R Rate or amount See Usage rate or amount Receiving valuation account 1 27 Reference designator 2 14 2 19 Reference designators creating 2 18 Index 6 Reference Designators window Creating Reference Designators 2 18 Referencing Common Bills and Routings 2 14 2 16 Release offset days 5 24 Repetitive assembly scheduling 6 4 Reports Bill of Material Loop 8 5 Delete Items 8 15 Required for revenue 2 42 Required to ship 2 42 Reservations hard 33 Reserve for Encumbrance account See Glossary Resource amount 3 8 assigning to a department 1 21 batching 1 23 1 27 capacity modifications 3 8 charging method 3 8 Defining a Resource 1 23 scheduling 3 7 Simultaneous 3 7 standard costs 3 9 substitute 3 7 usage rate 3 8 Resource name 1 25 Resource type 1 25 Resource Costs window Defining a Resource 1 28 Resource group 1 22 Resource group 1 9 Resource load for planned orders 6 6 Resource name 3 18 Resource Overhead Associations window Defining a Resource 1 28 Resource unit cost 1 28 Resource usage 3 6 Resources collecting and assigning costs to 1 26 Viewing Resource Usage 3 25 Resources
131. Report Parameters See Also Use the Resource Where Used Report to report the manufacturing routings that use the resources you specify In the Submit Requests window select Resource Where Used Report in the Name field Resource From To To restrict the report to a range of resources select the beginning and ending resources Effective Date Enter an effective date Bills of Material uses the routing information associated with this date when determining resource usage Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Reports 8 23 Routing Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Routing Report for manufacturing routing information A routing defines the steps for manufacturing an item For each routing you define operations the sequence in which to perform them and the resources required at each operation In the Submit Requests window select Routing Report in the Name field Item Selection Choose one of the following options Range Report routings for the range of items you specify Specific Report routings for the specific item you specify Oracle Bills of Material displays this option as the default Item Enter a specific item to report routing information Alternate Selection Choose one of the following options All Report routing information for the primary and alternate routings Oracle Bills of Material displays this option as the default Primary R
132. You should maintain a routing for the top level model but may not need to maintain a routing for any option class or model where all items below it have an operation sequence of 1 In the example below the profile option is set to yes and the CPU and Monitor option class items have operation sequence numbers for the Laptop Computer routing The processor options are defaulted to an operation sequence of 1 and inherit operation sequence 30 from the Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide CPU option class item The VGA Option class options and included item are defaulted to an operation sequence of 1 and inherit operation sequence 40 from the manual option class item Routings are not required for the CPU Monitor and VGA option classes The following table presents an example operation sequence inheritance Operation Sequence Inheritance Operation Sequence Level Item Item Type Op Seq Inherited Cataloging Configurations Oracle Manufacturing provides features that help you catalog your assemble to order configurations so you can easily find on hand configurations that meet customer requirements or find configuration item numbers that were used to fulfill previous orders for the same configuration Oracle Manufacturing lets you set up rules to automatically assign Item Catalog descriptive element values to assemble to order configurations based on the options selected For example you might want to catalog computer co
133. a date on which this template becomes inactive 4 Enter all exception dates and indicate whether each is an on or off workday See Also Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Creating a Workday Calendar page 1 36 Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions page 1 42 Setting Up 1 35 Workday Exception Sets Report page 8 28 Creating a Workday Calendar A workday calendar consists of a start date and end date and on and off days that follow one or more defined workday patterns A workday calendar can also include shift information and exception dates such as holidays or scheduled down time Use a workday calendar for forecasting and planning material requirements use shift information for job scheduling and capacity analysis Workday exceptions identify deviations to the workday calendar Shift exceptions identify deviations for a shift De Attention Shift exceptions take precedence over workday exceptions This is only relevant if a workday exception and a shift exception overlap To assign workday exceptions to a workday calendar or calendar shift either select them intuitively from the Calendar Dates or Shift Calendar Dates window or apply them from an existing template calendar or shift 1 36 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P Tocreate a workday calendar 1 Navigate to the Workday Calendar window EE Workday Calendar RET L IP ITT RCHEBETT SM 4 4 5 Week Pattern Y
134. ables building configured items having other configured items as sub assemblies Planning support for complex configurations where lower level configurations are sourced across the supply chain Mandatory and mutually exclusive option selection rules Option dependent routings Define sourcing rule for models and options at any level in the BOM 5 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Overview of Model and Option Class Bills of Material Oracle Manufacturing enables you to define integrated multilevel bills that contain planning bills model and option class bills as well as standard product and subassembly bills The following table is an example of an indented planning bill of material Indented Planning Bill of Material Level Item Training Computer Laptop Computer Carrying Case Item Type Optional Planning Qty Planning ATO Model Product Keyboard Product No 100 ATO Option Class 100 386 Processor Purchased Item 486 Processor Purchased Item Monitor Br pr VGA VGA Manual ATO Option Class ATO Option Class No Yes Purchased Item VGA1 Purchased Item VGA2 Purchased Item EGA ATO Option Class EGA1 Product EGA2 Product Monitor Manual Purchased Item Operating System DOS DOS Manual DOS Diskettes UNIX ATO Option Class Phantom Subassembly Phantom Con
135. ach component item to change indicate the action to perform You can add or delete components to or from a parent item Or you can update existing information about the component on the parent item With this option a new row is created that you enter new information into Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide In the Main tabbed region enter the item sequence operation sequence the quantity and the inactive date for each component See Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 Open the Component Detail tabbed region and enter the planning percent See Planning Percent page 2 40 Enter the yield and indicate whether the component should be quantity related and included in cost rollups See Yield page 2 39 Open the Material Control tabbed region and enter the supply type See Supply Types Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Enter the supply subinventory and locator identifiers See Supply Subinventory and Locator page 2 42 For model option class and kit bills open the Order Entry tabbed region and enter the minimum and maximum sales order quantities See Minimum and Maximum Quantity page 2 43 Indicate whether to check ATP See Check ATP page 2 43 Indicate whether the component is optional and mutually exclusive See Mutually Exclusive and Optional page 2 42 Open the Shipping tabbed region and choose whether the component should be listed on shipping documents required to ship or re
136. ach of the following item attributes for inactive configuration items BOM allowed Build in WIP Transactable Stockable When defining bills of material parameters specify the item status to use for completed configuration items See Defining Bills of Material Parameters page 1 13 You can run the Deactivate Configuration Items concurrent program to automatically deactivate all configuration items that have the following conditions in the organization you run the deactivate program No open demand sales orders e No future demand demand in interface tables e No open supply discrete jobs flow schedules purchase requisition or purchase orders No material transactions for the number of days ago you specify Does not exist in a child organization Does not have a common bill and routing Each deactivated configuration item has its status updated BOM components and routing operations are deactivated as well Configure to Order 5 41 gt To deactivate configuration items 1 See Also 5 42 Navigate to the Submit Requests window See Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Select Report and select Deactivate Configuration Items Enter the organization for which you want to deactivate configuration items that were completed Enter the shipped number of days ago Configuration items with material transaction within the time frame are evaluated for deactivation Material transactions
137. acity 5 Enter an effective date and time from which the capacity change starts If you are adding or reducing capacity you must also enter a date and time on which the change is no longer in effect If you are adding a shift s workday this is the date of the new workday If you are deleting a shift s workday this is the date of the deleted workday If you are changing capacity this is the first day the resource shift s capacity changes Cost Management Profile Options and Security Functions Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Overview of Capacity Planning Oracle Capacity User s Guide Use resources to define the time an assembly spends at an operation and the cost you incur at the operation A resource is anything you require to perform schedule or cost including but not limited to employees machines outside processing services and physical space A resource and usage rate for all scheduled activities is required in a routing Scheduled resources can include queue setup run and move time When you define your departments you assign the resources available in each department and the shifts that each resource is available For each operation you define you specify a department and list of resources and usages An operation can use any resource that is available in the department but you do not need to use all resources assigned to the department If you have Oracle Manufacturing installed you can use Resource batching
138. acle Master Scheduling MRP Oracle Master Scheduling MRP Oracle Capacity Oracle Inventory Scheduling Function Schedule Discrete Jobs Schedule Repetitive Schedules Compute Manufacturing Lead Times Compute Planned Order Start Date Compute Planned Order Component Requirement Dates Load Planned Order Resource Requirements Compute Requirement Dates for Assemble to Order Item Components for ATP Checks Scheduling Method Detailed Scheduling Repetitive Line Scheduling Detailed Scheduling Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Detailed Scheduling See Also Detailed scheduling is based on detailed resource availability and usages and is the most precise scheduling method in Oracle Manufacturing It takes into account minute to minute resource availability information as well as exact resource requirements from routings to schedule precise start and end dates and times for jobs and operations Detailed scheduling is an infinite scheduling algorithm so it does not take into account load from other discrete jobs However you can simulate the scheduling impact of the load by adding queue move and wait resources Job and Operation Scheduling Oracle Work in Process schedules discrete jobs using detailed scheduling Each resource required on a job is sche
139. ad time calculations when you autocreate configuration items BOM Planning Item Access Indicates whether a holder of this responsibility can define and update bills of material for planning items BOM Standard Item Access Indicates whether a holder of this responsibility can define and update bills of material for standard items Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also BOM Update Resource UOM Indicates whether you can update the resource unit of measure BOM Week or Period Start Day Indicates whether the workday calendar starts on a weekly or period basis This profile option works in conjunction with the Workday Calendar See Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 For example the BOM Week or Period Start Day profile is set to Monday Your Workday Calendar is set to start on January 1 which is a Friday with a five days on two days off work day pattern After building the calendar the system creates a start day of the following Monday January 4 Setting Your Personal User Profile Oracle Applications User s Guide Common User Profile Options Oracle Applications User s Guide Profile Options in Oracle Application Object Library Oracle Appliactions System Administrator s Guide Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Overview of Function Security Oracle Appliactions System Administrator s Guide Implementing Function Security Oracle Appliactions System Administrator s Guide Setting Up 1 49
140. age 1 24 Enter the resource offset percent within this routing For example a value of 50 means that you utilize the resource when the routing is half completed This value is automatically calculated when you compute the lead time for the assembly Indicate which resource is the principle resource within a group of simultaneous resources Open the Costing tabbed region and enter an activity to perform when you use the resource Use activities to group resource charges for cost reporting The default is the activity associated Routings 3 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 See Also with the resource See Defining Activities and Activity Costs Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Indicate whether to charge jobs or schedules based on the standard rate defined for the resource default Off Use this option if you import charges from an outside labor system and want to record actual costs or to record the labor rate of an employee On For outside processing resources if you charge a job and repetitive schedule at the standard rate Oracle Purchasing computes any purchase price variance and posts it to the rate variance account Select a charge type The default is the charge type specified for the resource See Charge Type page 3 30 Select the Alternates button Optionally you can define substitute resources for each primary resource group defined This enables you to specify resource sequence
141. ailable to Promise before scheduling a ship date for a configuration Oracle Manufacturing lets you specify for each item in the item master whether you must check ATP for that item itself and whether the item has bill of material components that require an ATP check For example you might need to check ATP for the keyboard and CPU each time you order a Laptop Computer configuration but the supply of all other components is not constrained In that case you would set the ATP Components Item Master field to Yes for the Laptop Computer and the CPU option class and you would set the Check ATP Item Master field to Yes for the Keyboard and CPUs That way when you order a Laptop Computer and choose a 486 Processor Oracle Order Management performs an ATP check for each component in the Laptop Computer bill where Check Component ATP is set to Yes Keyboard only and it would check ATP for the 486 Processor since that option was selected Note If the Check ATP item master field is set to Yes you can change this value when you create a bill of material If the Check ATP is set to No it cannot be updated when you create the bill Configure to Order 5 15 5 16 Note ATP Check is based on the results of your planning input See Planning Process Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning User s Guide The following table presents an example of ATP check control ATP Checks for Laptop Computer Level Item Battery Pack Recharger Pu
142. aintenance or repair to a serviceable item or product specification Describes the requirements of a product in Oracle Quality You can define specifications for the key characteristics of the products you produce specification element A collection element copied or assigned to a specification specification limits Numeric values used to specify an acceptable range of values for a quality element Consists of a target value and upper and lower control limit and an upper and lower reasonableness limit specification subtype A user defined subclassifcation of the standard specification types customer vendor or an item item category For example a customer specification can be assigned a specification subtype that indicates the customer s plant location specification type A classification for specifications Specifications can be specific to a customer vendor or an item item category split amount A dollar amount that determines the number of invoices over and under this amount as well as the total amounts remaining For example your company generates invoices that are either 300 or 500 You choose 400 as your split amount so that you can review how much of your open receivables are comprised of your 300 business and how much corresponds to your 500 business The split amount appears in the Collection Effectiveness Indicators Report spot exchange rate A daily exchange rate you use to perform foreign currency con
143. al line fixed lead time line fixed lead time production in terval Assembly with routing E fixed lead time production interval 1 No routing routing No routing routing No routing fixed No routing fixed item based resources only routing fixed lead time production inter val production interval line fixed lead time line fixed lead time production in terval fixed fixed Assembly with routing fixed lead time production interval item and lot based resources routing fixed lead time production inter val production interval fixed line fixed lead time fixed line fixed lead time production in terval For fixed lead time lines the fixed and variable lead times are not based on whether a routing exists The fixed lead time is always the line fixed lead time the amount of time for one assembly to travel down a production line The variable lead time is always the production interval variable lead time repetitive schedule 1 production rate day For a routing based line the fixed lead time is the time required to build one assembly the fixed lead time includes the time for both item and lot based resources 7 10 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Time Required Workdays ASSY 1 Fixed Lead Time Processing Lead Time The following diagram illustrates repetitive lead times calculation as described in the text above Repetitive Lead
144. al page 2 5 Define Standard Bill of Material Comments Optional You can define any number of standard bill of material comments that you can assign to your bills of material Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 Define Standard Instructions Optional You can define any number of operation instructions that you can assign to a routing operation or standard operation Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 Define Change Order Types Optional You can define mass change order types using your own terminology to describe mass changes to your manufacturing bills of material Default If you skip this step Oracle shipped change order types will be used as the default value Context Perform this step once per installation See Also Mass Changing Bills of Material page 2 24 Setting Up 1 11 1 12 Step 19 Define Delete Constraints Optional Oracle Bills of Material provides a list of rules to determine if an item bill of material or routing can be deleted Each rule insures data integrity across all Oracle Manufacturing applications You can add to this list with your own business rules to further restrict the entities that can be deleted You write each of your delete constraints as a SQL select statement that either prevents or lets a user delete an item bill or routing Def
145. ales credit you assign to your salespeople not associated to your invoice lines This is sales credit given in excess of your revenue sales credit See also revenue sales credit non standard asset job A type of non standard job carried as an asset during the life of the job non standard discrete job A type of discrete job that controls material and resources and collects costs for a wide variety of Glossary 46 miscellaneous manufacturing activities These activities can include rework field service repair upgrade disassembly maintenance engineering prototypes and other projects Non standard jobs do not earn material overhead upon assembly completion non standard expense job A type of non standard job expensed at the close of each accounting period Typical expense jobs include maintenance and repair note name A name that uniquely identifies a standard or one time note You use note names to locate a note you want to use or copy on a document numeric number type An option for numbering documents employees and suppliers where assigned numbers contain only numbers O object A region in Order Entry such as order line shipment schedule and so on You can provide Security Rules for objects See also attribute default value security rules standard value rule set occurrence An individual quality result For example a measurement that falls in or out of a specified tolerance Occurrences can be charted u
146. ally a flow routing consists of a series of nodes and paths which make up the entire routing network A WIP lot will begin with any one of the possible routes that a job can potentially take which consists of a route having only the beginning and ending tasks As the job progresses through the production cycle you can populate the Build Class route with the operations that the WIP lot actually goes through selectable from the Flow Route Within each sector the operations that a WIP lot can progress to will be mapped out in the lot based type routing All operations that the WIP lot can potentially progress to are listed as operations for the lot based routing Lot based routings are extensions of standard routings and have network entities defined for their operations Creating a Routing page 3 10 Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 Creating a Network Routing Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide Defining Parameters Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide 3 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Operations To define a routing operation you first specify an operation sequence number to indicate the order to perform operations Components in your bill of material can reference an operation sequence Next you can choose either a standard operation or you can enter a new operation Sequence of Operations Routings define the step by step descriptions or operations for manufacturing an assembly Each oper
147. ally close the purchase order early if you do not expect further activity Adding lines to it or receiving against it reopens the purchase order Purchasing does not consider closed purchase orders for accruals close for invoicing A purchase order control that you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign automatically when the amount invoiced reaches a defined percentage of the order quantity close for receiving A purchase order control you can assign manually or that Purchasing can assign automatically when the amount received reaches a defined percentage of the order quantity closed job A discrete job that is unavailable for charges or any type of transaction Closing a job calculates final costs and variances and creates history for the job closed order An order and its order lines that have completed all actions of the order cycle and on which the Close Orders program has been run COGS Account See Cost of Goods Sold Account collection element Represents a quality results value An unlimited number of collection elements can be defined Collection elements are used to create collection plan elements and specification elements collection element type Can be used to sort and group information There are three standard types reference information attribute and variable collection number An identifier for a group of quality results collection plan A collection plan determines what data to coll
148. also assign the business purpose Bill To Bill To and Ship To are the only business purposes recognized in Oracle Order Entry Each customer location must serve at least one function buyer Person responsible for placing item resupply orders with suppliers and negotiating supplier contracts by product Material produced as a residual of a production process Represented by negative usage in the bill of material for an assembly C Calculate ATP An item attribute the planning process uses to decide when to calculate and print available to promise ATP for the item on the Planning Detail Report The planning process calculates ATP using the following formula ATP Planned production committed demand calendar type The period pattern used to define a manufacturing calendar cancel You can cancel a purchase order after approving it When you cancel a purchase order you prevent anyone from adding new lines to the purchase order or receiving additional goods Purchasing still allows billing for goods you received before cancelling the purchase order Purchasing releases any unfilled requisition lines for reassignment to another purchase order cancellation code A reason that justifies the cancellation of an order or order line To cancel an order you must enter a cancellation code to record why the customer wants to nullify the order or order line cancelled job A discrete job you no longer want to work on You cannot make
149. ance A limit you define for the difference between the on hand quantity and the actual cycle count quantity You express positive and negative quantity variance tolerances as percentages of the on hand quantity queue An intraoperation step in an operation where assemblies are waiting to be worked on The default intraoperation step for every operation in a routing QuickCodes Codes that you define for the activities and terminology you use in your business For example you can define QuickCodes for personal titles for example Sales Manager so you can refer to people using these titles For example you can define QuickCodes for sales channels so that you can specify the various sales channels used for different kinds of orders An Oracle Assets feature that allows you to enter standard descriptions for your business You can enter QuickCode values for your Property Types Retirement Types Asset Descriptions Journal Entries and Mass Additions Queue Names A feature you use to create reference information you use in your business This reference information appears in QuickPick lists for many of the fields in Payables forms There are three basic kinds of QuickCodes supplier payables and employee With QuickCodes you can create Pay Groups supplier types and other references used in Payables quota sales credits See revenue sales credit non revenue sales credit quotation A statement of the price terms and conditi
150. and update the following operation lead time percentages as shown in the table below Operation Lead Time Percent Op Start Date End Date Time Previous Op Lead Time Percent 0 10 0 Seq and Time and Time Required Time Required 2 10 20 4 10 40 8 10 80 Bills of Material also computes for each operation resource in an item s primary routing the percent of total lead time required for previous resource operations in that routing For example if your resource start and end times were as follows Bills of Material would compute these resource offset percents as shown in the table below Resource Offset Percent Op Res StartDate End Date Time Previous Offset Percent Seq Seq and Time and Time Required Res Time Required 0 10 0 1 10 10 03 JAN 04 JAN 2 10 20 00 00 24 00 Manufacturing Lead Times 7 13 See Also Start Date End Date Time Previous Offset Percent and Time and Time Required Res Time Required 4 10 40 6 10 60 8 10 80 Creating a Routing page 3 10 Calculating Manufacturing Lead Times page 7 17 Overview of Work in Process Scheduling Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Cumulative Lead Time Computations Bills of Material computes cumulative manufacturing lead time and cumulative lead time by stepping through indented bill structures Item information is updated as part of the both cumulative calculations
151. are affected Prerequisites L You must create at least one bill of material See Creating Bills of Material page 2 10 Q You must create at least one change order type See Defining ECO Types Oracle Engineering User s Guide Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide gt To mass change bills of material 1 Navigate to the Mass Change Bills window ange Bills M1 ne Number CEO gia Prod Chg Product Change Description Mass Change Details Bilncrement Revision Unit Number FR Update Jobs Schedules Parent Items Category Set Categories jee SB10450 SB10460 Alternate Selection Base Model Actions Report Iilmplement Sumi O Changes 2 Entera mass change order number and a change order type If you have Engineering installed and have set up ECO Autonumbering a default value will appear See Defining ECO Autonumbering Oracle Engineering User s Guide The change order type describes your changes and determines the type of bills to modify Enter the effective date for the change for engineering bills only 4 Selecta single item unit number 5 Indicate whether to increment the parent item s revision by 1 numeric based revisions only Bills of Material 2 25 2 26 10 11 Indicate whether to update Work in Process material requirements of any unreleased discrete job or any release or unreleased repetitive schedule associated with the parent items
152. ary account An account segment value such as 6110 that is assigned one of the two budgetary account types You use budgetary accounts to record the movement of funds through the budget process from appropriation to expended appropriation build sequence The sequence of jobs within a schedule group For example you can use sequences to prioritize all jobs on a specific production line by customer Similarly you can use sequences to insure that jobs are built in reverse departure order thus facilitating truck loading See also schedule group bulk items Component items on a bill of material not usually transacted directly to the job or repetitive schedule Bulk items are usually charged to the work in process department where the item is consumed bulk requirement See bulk items business application Software that performs a particular business function or group of functions accounts payable for example business document A document used for conducting business between two trading partners a purchase order or invoice for example business group An organization which represents the consolidated enterprise a major division or an operation company This entity partitions Human Resources information business purpose The function a particular customer location serves For example you would assign the business purpose of Ship To an address if you ship to that address If you also send invoices to that address you could
153. ase item cost to your customers You define the item list price on a price list and Oracle Order Entry applies all price adjustments against the item list price load definition You can record actual sequenced delivery for a departure at Ship Confirm after Pick Release for unplanned picking line details load factor The maximum hour rate divided by the production rate for a given repetitive assembly and production line load rate The required rate multiplied by the load factor for a given production line load ratio Required capacity divided by available capacity loader worker An independent concurrent process in planning engine launched by the snapshot monitor that loads data from operating system files into tables loading order Determines the order in which items are loaded on a truck for delivery in the requested production sequence The loading order can be forward reverse inverted or non inverted loading sequence number The number that results by manually selecting loading order at Departure Planning Workbench This will be stored in the delivery line location A shorthand name for an address Location appears in address lists of values to let you select the correct address based on an intuitive name For example you may want to give the location name of Receiving Dock to the Ship To business purpose of 100 Main Street locator Physical area within a subinventory where you store material such as a row
154. at the department uses up to the number of assigned units of the resource simultaneously up to the number that exist in the department If you specify that a resource is available 24 hours such as time in a drying area Work in Process schedules it around the clock regardless of shifts See Assigning Operation Resources page 3 18 Resource Charging Method You can associate multiple resources with an operation on a routing and for each resource you can determine how the resource is charged You can automatically charge resources in Work in Process based on move transactions and purchase order receipts for outside processing You can also manually charge resources See Overview of Resource Management Oracle Work in Process User s Guide You can collect and group resource charges by activity for cost reporting See Work in Process Standard Cost Transactions Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Resource Capacity Modifications For each resource on a shift you can override the number of resource units available such as number of machines and specify additions or reductions to the amount of time the resource is available on that shift These capacity modifications are assigned to simulation sets that you can use later when you generate a capacity plan or schedule discrete jobs or repetitive schedules to simulate capacity changes See Overview of Capacity Planning Oracle Capacity User s Guide Resource Usage Rate or Amount
155. ata added for each new release Oracle Applications Upgrade Preparation Manual This guide explains how to prepare your Oracle Applications products for an upgrade It also contains information on completing the upgrade procedure for each product Refer to this manual and the Oracle Applications Installation Manual when you plan to upgrade your products Preface xvii Oracle Applications System Administrator s Guide This manual provides planning and reference information for the Oracle Bills of Material System Administrator Other Implementation Documentation Training and Support Oracle Automotive Implementation Manual This manual describes the setup and implementation of the Oracle Applications used for the Oracle Automotive solution Oracle Manufacturing APIs and Open Interfaces Manual This manual contains up to date information about integrating with other Oracle Manufacturing applications and with your other systems This documentation includes API s and open interfaces found in Oracle Manufacturing Training We offer a complete set of formal training courses to help you and your staff master Oracle Bills of Material and reach full productivity quickly We organize these courses into functional learning paths so you take only those courses appropriate to your job or area of responsibility You have a choice of educational environments You can attend courses offered by Oracle Education Services at any
156. ate ATO Assign Descriptive Security Rules Navigate Setup Flexfields Descriptive Security Define Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Security Assign Assign Key Flexfield Security Rules Assign Security Rules Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Security Assign Bill of Material Comparison Report Navigate Report Bill Compare Bill of Material Loop Report Navigate Report Bill LoopCheck M Bi Navigate Report Bill Structure Il of Material Structure Report Bills of Material Setup Reports Navigate Report Setup Bills of Material Calculate Lead Times Navigate Leadtimes Run Assemble to Order Processes Navigator Routings gt ATO Assign Security Rules Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Descriptive gt Security gt Assign Assign Security Rules Navigator Setup gt Flexfields Assign Security Rules Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Security gt Assign Bill Components Comparison Navigator Bills gt Comparison Bill of Material Reports Navigator Reports gt Bills Bill of Material Reports Navigator Reports gt Bills BOM Setup Reports Navigator Reports gt Setup Calculate Lead Times Navigator Routings gt Lead Times Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu B 3 Character Mode Form and Menu Path GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path Change Organization Change Organization Navigate Other ChangeOrg Navigator Other gt Change Organization Define Alternate
157. aterial 0 0 0 0 innin eara 2 10 Copying Bill and Routing Information 2 14 Referencing Common Bills and Routings 2 17 Common Bills of Material 00 cece eee ee 2217 Common Routings ssssseesee esee 2 18 Assigning Descriptive Elements sssssue 2 19 Creating Reference Designators sulle 2 20 Assigning Substitute Components 0 0005 2 21 Defining Item Revisions serersrcni scesi tetki dreka tinni 2 21 Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents 2 22 Attaching Files sse erben ados E 2 22 Checking for Bill Loops encre ore Rer mem hen 2 23 Mass Changing Bills of Material 2004 2 24 Viewing an Indented Bill of Material 2 29 iv Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Chapter 3 Comparing Bills of Material 20 0c cee 2 32 Viewing Item Usage ucria seca eere Rr REPRE ER 2 34 Bills of Material Field Reference 0 6 000 ha neiise 2 36 Item and Operation Sequence Fields 2 36 Effective Date Fields esie sete ree 2 37 Meld Field aer oe Erbe aree eee Rie ees 2 39 Planning Percent Field 0 0 6 c cece eee eens 2 40 Enforce Integer Requirements 0 000 e cee ee 2 40 Extended Quantity Field sssrisercenfeeiinisie tis eee ee 2 41 Supply Subinventory and Locator Fields 2 42 Mutually Exclusive and
158. aterial The configuration bill of material is only created in the respective manufacturing organization Assuming the same options were selected as in the single level example See Indented Bill of Material for Promotional Laptop page 5 10 but the setup has changed for a multi level multi organization example the following tables present the configuration bills of material in the respective manufacturing organizations Notice that the Laptop configuration BOM has the monitor configuration as a sub assembly Organization M1 Level Item Item Type Optional Selected X Laptop Com ATO Item Configura No Yes puter tion 9 Laptop Com ATO Model n a n a puter Configure to Order 5 33 See Also Resulting Routings Optional Selected 486 Processor Processor Purchased re a Item Configura a tion Organization M2 Optional Selected Monitor 001 ATO Item Configura tion Monitor ATO Model VGA ATO Option Class VGA Manual Purchased Item VGA1 Purchased Item Monitor Purchased Item Manual Overview of Bills of Material page 2 2 In a discrete environment Bills of Material automatically assigns a routing to each configuration item by copying the model s primary routing and then dropping any option dependent routing steps for which no component exists that references that step Each routing step it includes has the Option Dependent operation
159. ation fixed lead time daily rate x processing lead time Offset the date by total lead time using the following equation start date requirement date total lead time is Attention Oracle Manufacturing offsets the requirement date by the total lead time using the workday calendar accounting for any non workdays Before subtracting total lead time Oracle Manufacturing determines the workday for the requirement date After offsetting by total lead time the calendar date is derived from the starting workday Example Master Scheduling MRP uses dynamic lead time offsetting to compute a planned order release date Master Scheduling MRP computes total lead time and then uses the workday calendar to calculate the planned order release date Suppose your MRP plan produced a requirement for 100 discretely manufactured assemblies on March 12 and the following information exists for that assembly e Requirement date 12 MAR e Fixed lead time 2 days e Variable lead time 05 days 1 day per 20 units 6 8 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also e Preprocessing lead time 0 days e Order quantity 100 Master Scheduling MRP first computes the total lead time as follows 0 2 100 x 05 7 days Total lead time Total lead time Suppose your organization s workday calendar has a workday pattern with five days on and two days off Workdays 1 5 are March 1 5 Saturday and Sunday March 6 and 7 are off
160. ation into flat files This information comes from Work in Process Bill of Materials on hand quantities purchase orders firm planned orders routings and Work in Process job resource requirements soft pegging A pegging item attribute value You can peg supply to demand for items with soft pegging soft reservation The planning process considers sales order demand soft reservation source base unit The unit of measure from which you are converting when you define your interclass conversions You define the destination base unit in terms of the source base unit Your source base unit is the base unit of a unit class source forecast When loading a forecast into another forecast the source forecast is the forecast you load from sourcing The action of identifying a purchasing source or supplier for goods or services To identify the best sources for your purchases you can create RFQs that you send to your suppliers enter quotations from your supplier and evaluate these quotations for each item you purchase sourcing rule Specifies how to replenish items in an organization such as purchased items in plants You can also use sourcing rules to override sourcing that is specified in the bill of distribution assigned to an item sourcing rule assignment See assignment hierarchy spare part A synonym for service part It is an inventory item used without modification to replace an original part during the performance of m
161. ation on a routing defines a specific portion of the manufacturing process for the assembly You can use operations to identify the location the quantity and the state of completion of the assemblies you are currently manufacturing For each component item on the bill of material associated with a routing you can specify the operation sequence where you require the item You can then only issue material where and when it is needed See Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 Standard Operation A standard operation is a commonly used operation that you define as a template to default operation information when you define routings When you define a new operation on a routing you can specify a standard operation whose information Bills of Material copies into the operation you are currently defining You can then change any of the copied information for the new operation See Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 Backflushing Transactions You can specify at what point in the routing you backflush component material Moves automatically backflush the appropriate components at the time they are needed You can postpone the backflush of material at time critical operations until a later operation See Issuing Components From Inventory to WIP Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Routings 3 5 Minimum Transfer Quantities You can set the minimum quantity that you move from an operation when you define a routing The Shop Floo
162. ations Implementation Wizard User s Guide After you log on to Oracle Applications complete these steps to implement Bills of Material Setup Checklist Set Profile Options AIW Reference Oracle Bills of Material Required Step 4 Required No Step 1 Required Step 2 Optional Define Exception Templates Define and Build your Workday Calendar Assign Workday Calendar to Organization Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Bills of Material Step5 Required Optional Optional Define Bills of Material Parameters Define Department Classes Define Resources Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Bills of Material Optional Define Resource Groups Oracle Bills of Material Optional Step 10 Optional Define Simulation Sets Define Locations Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Bills of Material 1 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 7 Step 12 Optional Define Departments Assign Resources and Resource Shifts to Departments Oracle Pills of Material Step 13 Optional 7 Step 15 Optional Define Overheads Oracle Bills of Material Associate Overheads with Departments Oracle Bills of Material Define Alternates Step 16 Optional 7 7 Define Standard Bill of Material Comments Define Standard Instructions Define Change Order Types Defin
163. attempting to approve it yourself forward consumption days A number of days forward from the current date used for consuming and loading forecasts Consumption of a forecast occurs in the current bucket and as far forward as the forward consumption days If the forward consumption days enters another bucket the forecast consumes anywhere in that bucket as well forward scheduling A scheduling technique where you specify a production start date and Oracle Manufacturing calculates a production end date using either detailed scheduling or repetitive line scheduling four way matching Purchasing performs four way matching to verify that purchase order receipt inspection and invoice quantities match within tolerance Glossary 31 freight on board FOB The point or location where the ownership title of goods is transferred from the seller to the buyer freeze You can freeze a purchase order after printing By freezing a purchase order you prevent anyone from adding new lines or changing the purchase order You can continue to receive goods and be billed on already existing purchase order lines The ability to continue receiving against the purchase order is the difference between freezing and cancelling freight carrier A commercial company used to send item shipments from one address to another frozen costs Costs currently in use for an operation process or item including resources material and overhead charges
164. ault If you skip this step Oracle shipped delete constraints will be used as the default value Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Creating Custom Delete Constraints page 2 24 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Defining Bills of Material Parameters Use bill of material parameters to define modes of operation and default values for an organization that affect functions such as bill definition bill deletion and assemble to order configuration numbering Define bill of material parameters for each organization in which you use bills or routings Bill parameters are specific to and must be defined for each organization Doing so ensures access to resource outside processing and overhead cost information for certain cost management functions p gt To define bill of material parameters 1 Navigate to the Parameters window Parameters M1 Max Bill Levels AE Configuration Options Inactive Status Inactive Numbering Segment Item Idm Replace with order line number EjUse Phantom Routings nherit Phantom Op Seq 2 Enter the maximum bill levels to explode The maximum is 60 3 Forconfigurations only enter an inactive status 4 Forconfigurations only enter the numbering segment to use when creating configuration item numbers 5 Select an automatic or user defined numbering method A unique configuration item number is automatically assigned based on the nu
165. available on hand quantity of the configuration item in the shipping organization Match and Reserve for Multi Level Configurations Multi level configuration environments create configurable subassemblies that can be sourced from anywhere in the supply chain You can match top assemblies and each configured subassembly in a multi level ATO configuration The system will first try to match the entire configuration If a match is found it will link the matching configuration item to the sales order and attempt to reserve any on hand as described above If a match for the top assembly is not found the AutoCreate Configuration process will create a new configuration item for the top level assembly and attempt to find matches at the sub assembly levels If a matching sub assembly is found it will use the existing configuration item s BOMs and routings A new item is created for any unmatched configuration The system automatically matches a configuration against existing configurations independent of their sourcing organizations enabling you to match across all relevant organizations Weight and Volume Calculation 5 30 AutoCreate Configuration Items calculates the weight and volume for the configured item by rolling up the weight and volume of the components in the OM validation organization For Multi level configurations the weight and volume are first calculated for the lowest level configuration and then rolled up until the w
166. ay specify that the front axle of a car has a production sequence 45 assigned to it while the production sequence of the rear axle is 46 See also loading order sequence planning production sequence number customer profile A method used to categorize customers based on credit information Receivables uses credit profiles to assign statement cycles dunning letter cycles salespersons and collectors to your customers You can also decide whether you want to charge your customers interest Glossary 19 Oracle Order Entry uses the order and total order limits when performing credit checking customer profile class A category for your customers based on credit information payment terms currency limits and correspondence types customer relationship An association that exists between customers that allows you to share agreements and bill to and ship to addresses customer site A specific area or place such as a building or a floor on a building at a customer address A customer address may have one or more related customer sites customer specification See specification type customer status The Active Inactive flag you use to deactivate customers with whom you no longer do business In Oracle Order Entry you can only enter orders agreements and returns for active customers but you can continue to process returns for inactive customers In Receivables you can only create invoices for active customers but you can cont
167. based job follows a network routing Network routings provide flexibility in choosing the next operation which in turn determines the series of operations the job moves through lot based resource A resource whose usage quantity is the amount required per job or schedule lot control An Oracle Manufacturing technique for enforcing use of lot numbers during material transactions thus enabling the tracking of batches of items throughout their movement in and out of inventory lot for lot A lot sizing technique that generates planned orders in quantities equal to the net requirements in each period low level code A number that identifies the lowest level in any bill of material that a component appears Low level codes are used by the MRP planner to ensure that net Glossary 40 requirements for the component are not calculated until all gross requirements from parent items have first been calculated M mail message action An electronic mail message distributed when an electronic mail alert is invoked by action rule processing in Oracle Quality Make or Buy An item attribute the Planner Workbench uses to default an appropriate value for implementation type when implementing planned orders for the item A value Make means the item is usually manufactured The Planner Workbench defaults the implementation type for planned orders for the item to Discrete job The planning process passes demand down from manufactured items
168. bility Organization Hierarchy Enter a valid organization hierarchy name from the list of values If the value for the All Organizations parameter is set to No and you have provided a value for the Organization Hierarchy parameter then the report will provide assembly information for the current organization and all subordinate organizations in the specified organization hierarchy If this parameter is left blank and the All Organizations parameter is set to No then the report will provide assembly information for the current organization You can enter a value in this field only if you have entered No in the All Organizations field Report Option Choose one of the following options Range Report the range of items you specify Specific Report the item you specify Reports 8 19 8 20 Specific Item Enter an item to report where used information Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the beginning and ending item numbers Category Set Enter a category set Bills of Material reports item where used information associated with this category set The default is the category set defined for your functional area Categories From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending category Levels to Implode Enter the number of bill of material levels to implode The default is 15 Implemented Only Indicate whether to report on
169. building configurations using other configurations as sub assemblies multi level configure to order supports internal and external sourcing of ATO models at any level in the BOM supports multi level PTO ATO hybrids The Oracle Configure to Order Implementation Manual contains current detailed information about how Oracle ERP products support the configure to order capability It provides detailed implementation consideration for every step of the process Configure to Order shares business and setup information with other Oracle Applications products Therefore you may refer to other user s guides when you set up and use Oracle Configure to Order Oracle Advanced Planning and Scheduling User s Guide Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Oracle Engineering User s Guide Oracle Inventory User s Guide Oracle Master Scheduling MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning User s Guide Oracle Order Management User s Guide Oracle Project Manufacturing User s Guide 5 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Definitions e Oracle Purchasing User s Guide e Oracle Quality User s Guide e Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Oracle HRMS User s Guide Oracle Projects User s Guide Assemble to Order Model ATO Configuration e Model bill of material with optional items and option selection rules e Configuration manufactured from mandatory components and selected options or purchased from a supplier Assemble to
170. ccount and credits the receiving valuation account If you change the above default account your receiving valuation account will have an incorrect balance If this resource is costed enter a variance account general ledger account to accumulate resource rate variances for a job or repetitive schedule For outside processing resources this is the purchase price variance account If you have Oracle Manufacturing installed you can use Resource batching To enable resource batching select the Batchable check box in the Batchable region This enables the other batch fields See Resource Batching Oracle Manufacturing Scheduling User s Guide Enter the maximum number units to be batched in the Maximum Batch Capacity field Enter the minimum number of units to be batched in the Minimum Batch Capacity field Select the unit of measure for the batch capacity from the list of values available in the Batch UOM window field Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 18 19 Enter the time value for the batching process in the Batching window field Select the time unit of measure available in the Batching Window UOM field To define cost type and resource rate associations IR Navigate to the Resource Costs window Do this by choosing the Rates button from the Resources window Note You cannot view costing information if the Privilege To View Cost Information function is excluded You cannot update costing information i
171. ceipts can be inspected or transferred before delivery standard unit conversion The conversion formula you define between different units from the same unit class You define your own standard conversion standard unit cost The unit cost you may use to cost all material and resource transactions in your inventory and work in process system This cost represents the expected cost for a component or assembly for a specified interval of time The basis for standard cost may be the cost history purchase order history or predicted changes in future costs standard value The default value Order Entry automatically places in an attribute to improve the efficiency and accuracy with which you enter an order The standard value for an attribute is frequently based on other values in the order See also attribute default value object standard value rule set standard value rule set A collection of attributes and associated standard value sources You associate a rule set with an order type to control the source and priority of default information on the Sales Orders window See also attribute default value object order type standard value source The attribute or value Oracle Bills of Material uses to provide a standard value or default for an order attribute status See customer status start date The date you plan to begin production of assemblies in a discrete job statistical forecasting A mathematical analysis of past
172. ces of demand Demand Time Fence Item attribute used to determine a future time inside which the planning process ignores forecast demand and only considers sales order demand when calculating gross requirements for an item Use this attribute to identify a time fence inside which you wish to build to sales order demand only to reduce the risk of carrying excess inventory A value of Cumulative manufacturing lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the demand time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the cumulative manufacturing lead time for the item A value of Cumulative total lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the Glossary 21 demand time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the total manufacturing lead time for the item A value of Total lead time means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the demand time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on anon workday plus the total lead time for the item A value of User defined time fence means Master Scheduling MRP calculates the demand time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the value you enter for Planning Time Fence Days for the item Demand Time Fence Days Item attribute used when you set the Planning Time Fence a
173. ch segment of the item flexfield you want to either append or replace For the Order number line number method you can specify a delimiter to separate order number and line number For example the following table illustrates the item numbers that would be created for different sales orders and different model item Configure to Order 5 27 See Also numbers In this example you have a two segment item flexfield with as the delimiter you have chosen as the order number line number delimiter the sales order number is 123 the line number is 21 and the next available sequence number is 2001 Assign Item Numbers Numbering Modelltem Configuration Item Segment Number Number Append with Sequence Computer 00 Computer 002001 Replace with Sequence Computer 00 Computer 2001 Replace with order line Computer 00 Computer 123 21 2 Append with Sequence 1 Computer 00 Computer 2001 00 1 Replace with Sequence Computer 00 2001 00 Replace with order line Computer 00 123 21 00 You can also generate unique configuration numbers by using the user defined configuration item numbering method You can develop a numbering scheme that works for your own unique business needs which must return an item number consistent with the existing ATO architecture The unique configuration number segment returned by the package will be accepted and used to form the configuration item number The length of the r
174. cle Purchas ing and move the assemblies to the Queue intraoperation step of the next operation or to the To move intraoperation step if this is the last operation Work in Process automatically charges this type of resource to a job or repetitive sched ule when you complete an operation Routings 3 31 3 32 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Deleting Information CHAPTER T his chapter tells you everything you need to know to delete item bill and routing information including e Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations page 4 2 e Deleting Components and Operations page 4 6 e Deletion Constraints page 4 8 Deleting Information 4 1 Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations 4 2 Set up groups of entities to check delete and optionally archive Entities can include items bills of material components routings or operations What entities you can delete depends on what Oracle application you are currently using and what applications you have installed e if you are using Oracle Bills of Material you can delete only bills routings components and operations e if you are using Oracle Engineering you can delete any engineering entity except ECOs e if you are using Oracle Inventory and you do not have Bills of Material installed you can only delete manufacturing items e if you are using Inventory and you do have Bills of Material installed you can del
175. cle Quality the message is sent to all defined mail IDs dynamic insertion Automatically creates new accounting flexfield combinations as you enter them If you do not use dynamic insertion you create new accounting flexfield combinations with a separate window dynamic lead time offsetting A scheduling method that quickly estimates the start date of an order operation or resource Dynamic lead time offsetting schedules using the organization workday calendar dynamically defined serial number Creating and assigning serial numbers as you need them instead of creating serial numbers before their assignment E earned discounts Discounts your customers are allowed to take if they pay for their invoices on or before the discount date Oracle Bills of Material takes into account any discount grace days you assign to this customer s credit profile For example if the discount due date is the 15th of each month but discount grace days is 5 your customer must pay on or before the 20th to receive the earned discount Discounts are determined by the terms you assign to an invoice during invoice entry Oracle Bills of Material differentiates between earned and unearned discounts An earned discount is a discount you give to a customer who pays on or before the discount date or within the discount grace period For example a customer may earn a 2 discount off the original invoice if payment is received within 10 days Oracle Bi
176. computer system minimum transfer quantity The minimum number of assemblies to move from your current operation to the next Work in Glossary 43 Process warns you when you move less than the minimum transfer quantity mixed model map Used to design balanced lines The projected volume and mix of demand for a group of products is used to calculate weighted average work content times These averages are compared to TAKT time in order to regroup events into balanced operations and reallocate resources modal window Certain actions that you perform may cause a modal window to display A modal window requires you to act on its contents before you can continue usually by choosing OK or Cancel model model item An item whose bill of material lists options and option classes available when you place an order for the model item model bill of material A bill of material for a model item A model bill lists option classes and options available when you place an order for the model item model item An item whose bill of material lists options and option classes available when you place an order for the model item model unit number effectivity A method of controlling which components are used to make an end item based on an assigned end item model unit number modification percent Used to modify the destination master schedule entries or forecast entries you are loading by a percent of the source entries module A program o
177. cost of the higher level assembly Routing resource costs are also included in capacity planning e No This is the default This value specifies that only components are included in the higher assembly s cost not resources and overheads Inherit Phantom Op Seq Set this parameter to specify whether phantom subassembly components inherit the operation sequence number of their parent or higher level assembly or maintain their own operation sequence number This parameter is set at the inventory organization level and applies to all phantoms within a single inventory organization The parameter has these two values e Yes This is the default This value specifies that phantom subassembly components inherit the operation sequence number of their parent or higher level assemblies Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide e No If you select this value phantom subassembly components maintain their own operation sequence numbers See Also Overview of Configure To Order page 5 2 Bills of Material Parameters Report page 8 11 Creating Alternates An alternate bill describes an alternate list of component items that produce an assembly An alternate routing describes an alternate manufacturing process that produces an assembly P To create or update an alternate 1 Navigate to the Alternates window S Alternates M1 Alternate Description Inactive On LL Jj ee ee a PP a ee ee E
178. cturing User s Guide This guide describes how to use Oracle s Flow manufacturing functionality to support the processes of flow manufacturing It describes design features of demand management line design and balancing and kanban planning It also describes production features of line scheduling productions and kanban execution Oracle Inventory User s Guide This guide describes how to define items and item information perform receiving and inventory transactions maintain cost control plan items perform cycle counting and physical inventories and set up Oracle Inventory Oracle Master Scheduling MRP and Supply Chain Planning User s Guide This guide describes how to anticipate and manage both supply and demand for your items Using a variety of tools and techniques you can create forecasts load these forecasts into master production schedules and plan your end items and their component requirements You can also execute the plan releasing and rescheduling planning suggestions for discrete jobs and repetitive schedules Preface Xv Oracle Order Management User s Guide This guide describes how to enter sales orders and returns copy existing sales orders schedule orders release orders create price lists and discounts for orders run processes and create reports Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide This guide describes how to manage different stages of a product as it moves through the shop floo
179. current request A request to complete a task for you You issue a request whenever you submit a task such as running a report Once you submit a task the concurrent manager automatically takes over for you completing your request without further involvement from you or interruption to your work Concurrent managers process your request according to when you submit the request and the priority you assign to your request If you do not assign a priority to your request your application prioritizes the request for you confidence percent The degree of confidence in a forecast that the forecasted item becomes actual demand When loading schedules from a forecast the confidence percent is multiplied by the forecast quantity to determine the schedule quantity configuration A product a customer orders by choosing a base model and a list of options It can be shipped as individual pieces as a set kit or as an assembly configuration item configuration bill of material The bill of material for a configuration item configuration item The item that corresponds to a base model and a specific list of options Bills of Material creates a configuration item for assemble to order models configuration variance For Work in Process this quantity variance is the difference between the standard components required per the standard bill of material and the standard components required per the work in process bill of material Currently this
180. d defaults may be for all items in an organization or for a specific category material overhead rate A percentage of an item cost you apply to the item for the purposes of allocating material overhead costs For example you may want to allocate the indirect labor costs of your manufacturing facility to items based on a percentage of the item s value and usage material release For a Planning Schedule indicates that the schedule forecast requirements include Unimplemented Planned Orders and Approved Requisitions The schedule released quantities include Approved Releases material requirement An inventory item and quantity needed to build an assembly on a job or repetitive schedule Discrete job and repetitive schedule material requirements are created based on the component items defined on the assembly s bill of materials Issue transactions fulfill material requirements material requirements planning MRP A process that utilizes bill of material information a master schedule and current inventory information to calculate net requirements for materials material scheduling method During the planning process the method used to determine when to stage material used in the production of a discrete job You can schedule material to arrive on the order start Glossary 42 date or the operation start date where a component is required manifest A list of contents and or weight and counts for one or more deliveries in a
181. d reserve using the Create Configuration Item Workflow activity Finally you can match and reserve by creating your own custom matching The profile BOM Use Custom Match Function controls whether the match performed uses the standard match function or a custom match function For more information See Profiles Oracle Configure To Order Implementation Manual To select a matching configuration the following criteria must be met e The order must be booked and the order line must be scheduled e The order line cannot have an associated configuration item assigned e The profile option BOM Match to Existing Configurations must be set to Yes e The routing type of the model s primary routing and the configuration item s primary routing are the same In other words if the model currently has a flow routing as its primary it will only match to a configuration item with a flow routing as its primary routing If the routing currently has a discrete routing as its primary it will only match to a configuration item with a discrete routing as its primary To reserve a configuration item in all modes the following additional criteria must be met e The profile option BOM Automatic Reservations must be set to Yes e The profile option OM Reservation Time Fence must not be null e The order schedule date must be within the time fence defined in the OM Reservation Time Fence profile option Configure to Order 5 29 e There must be
182. d line numbers when you replace the base model s segment value with the order number line number BOM Configuration Item Type Indicates the item type of the new configuration items that the create configuration program creates Setting Up 1 47 1 48 BOM Days Past Before Starting Cutoff of Order Management Bills Indicates n days ago to save versions of Order Management bills of material in the pre explosions table Components effective as of n days before the current date are used to explode the indented bill BOM Default Bill of Material Levels Indicates the number of explosion levels to use as a default for bill of material indented explosions BOM Default WIP Supply Values for Components Indicates whether to default WIP Supply Type WIP Supply Subinventory and WIP Supply Locator from item master for a component item when defining a bill If set to No WIP reads the item master BOM Hour UOM Indicates the unit of measure that represents an hour You cannot schedule resources whose unit of measure is not in the same class as the hour unit of measure BOM Inherit Option Class Operation Sequence Number Indicates whether to allow components on model bills to inherit operation information from parent items BOM Model Item Access Indicates whether a holder of this responsibility can define and update bills of material for model and option class items BOM Perform Lead Time Calculations Indicates whether to perform le
183. d parameter is set in the Organization Parameters window you must associate the resource with an expenditure type See Organization Parameters Window Oracle Inventory User s GuideDefining Project Parameters Oracle Inventory User s Guide and You can only select expenditure types that belong to the Work in Process expenditure type class Expenditure types are defined in Oracle Projects See Expenditure Type Classes Oracle Projects User s Guide Expenditure Types Oracle Projects User s Guide and Defining Expenditure Types Oracle Projects User s Guide Indicate whether to enable the outside processing resource and if SO enter its item number Attention If you specify PO Move or PO Receipt Oracle Purchasing uses this item when it creates requisitions for your outside processing resource See Overview of Shop Floor Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide See Outside Processing Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Enable the Costed check box to collect and assign costs to this resource and if so optionally enter an activity for the resource You cannot view costing information if the Privilege To View Cost Information function is excluded from the responsibility You cannot update costing information if in addition the Privilege To Maintain Cost Information function is excluded You can use activities to group resource charges for cost reporting purposes See Defining Activities and Activity Costs Oracle Cost Managem
184. d time offsetting You can also maintain lead time information manually Manufactured Items Dynamic lead time offsetting uses the following lead time attributes for discretely manufactured items e fixed lead time e variable lead time e preprocessing lead time Dynamic lead time offsetting uses the following lead time attributes for repetitively manufactured items e processing lead time e fixed lead time Purchased Items Dynamic lead time offsetting uses the following lead time attributes preprocessing time e processing lead time post processing lead time Routings When computing manufacturing lead times operation and resource offsets are automatically assigned to a routing For material and resource requirement planning you can optionally include offsets when computing requirement dates Overview of Lead Time Management page 7 2 Manufacturing Scheduling 6 7 Lead Time Offsetting Computations Dynamic lead time offsetting offsets dates in two steps computing total lead time and offsetting the date by total lead time Total lead time contains both fixed lead time and the quantity dependent portion of lead time Preprocessing lead time is also included for discrete items To compute the total lead time for discrete items use the following equation preprocessing lead time fixed lead time order quantity x variable lead time Compute the total lead time for repetitive items using the following equ
185. duled consecutively Work in Process can either forward schedule backward schedule or both from an operation Work in Process schedules repetitive production using repetitive line scheduling schedules each resource in sequence based upon the shift workday calendar the amount of the resource required and the number of assigned resources that can be simultaneously scheduled Overview of Discrete Manufacturing Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Overview of WIP Scheduling Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Overview of Routings page 3 2 Manufacturing Scheduling 6 3 Repetitive Line Scheduling See Also Repetitive line scheduling is based on production line attributes including start and stop times line speed line capacity and lead time Repetitive line scheduling uses your workday calendar and the line start and stop times rather than detailed resource shift availability Define Production Lines Work in Process lets you define production lines and specify a start and stop time for each line You must also specify the minimum and maximum hourly rate on each line and specify whether a line s lead time is fixed or routing based Repetitive Assembly For lines with a lead time basis of Fixed you must enter a fixed lead time Oracle Manufacturing uses this fixed lead time for all repetitive assemblies assigned to the line For lines with a lead time basis of Routing based you can automatically compute manufactur
186. duled maintenance or extended downtime worker An independent concurrent process that executes specific tasks Programs using workers to break large tasks into smaller ones must coordinate the actions of the workers Workflow Engine The Oracle Workflow component that implements a workflow process definition The Workflow Engine manages the state of all activities automatically executes functions maintains a history of completed activities and detects error conditions and starts error processes The Workflow Engine is implemented in server PL SQL and activated when a call to an engine API is made See also Account Generator activity function item type WP4 Working Party 4 on the facilitation of international trade procedures of the Economic Commission for Europe a commission of the United Nations Working Glossary 83 Party 4 has experts on data elements and interchange and on trade procedures X X12 ANSI standard for inter industry electronic interchange of business transactions Glossary 84 X 400 International standard in development for message transmission Y yield See component yield Z Index A Absorption account 1 19 for costed resources 1 27 Activity for resource charges 3 19 to group resources 1 26 All organizations importing bills and routings 1 45 Alternate 1 10 1 14 for bills 2 11 for routings 3 11 when deleting information 4 4 Alternate bill
187. dules distributed by structure level This variance looks at the assembly cost for the resource and overhead standard cost at the top level and compares them to the actual resource and overhead costs charged to the standard job or repetitive schedule All other costs material material overhead outside processing resource and overhead costs Glossary 74 from lower level assemblies are included in the material usage variance calculation site use See business purpose snapshot The only phase under the memory based planning engine The snapshot takes a snapshot or picture of supply and demand information at a particular point in time The snapshot gathers all the information about current supply and demand that is required by the planner to calculate net material requirements including on hand inventory quantities and scheduled receipts Under the memory based planning engine explosion and planning occur in the snapshot phase snapshot delete worker Anindependent concurrent process launched by the snapshot monitor that deletes planning data from the previous planning run snapshot monitor A process launched by the memory based snapshot that coordinates all the processes related to the memory based planning engine snapshot task A task performed by the snapshot or a snapshot worker during the planning process snapshot worker A group of independent concurrent processes controlled by the snapshot monitor that brings inform
188. e lead time lot size Repetitive Schedule Lead Times A lead time lot size of 1 is always used to compute lead times for items produced on routing based schedules The following terms apply to repetitive schedules Day A day is equal to the number of hours the production line is active If the line is active from 8 00 to 16 00 the day is 8 hours long Production Rate The number of assemblies built per line per Line Speed hour Line Fixed Lead The fixed lead time of the production line Time that is the amount of time for one assembly to travel down a production line Production Interval The time between two assemblies on a pro duction line If the production rate line speed is 10 assemblies per hour then the production interval is 1 hours or once every 0125 days or 1 10 8 for a line that runs 8 hours per day 1 production rate day The Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times program calls the scheduler twice first using a quantity of 1 then using a quantity of 0 For each case the scheduling lead time expressed in days is returned This is the total time taken to build the assemblies The program then converts the two values into the fixed lead time and the variable lead time item attributes respectively Manufacturing Lead Times 7 9 The following table illustrates how scheduling lead times are calculated Assembly s Scheduling Quantity Scheduling Routing Basis Lead Time production interv
189. e Shifts button to assign and update shift information for the resource To assign shift information for the resource I Navigate to the Shifts window Do this by choosing the Shifts button from the Resources window Enter a shift number to assign to the resource The shifts available to assign to the resource are those assigned to the workday calendar assigned to the organization Choose the Capacity Changes button to define capacity changes for a shift To define capacity changes Capacity modifications can add or delete a day or add or reduce capacity for a shift 1 Navigate to the Capacity Changes window Do this by choosing the Capacity Changes button from the Shifts window Enter or select a simulation set for the capacity change Use simulation sets for capacity requirements planning in Oracle Capacity See Creating Simulation Sets Oracle Capacity User s Guide Select the action to take for the department resource Add Adds a workday and capacity changes Setting Up 1 23 See Also Defining a Resource Delete Deletes a workday for this department resource Add or Reduce Capacity Add or reduce capacity for a resource shift The capacity change can fall outside a shift time so you can add time to a shift To reduce capacity enter negative numbers 4 Enter the number of resource units to increase or decrease capacity if applicable Make sure to use a negative number if you are reducing cap
190. e bill with the same label as an alternate routing components are assigned to operations on the alternate routing If there is no routing with the same alternate label components are assigned to operations on the primary routing Engineering Routings You can define an engineering routing as an alternate for a manufacturing routing This would typically be used to prototype a variation from the primary routing that produces the same assembly Both engineering and manufacturing routings share the same resource department and standard operation information Routings 3 3 See Also Dynamic Routings See Also Switching Between Primary and Alternate Routings page 3 14 Creating Alternates page 1 15 Primary and Alternate Bills of Material page 2 5 Paths that jobs take are not always known at creation Depending on initial operations and their results operation flexibility is frequently required There can be numerous possibilities defined as part of a routing network any one of them being selectable based on the outcome of the last operation within the job performed All possible operation paths that a route may flow through are first determined This networked predefined path definition provides for dynamic flexible operation Lot Based Flow Routing A flow route is defined as a comprehensive routing network It enables you to model your shop floor define possible re work points or it can be linear Conceptu
191. e running the Bill of Material Comparison Report choose the Report button The Bill Components Comparison window displays both bills Two columns of check boxes one for assembly 1 and one for assembly 2 indicate if the component appears in the assembly The Main tabbed region displays the item and operation sequences the planning percent the quantity and whether the item is optional The Effectivity tabbed region displays the effective date range and whether the item is implemented Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 Planning Percent page 2 40 Yield page 2 39 Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Bill of Material Comparison Report page 8 2 Bills of Material 2 33 Viewing Item Usage View an imploded list of all the using assemblies for a specified component P To view item where used 1 Navigate to the Find Item Where Used window IE Find Item WhereUsed M1 FEE 23 0 008 000 UOM E Engineering Item Org Revision BEIC Hierarchy Levels a Serial Number Unit Number Future and Current M Ziimplemented Only 2 Inthe Find Item Where Used window enter the item the revision the revision date and the number of levels to implode for this bill of material De Attention Only Current components effective as of the revision date you specify will be displayed 3 Indicate whether you need to inquire about component usage for the current organization the curr
192. e 3 16 Navigation Path Routings gt Routings gt Routing Revisions Routings page 3 10 Run Assemble to Order Processes page 5 24 Routings Routings Routings ATO Simulation Sets See CAP Setup Simulation Sets Shifts page 1 41 Setup Calendars Shifts Shift Times page 1 41 Setup Calendars Shifts Times Standard Operations page 3 22 Routings Standard Operations Substitute Components page 2 21 Bills gt Bills gt Substitutes Workday Calendar page 1 36 Setup gt Calendars Workday Patterns page 1 40 Setup Calendars Workday Pattern A 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide APPENDIX Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu T his appendix describes the options on the Oracle Bills of Material Tools menu Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu B 1 Bills of Material Tools menu Depending upon the currently active window and other factors the Tools menu for Bills of Material includes Roll Up Costs Roll Up Lead Times Check for Loops Transfer Bill Rtg Copy Bill Rtg From Assign Common Bill Rtg Configure Bill See Also B 2 Navigates to the Cost Rollup window where you can perform a cost rollup Executes the Calculate Cumulative Lead Times program Executes the Loop Check program that searches for loops in your bill Bill loops oc cur when you assign a bill a
193. e Delete Constraints Setup Steps For each step a Context section indicates whether you need to repeat the step for each set of books set of tasks inventory organization HR organization or other operating unit under Multiple Organizations Step1 Set Profile Options Required Profile options specify how Oracle Bills of Material controls access to and processes data In general profile options can be set at one or more of the following levels site application responsibility and user Oracle Bills of Material users use the Update Personal Profile Options form to set profile options only at the user level System administrators Setting Up 1 7 1 8 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 use the Update System Profile Options form to set profile options at the site application responsibility and user levels See Oracle Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Context Perform this step once for each entity that is organization operating unit business group or legal entity See Also Oracle Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Define Exception Templates Optional You can define your own exception templates When you assign an exception template to your workday calendar you can assign workday exceptions to account for plant workday differences such as holidays scheduled maintenance or extended downtime Context Perform this step once per installation See Also Creating a Workday Exception Templat
194. e Key Flexfield Security Rule efine Security Rules B 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Character Mode Form and Menu Path GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path Define Rollup Groups Rollup Groups Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Groups Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Groups Define Routing Routing Details Navigate Routing Define Navigator Routings gt Routings gt Routing Details or Routing Revisions Navigator Routings gt Routings gt Routing Revisions or Routings Navigator Routings gt Routings Define Security Rule Define Security Rules Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Validation gt Security Navigate Setup Flexfields Validation Security Define gt Define Define Segment Values Segment Values Navigate Setup Flexfields Validation Values Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Validation gt Values Define Shorthand Aliases Shorthand Aliases Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Aliases Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Aliases Define Simulation Sets Simulation Sets Navigate Setup Organization SimulationSets Navigator Setup gt Simulation Sets Define Standard Comments Bill Documents Navigate Setup BOM Comments Navigator Bills gt Documents Define Standard Instructions Operation Documents Navigate Setup BOM Instructions Navigator Routing gt Documents Define Standard Operation Standard Operations Navigate Routing Define Navigator Ro
195. e also order cycle cycle action action rule A conditional statement is evaluated during quality data collection Action rules must be evaluated and found to be true before their associated quality actions are invoked active schedule A schedule currently running on a production line A schedule can be active past its scheduled completion date or before its scheduled start date acquisition cost The cost necessary to obtain inventory and prepare it for its intended use It includes material costs and various costs associated with procurement and shipping of items such as duty freight drayage customs charges storage charges other supplier s charges and so on activity A business action or task which uses a resource or incurs a cost activity Workflow An Oracle Workflow unit of work performed during a business process See also activity attribute function activity activity attribute A parameter for an Oracle Workflow function activity that controls how the function activity operates You define an activity attribute by displaying the activity s Attributes properties page in the Activities window of Oracle Workflow Builder You assign a value to an activity attribute by displaying the activity node s Attribute Values properties page in the Process window actual demand The demand from actual sales orders not including forecasted demand actual material shortage Available quantity is less than demand quantity when
196. e date In Manufacturing Scheduling you assign the requested due date in conjunction with the scheduling priority The rescheduling engine uses this information to prioritize and reschedule all jobs or pending scheduling jobs request for quotation RFQ A document you use to solicit supplier quotations for goods or services you need You usually send a request for quotation to many suppliers to ensure that you get the best price and terms possible Depending on the way you do business you can use two general types of RFQs specific and generic requestor The employee that creates an ECO or requests approval for an ECO required capacity The amount of capacity required for a resource or production line required hours The number of resource hours required per resource unit to build one unit of the bill of resources item required rate The production rate allocated to an individual production line by the repetitive schedule allocation process requirement See material requirement requirement date The date when the requirement needed by the discrete job or repetitive schedule is to be consumed Requirement dates are defaulted to the start date of the operation where a requirement is consumed requisition See purchase requisition and internal sales order requisition approval The act of approving the purchases of the items on a requisition A requisition must receive the required approvals before a buyer can create purcha
197. e departure planned before it can be pick released The value of this flag is set for the customer item Also known as planning mandatory departure planning pool Allof the scheduled shipment lines available to be departure planned These include scheduled shipment lines that have not been shipped and are not currently part of a planned departure Also known as planning pool Departure Planning Workbench DPW Related windows that manage departures and deliveries These integrated forms are presented to the user as a workbench dependent demand Demand for an item that is directly related to or derived from the demand for other items depot repair A process used to track items returned by a customer for repair or replacement descriptive flexfield A feature used to collect information unique to your business You determine the additional information you need and descriptive flexfield lets you customize your application to your needs without additional programming destination base unit The unit of measure to which you are converting when you define interclass conversions Your destination base unit is the base unit of a unit class destination forecast The forecast you load into when copying a forecast into another forecast destination organization An inventory organization that receives item shipments from a given organization detailed message action A message representing one exception Oracle Alert inserts the except
198. e model primary routing and network then drops any option dependent events for which no component exists referencing that event All process and line operations and their associated network are copied from the model routing Note In a multi level multi organization environment a routing is created for the top model and each non phantom sub model in the manufacturing organization defined by the sourcing rules on the model Overview of Routings page 3 2 Creating a Flow Routing Oracle Flow Manufacturing User s Guide Configure to Order 5 35 Cost Rollup Preconfiguring Items If the organization is using a Standard costing method in a single level environment a single level Cost Rollup is performed for the configuration item using the configuration BOM and routing If the organization is using an Average costing method the configuration item has zero cost for the Average cost type Configuration items do not pick up any cost from models or option classes in their single level bill Models and option classes are only considered by forecast consumption and master schedule relief functions In a multi organization environment cost roll up is performed using supply chain cost roll up Cost roll up for each configuration item is performed in the manufacturing sourcing organization The cost of the configuration transfer cost in the receiving organization transfer to organization is established by taking t
199. e one of the following options All Report all past current and pending compo nents associated with the bill Current Report all components effective as of the revi sion date Future and current Report all future and current components as of the revision date Explosion Quantity Enter a quantity to explode This quantity is used to calculate the requirements for the components of the parent item by multiplying this quantity by the component usage in the bill of material Assembly Detail Indicate whether you want to print assembly detail associated with the bill Reports 8 9 See Also Order Entry Detail Indicate whether to print order entry detail for the components on the bill Leadtime and Other Detail Indicate whether to print lead time details associated with the components on the bill Reference Designators Indicate whether to print reference designators for the components on the bill Substitute Components Indicate whether to print substitute components for the components on the bill Order By Choose one of the following options Item Seq Op Seq For each bill level order the components by item sequence then by operation sequence Op Seq Item Seq For each bill level order the components by operation sequence then by item sequence Use Planning Percent Indicate whether you want to use the planning percent to calculate the component requirements of the present
200. e organization to support the requirement Shrinkage Rate An item attribute the planning process uses to inflate the demand Glossary 73 for the item to compensate for expected material loss Enter a factor that represents the average amount of material you expect to lose during your manufacturing process For example if an average 20 of all units of the item fail final inspection enter a shrinkage rate for the item of 0 2 In this example the planning process always inflates net requirements for the item by a factor of 1 25 1 1 shrinkage rate shrinkage rate The percentage on a parent assembly expected to be scrapped in work in process SIC code Standard Industry Classification Code A standard classification created by the government used to categorize your customers simulated job Job used to evaluate the availability of material and resources required for a potential discrete job based on the job quantity and need date for the assembly simulation schedule Unofficial schedules for personal use that contain the most current scheduled item information You can print Simulation schedules but you cannot confirm or send them via EDI simulation set A group of capacity modifications for resource shifts to simulate plan or schedule capacity single level variance A work in process variance that is the difference between the standard cost of an assembly and the actual charges to a standard jobs or repetitive sche
201. e schedules Each accounting class includes distribution accounts and variance accounts Also used in cost reporting WIP move resource A resource automatically charged to a discrete job or repetitive schedule by a move transaction Resources are automatically charged when a forward move occurs or uncharged when a backward move occurs wire A payment method where you pay invoices by notifying your bank to debit your account and credit your suppliers account Work Breakdown Structure The breakdown of project work into tasks These tasks can be broken down into subtasks or hierarchical units of work work order date The date to begin processing the paperwork for the discrete job This date is offset from the start date by the preprocessing lead time work in process An item in various phases of production in a manufacturing plant This includes raw material awaiting processing up to final assemblies ready to be received into inventory workday calendar A calendar that identifies available workdays for one or more organizations Master Scheduling MRP Inventory Work in Process and Capacity plan and schedule activities based on a calendar s available workdays workday exception set An entity that defines mutually exclusive sets of workday exceptions For each organization you can specify a workday calendar and exception set workday exceptions Dates that define plant or shift workday variations including holidays sche
202. e state codes as the tax code when you define sales tax rates for the United States tax condition A feature that allows you to define and evaluate one or more conditional lines After execution each tax condition may have one or more actions based on how each transaction against the condition validates tax exempt A customer business purpose or item free from tax charges tax group A tax group that allows you to build a schedule of multiple conditional taxes taxlocation A specific tax location within your tax authority For example Redwood Shores is a tax location in the Tax Authority California San Mateo Redwood Shores tare weight The weight of an item excluding packaging or included items target value A number which indicates the desired result of a given quality characteristic Can also be used to denote the expected average of values for a quality characteristic teardown time The time required to clean up or restore a machine or work center after Operation territory A feature that lets you categorize your customers or salespeople For example you can group your customers by geographic region or industry type Territory Flexfield A key flexfield you can use to categorize customers and salespersons Glossary 79 this level costs The cost or value added at the current level of an assembly Resource outside processing and overhead costs are examples of this level costs Material is always a previous le
203. e the Indented Bill of Material Cost Report which lists the detailed cost structure by level Choose OK Rolling Up Assembly Costs Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Indented Bills of Material Cost Report Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Routings 3 21 Creating a Standard Operation Standard operations are commonly used operations you can define as a template for use in defining future routing operations If you assign the operation code of standard operation in a routing the standard operation information is copied into the operation you are currently defining You can then modify the operation information in your new operation Prerequisites Q You must define at least one department before you can define a standard operation See Defining a Department page 1 19 P To create a standard operation 1 Navigate to the Standard Operations window prm Operations VSM Count Description Point Autocharge Backflush Yield Op Yield Enabled Operation A iv vi Operation B iv ivi i Operation C vi ivi vil Operation D ivi r iv ivi i ivi ivl ivi iv ivi o a oO Ki I ojo eie I I Operation E Ki Operation F I Operation G I I l l L L I Operation H Operation Resources 2 Enteraunique operation code to identify a standard operation Note If Oracle Warehouse Management is installed the Standard Operatio
204. e you make using Oracle Applications can update many tables at once But when you modify Oracle Applications data using anything other than Oracle Applications you may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables If your tables get out of synchronization with each other you risk retrieving erroneous information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle Applications When you use Oracle Applications to modify your data Oracle Applications automatically checks that your changes are valid Oracle Applications also keeps track of who changes information If you enter information into database tables using database tools you may store invalid information You also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because SQL Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes About Oracle Oracle Corporation develops and markets an integrated line of software products for database management applications development decision support and office automation as well as Oracle Applications an integrated suite of more than 160 software modules for financial management supply chain management manufacturing project systems human resources and customer relationship management Preface xix Your Feedback Oracle products are available for mainframes minicomputers personal computers network computers and personal digital assistants allowing organizations to integrate di
205. ead Time 0 0 0 Optional No Calculations BOM Planning Item Access Ded v v Optional Yes 1 46 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide r Default Profile Option User Resp App Site Required Value BOM Standard Item Access Optional Yes BOM Update Resource Optional No UOM BOM Week or Period Start Optional Day w You can update the profile option You can view the profile option value but you cannot change it 0 You cannot view or change the profile option value BOM Automatic Reservations Indicates whether the system will attempt to automatically reserve existing on hand inventory after matching a configuration During Autocreate Configuration if a match has been found and this profile is set to Yes CTO will attempt to reserve on hand inventory for any order line having a schedule date within the OM Reservation Time Fence If progressing the order via the workflow a message will display with details of the match and reservation performed If you are using the batch program the log file provides details of the match and reservations performed BOM Check for Duplicate Configuration Indicates whether to search for an existing duplicate configuration rather than create a new item BOM Component Item Sequence Increment Indicates the value by which to increment the sequence of the component item on the bill BOM Configuration Item Delimiter Indicates a character used to separate the order an
206. ect where to collect it when to collect it and what action to take based on this data A collection plan is similar to a test or inspection plan collection plan element A collection element that has been added to a collection plan collection trigger A set of conditions that invoke quality data collection when satisfied Collection triggers are evaluated as parent transaction are entered column headings Descriptions of the contents of each column in the report combination of segment values A combination of segment values uniquely describes the information stored in a field made up of segments A different combination of segment values results when you change the value of one or more segments When you alter the combination of segment values you alter the description of the information stored in the field commitment A contractual guarantee with a customer for future purchases usually with deposits or prepayments You can then create invoices against the commitment to absorb the deposit or prepayment Receivables automatically records all necessary accounting entries for your commitments Oracle Order Entry allows you to enter order lines against commitments A journal entry you make to record an anticipated expenditure as indicated by approval of a requisition Also known as pre commitment pre encumbrance or pre lien committed amount The amount you agree to spend with a supplier common bill of materia
207. ed lines A method of sending demand to a supplier that indicates the order in which the customer wants the truck loaded When the customer unloads the truck the parts will match the sequence of the customer s production so they can be taken right to the production line The order quantity is 1 and it has a unique identifier that can be used to perform Load Sequence in Delivery Based Shipping serial genealogy The tracking of the parent child relationship between serial numbers serial number A number assigned to each unit of an item and used to track the item serial number control A manufacturing technique for enforcing use of serial numbers during a material transaction serialized unit The unique combination of a serial number and an inventory item service A benefit or privilege that can be applied to a product Oracle Service categorizes the items you define as serviceable thereby making them serviceable items You can order or apply service to serviceable items service item An inventory item used to define a service program or warranty Service items can be recorded against serviceable products A synonym for serviceable item is a serviceable product service item feature A particular service component such as implementation or telephone support that you include with a service item Once you classify an inventory item as a service type item and enter the service program related attributes for it you can list t
208. eduling or repetitive line scheduling balancing entity An organization for which you prepare a balance sheet represented as a balancing segment value in your accounting flexfield This is the equivalent of a fund in government organizations Examples include companies strategic business units and divisions balancing segment An Accounting Flexfield segment you define so that General Ledger automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment For example if your company segment is a balancing segment General Ledger ensures that within every journal entry the total debits to company 01 equal the total credits to company 01 An Accounting Flexfield segment you define so that Oracle Bills of Material automatically balances all journal entries for each value of this segment For example if your fund segment is a balancing segment Oracle Government General Ledger assures that with every journal entry the total debits to Fund 01 equals the total credits to Fund 01 bankers automated clearing system BACS The standard format of electronic funds transfer used in the United Kingdom base currency See functional currency base model The model item from which a configuration item was created base unit The unit of measure to which you convert all units of measure within one class The base unit is the smallest or most commonly used unit of measure in the class For example millimeter is the base unit in the
209. egment the order of your segments and more You can then define the list of acceptable values for each segment key flexfield segment One of up to 30 different sections of your key flexfield You separate segments from each other by a symbol you choose such as or Each segment can be up to 25 characters long Each key flexfield segment typically captures one element of your business or operations structure such as company division region or product for the accounting flexfield and item version number or color code for the item flexfield key flexfield segment value A series of characters and a description that provide a unique value for this element such as 0100 Eastern region V20 or Version 2 0 key indicators A report that lists statistical receivables and collections information that lets you review trends and projections Also an Oracle Applications feature you use to gather and retain information about your productivity such as the number of invoices paid You define key indicators periods and Oracle Bills of Material provides a report that shows productivity indicators for your current and prior period activity kit An item that has a standard list of components or included items you ship when you process an order for that item A kit is similar to a pick to order model because it has shippable components but it has no options and you order it directly by its item number not using the configuration
210. eight and volume of the top model is determined The weight and volume are calculated in the unit of measure for the base model If the unit of measure is not defined on the base model the system calculates the weight and volume in the base units of the UOM class for one of the components of the model If the model and options are not all from the same UOM class the system uses the UOM conversions defined in inventory If any required UOM conversions have not been defined the system does not calculate the weight and volume for the configuration The weight and volume of the top level configuration is not calculated if the corresponding weight on volume of any of the lower calculations can not be calculated Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide The following table presents an example of the Laptop Computer configuration we are going to use for our calculation Quantity Optional Laptop Computer ATO Model Carrying Case Purchased Item Keyboard Purchased Item Yes Laptop Manual Purchased Item 1 2 No In this example the calculation starts with the monitor which is a configured sub assambly Weight Volume of Monitor 111 Wt Vol of Monitor Model Wt Vol of VGA OC 1 Wt Vol of VGA2 1 1 The weight and volume of the laptop configuration contains the weight and volume of the monitor configuration Weight Volume of Laptop Configuration Wt Vol of Laptop Computer Model 1 Wt Vol of Carrying case
211. em Each bill of material can have many components For each component you specify attributes such as operation sequence item sequence usage quantity yield supply type supply subinventory and locator and others The following table lists valid component attributes for each type of bill Valid Component Attributes and Bill Types Standard Model Option Class Planning Component Attributes Parent Item Parent Item ParentItem Parent Item Item Item Sequence Operation Sequence Effective Date Range Planning Percent Yield Bills of Material 2 7 See Also Component Attributes Enforce Integer Requirements Include in Cost Rollup Standard Model Option Class Planning Parent Item Parent Item Parent Item Parent Item Supply Type Supply Subinventory Supply Locator Mutually Exclusive Options Optional Flag Check ATP Minimum Quantity Maximum Quantity No Yes Yes No Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Yield page 2 39 Planning Percent page 2 40 Enforce Integer Requirements page 2 40 Supply Types Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Supply Subinventory and Locator page 2 42 Mutually Exclusive and Optional page 2 42 2 8 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Check ATP page 2 43 Minimum and Maximum Quantity page 2 43 Basis page 2 43 Shipping Details page 2
212. em Type Op Seq Optional Qty 2S4 486 Processor Purchased Item 25 45 47 Option Class VGA Manual Purchased Item VGA1 Purchased Item VGA2 Purchased Item EGA ATO Option Class EGAT1 Product EGA2 Product Monitor Manual Purchased Item Operating System ATO Option Class DOS Phantom Phantom Routing Steps for Laptop Computer OpSeq Option Operation Dependent Department Description Casing Cut and smooth case edges Assembly 1 Attach keyboard and cable Assembly 2 Clean processor Assembly 2 Insert processor into board Assembly 2 Test Processor Assembly 2 Enter Supplier Certification Packaging Wrap OS kit with power supply BT s e Yes The table above presents an example of how Oracle Manufacturing automatically includes Operation Sequences 25 45 and 47 in any configuration routing containing a 486 processor since the 486 processor option in the bill references step 25 45 and 47 These routing steps can also add to the standard cost for configurations with the 486 Configure to Order 5 19 Processor since Oracle Manufacturing performs a single level rollup for configurations and accounts for all costed resources used in the configuration routing The routing for your model should include all steps that any configuration might require You can then establish option class routings by referencing the model routing as a comm
213. emblies Primary Report the consolidated bill for only the pri mary assembly Specific Report the consolidated bill for the alternate assembly you specify Alternate Enter a specific alternate to report 8 12 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Revision Enter a revision for the item The consolidated bill associated with this revision is printed Date Enter a revision date and time If you entered a specific item and a revision the date defaults to the highest date of the revision The consolidated bill effective as of this date and time is printed Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the beginning and ending item numbers Category Set Enter a category set Routings associated with this category set are reported The default is the category set you defined for your functional area Categories From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending category Levels to Explode Enter the number of levels to explode the bill of material The default is derived from the value entered when bill of material parameters were defined Implemented Only Indicate whether to report only implemented or all components used by assemblies as of the effective date Display Option Choose one of the following options Reports 8 13 See Also All Report all past current and pending compo nents associated with the bill Cur
214. ems directly or have them go through intransit inventory interclass conversion The conversion formula you define between base units from the different unit classes intercompany invoice An automatically generated statement that eliminates intercompany profit This transaction may occur between organizations in the same or different legal entities intermediate ship to The delivery point for a shipment prior to an ultimate destination internal requisition See internal sales order purchase requisition internal sales order A request within your company for goods or services An internal sales order originates from an employee or from another process as a requisition such as inventory or manufacturing and becomes an internal sales order when the information is transferred from Purchasing to Order Management Also known as internal requisition or purchase requisition intransit inventory Items being shipped from one inventory organization to another While items are intransit you can view and update arrival date freight charges and so on intraoperation steps The particular phases within an operation There are five intraoperation steps in Work in Process Queue Run To Move Reject and Scrap inventory controls Parameter settings that control how Inventory functions inventory item Items you stock in inventory You control inventory for inventory items by quantity and value Typically the inventory item remains
215. endent of order quantity You can enter this factor manually for an item or compute it automatically for manufactured items The portion of manufacturing lead time that is dependent on order quantity You can en ter this factor manually for an item or com pute it automatically for manufactured items A component of total lead time that repre sents the time required to release a purchase order or create a job from the time you learn of the requirement You can manually enter preprocessing lead time for both manufac tured and purchased items A component of total lead time that repre sents the time to make a purchased item available in inventory from the time you re ceive it Manually enter postprocessing lead time for each purchased item Postprocessing lead time for manufactured items is not rec ognized The time required to procure or manufacture an item You can compute processing lead time for a manufactured item or manually assign a value Processing lead time is com puted as the time as total integer days re quired to manufacture 1 lead time lot size of an item You must manually assign a proces sing lead time for purchased items Processing lead time does not include prepro cessing and postprocessing lead times The quantity you use to calculate manufac turing lead times You can specify an item s lead time lot size to be different from the standard lot size Manufacturing Lead Times 7 3 7 4 Dynamic
216. ent User s Guide If the resource is costed indicate whether to charge jobs and repetitive schedules based on a standard rate you define Setting Up 1 27 1 28 12 13 14 15 16 17 Or disable Standard Rate to enter a rate to charge the resource in Work in Process for an internal resource or derive the rate from the purchase order for an outside processing resource For outside processing resources if you charge a job or repetitive schedule at the standard rate a purchase price variance is computed and posted to the rate variance account If you charge for all other resources if you charge a job or repetitive schedule at the actual rate a resource rate variance is computed and posted to the rate variance account If this resource is costed enter an absorption account general ledger account used to offset resource charges earned in work in process At period end you normally compare this account to the resource charges in the general ledger For outside processing resources the default is the receiving valuation account from Oracle Purchasing as defined in the receiving options Attention For outside processing resources do not change the default receiving valuation account When you receive an outside processing purchase order Oracle Purchasing credits the inventory AP accrual account and debits the receiving valuation account Bills of Material then debits the work in process outside processing a
217. ent organization and all subordinate organizations in the chosen organization hierarchy or all organizations that have the same item master organization as the current organization You have the ability to specify the organization hierarchy name because current organizations can be accessed from more than one organization hierarchy UD Attention Use the Implemented Only field to further restrict the components to display 4 Choose the Find button to open the Item Where Used window 2 34 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also The level bill of material where the inventory item appears in the using assembly is displayed starting at 1 level 2 signifies the parent of level 1 level 3 signifies the parent of level 2 and so on The Item Where Used window has three tabbed regions Item Details Bill Details and Effectivity The Item Details tabbed region displays the revision the type and the status for the component The Bill Details tabbed region displays the alternate whether the bill is an engineering bill the usage quantity of the item in the immediate parent assembly the ECO that implemented the component if it has been implemented and the operation sequence The Effectivity tabbed region displays the effective date range and whether the item is implemented See Effective Date Fields page 237 5 Usethe control buttons to expand or collapse portions of the indented item usages Using Query Find Orac
218. ent that is a configured item For ATO PTO and phantom bills where the parent item has ATP Components set to No you cannot add a component that has either the item attributes Check ATP set to Yes or ATP Components set to Yes You cannot add an optional component to a bill that is neither model or option class e You cannot add a component whose planning percent is not equal to 100 to a standard bill Bills of Material 2 47 e You cannot add a mandatory component whose planning percent is not equal to 100 and has the Forecast Control attribute set to Consume or None to a model or option class bill e When adding a component to a bill the mass change will set the Check ATP component attribute to No if the component quantity is less than or equal to 0 See Also Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 Copying Bill and Routing Information page 2 14 Referencing Common Bills and Routings page 2 17 Deleting Components and Operations page 4 6 Mass Changing Bills of Material page 2 24 2 48 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Creating a Product Family A product family is a grouping of products whose similarity in resource usage design and manufacturing process facilitates planning at an aggregate level A product family cannot be a part of a Standard Model Option Class or Planning Bill of Material Consequently a product family is a single level bill Members of a product family can belong to
219. ents or Operation Documents window Working With Attachments Oracle Applications User s Guide Attaching Files page 2 22 Attaching Files See Also You can attach text and files such as spreadsheets graphics and OLE objects to bills of material engineering change orders and routing operations For example an attached file may include comments such as a graphical representation of the bill structure or detailed instructions and schematic diagrams for routing operations To attach files m From the Bills of Material Engineering Change Orders or Routings window choose the Attachments icon Note To attach a file to a bill or ECO position the cursor in the header region To attach a file to a routing operation position the cursor in the Operations region Working With Attachments Oracle Applications User s Guide 2 22 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents page 2 22 Checking for Bill Loops Bill loops occur when a bill is assigned as a component to itself somewhere in the multilevel structure of the bill The loop check program searches for such loops The Check for Loops program can be run from the Tools menu of the Bills of Material window P Tocheck for bill loops 1 Navigate to the Bills of Material window Note The Check for Loops item on the Tools menu is only available when creating a new bill after that new bill has been saved 2
220. eport routing information only for the pri mary routing Specific Report routing information for the alternate routing you specify 8 24 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Alternate Enter a specific alternate to report Revision Enter a routing revision for the item The routing associated with this revision is printed Date Enter a revision date and time Bills of Material prints the routing effective as of this date and time Display Option Choose one of the following options All Report all past current and future operations associated with the assembly Current Report all operations effective as of the revi sion date Future and current Report all future and current operations as of the revision date Operation Detail Indicate whether you want to print operation information associated with the routing Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the beginning and ending item numbers Category Set Enter a category set Bills of Material reports routings associated with this category set The default is the category set defined for your functional area Reports 8 25 Categories From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending categories See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 26 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Standard Operation Report Report Submission
221. equence 1 will be in effect first then sequence 2 then 1 again and so on For example assume that sequence 1 is 5 on and 2 off and sequence 2 is 4 on and 3 off The calendar shows 5 on 2 off 4 on and 3 off Save your work Doing so ensures that you can view calendar dates Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Reviewing the Workday Calendar page 1 43 1 40 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Creating Shifts and Shift Times See Also P To create shifts and shift times 1 Navigate to the Shifts window You can do this by choosing the Shifts button from the Workday Calendar window 2 Enter a shift number and a description Choose the Times button to open the Shift Times window 4 Enter the start and stop times for each shift You can enter multiple start and stop times but the start and stop times for a shift cannot overlap If you create a shift without first creating a workday pattern a default workday pattern of 5 days on and 2 days off is created You can then update that workday pattern 5 Save your work Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Setting Up 1 41 Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions gt To select workday or shift exceptions 1 Navigate to the Calendar Dates window or Shift Calendar Dates window Do this by choosing the Dates button from the Workday Calendar window SSE Shift Calendar Dates sbdates s E Calendar sdf asdf asdf 313700901 JAN 2001 I
222. er Oracle product user s guides Set up Underlying Oracle Applications Technology The Wizard guides you through the entire Oracle Applications setup including system administration However if you do not use the Implementation Wizard you need to complete several other setup steps including e Performing system wide setup tasks such as configuring concurrent managers and printers Managing data security which includes setting up responsibilities to allow access to a specific set of business data and complete a specific set of transactions and assigning individual users to one or more of these responsibilities e Setting up Oracle Workflow 1 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User s Guide Oracle Applications System Administrator s Guide Oracle Workflow Guide Inventory Setup Steps Refer to the Overview of Setting Up section in the Inventory User s Guide for details of the setup steps in the table below AIW Reference Defining Items Common Applications See Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Setting Up 1 3 Setup Flowchart and Checklist Some of the steps outlined in this flowchart and setup checklist are Required and some are Optional Required Step With Defaults refers to setup functionality that comes with pre seeded default values in the database however you should review those defaults and decide whether to change them to
223. er s Guide or online documentation Use the Cost Management responsibility and See Oracle Cost Management User s Guide or online documentation B 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Character Mode Form and Menu Path GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path Item Usage Report Navigate Report WhereUsed Manufacturing Setup Reports Navigate Report Setup Organization Mass Change Bills of Material Navigate Bill MassChange Mass Change Bills of Material Navigate Bill MassChange Resource Usage Report Navigate Report WhereUsed uting Reports Item WhereUsed Report Navigator Reports gt Bills BOM Setup Reports Navigator Reports gt Setup Mass Change Bills Navigator Bills gt Mass Changes G Navigator Bills gt Mass Changes gt Changes gt Changes omponent Changes Resource Usage Report Navigator Reports gt Routings Routing Reports Navigator Reports gt Routings Reports avigate Report Routing ubstitute Components Navigate Bill Define Update Personal Profile Options Navigate Other Profile View Bill of Material Comparison Navigate Inquiry Bill Compare View Bill of Material Details Navigate Inquiry Bill Detail iew Concurrent Requests Naviagate Other Requests View Delete History Navigate Inquiry DeleteHistory View Department Navigate Inquiry Organization Department View Indented Bill of Material Navigate Inqui
224. erence designators See By Product Recovery Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Attention The planning process in Oracle Master Scheduling MRP ignores negative requirements on standard discrete jobs and components with a negative usage on a bill of material when netting supply and demand Note If you enter a negative quantity for a component you should enter either Assembly pull or Operation pull for the supply type to ensure that you transact the material when you build the bill The Revision field displays the current revision of the component as of the revision date of the parent item Open the Date Effectivity tabbed region and enter the effective date range for each component See Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Open the Unit Effectivity tabbed region and verify the following Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 10 11 12 13 The Implemented check box indicates whether the component is implemented Checked Component is on a pending Engineering Change Order ECO Unchecked Component is on implemented ECO or was added directly to the bill Open the Component Details tabbed region and enter the planning percent See Planning Percent page 2 40 Enter the yield See Yield page 2 39 Enter the Enforce Integer Requirement or select a value from the list of values Acceptable values are up down and none See Enforce Integer Requirements page 2 40 Indicate whether the compone
225. erial 2 17 Common Routings 2 18 e If components already exist for the new bill you cannot reference another bill as a common e If your new assembly is in a different organization than the bill you reference all component items must exist in the new bill s organization This also applies to substitute components The following notes apply to routings is e You cannot reference a routing outside your current organization Attention If an item s routing references another item s routing as a common you should set both items lead time lot size to the same value The lead time lot size and the routing information are used to compute lead times P To reference a common bill or routing 1 Navigate to the Common Bill window from either the Bills of Material window or the Routings window Do this by choosing Assign Common Bill from the Tools menu Enter the organization for the item to reference as a common bill Enter the bill or routing that to use as a common From the Special Menu launch the Create Common Bills concurrent program Enter the following parameters e Single Organization Organization Hierarchy All Organizations Select one of the above three options If you select Single Organization enter the organization and item names where the common bill needs to be created If you select Organization Hierarchy enter the required name of the organization hierarchy In this case the processing is done fo
226. ers ceccccteecpee pianee ng teneeee ce es 8 22 Resource Where Used Report 00 6 e cece ee 8 23 Report Submission cs cok oa ee ea eek nd et se a ER Entra E 8 23 Report Parameters eer caretiy uae EE ER ER Res 8 23 Routine Report iens Eee EN EROR Need 8 24 Report Submission sorse eat hon y nOr EEE E OEE EA 8 24 Report Parameters screserrensriennne tanien erresira 8 24 Standard Operation Report ssescsse sisarensa tin n trernas 8 27 Report Submission 0 0 6 tiine t aE EE ENA 8 27 Report Parameters 6 0 ennan E D ees 8 27 Workday Exception Sets Report eegscridenremeses iater metne 8 28 Report Submission e m e eee Re een 8 28 Oracle Configurator Concurrent Programs 8 29 Parameters scchi scien ere Ree ne e e e Ee d 8 29 Oracle Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths A 1 Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths A 2 viii Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Appendix B Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu sess B 1 Bills of Material Tools menu 000 c cece eee eee B 2 Character Mode Forms and Corresponding GUI Windows B 3 Index Glossary Contents ix x Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Preface Preface Audience for This Guide How To Use This Guide This guide contains overviews as well as task and reference information about Oracle Bills of Material This guide includes the following chapters e Cha
227. es page 1 34 Define and Build your Workday Calendar Required You define a workday calendar for one or more organizations and assign an exception set to each calendar For each workday calendar and exception set you assign a list of holidays or workday exceptions You then define shifts for your workday calendar and assign any shift workday exceptions After you define your workday calendar information you build your workday calendar with the exception set If you associate one calendar with multiple organizations you can build your workday calendar with multiple exception sets to account for workday differences across organizations De Attention If you use Oracle Master Scheduling MRP choose the calendar options 445 weekly quarter pattern or 544 weekly quarter pattern if you want to report MRP information in weeks and months Otherwise if you choose 13 period calendar or Regular calendar months you can only report MRP information in monthly buckets Context Perform this step once per installation See Also Creating a Workday Calendar page 1 36 Assign Workday Calendar to Organization Required You assign a workday calendar and exception set to each of your organizations You can share the same workday calendar across organizations with either the same or a different exception set for each organization Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Default If you skip this ste
228. es Interface in Order Management Re quired for Revenue components prevent their parent item from invoicing until they are shipped For example if you have an option class bill with a non optional component with the Required for Revenue attribute set to Yes then the option class will not invoice un til the non optional component has shipped This field does not affect mandatory or op tional components for an ATO item or config uration Bills of Material 2 45 Bill Component Validation Rules The following bill and component validation rules apply when defining copying or mass changing bills of material e Depending on the setting of the profiles that limit access to different bill types BOM Model Item Access BOM Planning Item Access BOM Standard Item Access you may not be able to modify bills e You cannot add a component with an operation sequence number that does not exist in the routing The only exception is for operation sequences that are equal to 1 e You cannot add a component to a bill where the component item is the same as the parent e You cannot add a component to a bill where the same component with the same operation sequence and effectivity already exists on the bill e Only manufacturing items can be added to manufacturing bills You cannot add a component to a bill that is being referenced as a common bill from another organization where the component does not exist in the other organiza
229. et standards send to Op 40 If job meets standards send to Op 50 Sand finish and repaint to meet standards Ship directly to customer site when finished with this operation Assign this count point to operations that you always perform in a routing but where you do not want to monitor assembly moves into out of and through the operation For example choose this count point for non bottleneck operations that are not labor or time intensive such as inspection or minor assembly operations Work in Process automatically completes the operation and charges its WIP move resources to your job or schedule when you record a move Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also transaction through or beyond the operation as with Count Point on Autocharge on count point operations Work in Process does not default the operation unlike Count Point on Autocharge on count point operations You can still record movements into out of and through the operation by overriding the default in Work in Process Count Point off Autocharge off Assign this count point to operations that you do not typically perform in a routing For example a rework operation that you only perform on occasion If you choose this count point for an operation Work in Process does not complete the operation and charge its resources to your job or schedule unless you explicitly record a move transaction into and through the operation Work in Process doe
230. ete groups that delete bills of material Routing Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete routings Bill and Routing Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete bills and routings Item Bill and Routing Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete items bills and routings Component Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete components Reports 8 15 See Also Operation Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete operations Pending Status Indicate whether to print delete groups that have entities waiting to be checked or deleted Check Ok Status Indicate whether to print delete groups that have entities that were successfully checked and are eligible to be deleted Error Status Indicate whether to print delete groups that have entities that could not be checked or deleted because of an error Deleted Status Indicate whether to print delete groups that you have successfully deleted entities from Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 16 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Department Classes Report Use the Department Classes Report to report department classes and their member departments You can use department classes to identify manufacturing cells and flexible machine centers Report Submission In the Submit Requests window select Department Classes Report in the Name field Report Para
231. ete only items bills and routings Deleting physically removes information from the database tables Deleted bill or routing information can be archived to database tables You cannot archive item level information You can then write custom programs to report on the archived data Summary information is saved for all deletion groups You can report on deletion groups Note Files or objects that are attached to bills or routings are not deleted Instead the link between the bill or routing and the attached file is severed The files themselves remain intact in their original location Several deletion constraints are installed with Bills of Material However you can define custom deletion constraints If what you are attempting to delete does not pass deletion constraints it is not deleted For example you can define a constraint that prevents you from deleting a bill of material for an assembly that has an item status of active When you delete an entire bill you delete all the components for the assembly along with their reference designators and substitute items When you delete a routing all operations are deleted For both bills and routings any links to attachments are severed Oracle Work in Process reflects any changes to the bills or routings using the delete functionality only if you re explode the bill or routing in Work in Process Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide p gt To define a deletion group 1 Naviga
232. eturned number should be 40 or the the maximum size specified in the config segment parameter which ever is greater If it is longer than forty it will be truncated to 40 Note If the System Items flexfield has been configured to use multiple segments then only the column specified in the BOM parameter Config Segment is available for customized modifications Modifications to all other segments will be ignored and these segments will be inherited from the ATO model s item flexfield Note Preconfigure the items in the mult level environment Sub models append automatically with sequence number and do not depend on the profile Defining Bills of Material Parameters page 1 13 5 28 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Match and Reserve Match and Reserve ATO Configurations enables you to check for an existing matching configuration and to reserve against it While entering an order you can search for matching active ATO configurations or pre configured items and reserve any available on hand material that is in the shipping organization If the match profile is on existing pre configured ATO items or auto created configuration items are matched and used at all levels You can check for matches from the sales order pad by choosing the Match action button You can also match and reserve using the AutoCreate Configuration batch process accessed from the Assemble To Order submenu within the BOM responsibility You can match an
233. eveloping configuration models Reports 8 29 Organization Code Model Inventory Item From Model Inventory Item To Enter or choose from the drop down list the code defined for the applicable organization Enter or choose from the drop down list the first Model Inventory Item in the range of items for which you want to transfer data Enter or choose from the drop down list the last Model Inventory Item in the range of items for which you want to transfer data Note All Model Inventory Items between and including the first and last specified are in the data transfer The range can include multiple Model Inventory Item Types For example from ATO800 to CNO500 is a valid range Refresh Configuration Models Refreshes data between the BOM schema and the Oracle Configurator schema Updates Model tree structures and associated Item Master data with new or revised BOM data in Oracle Configurator Developer Note No parameters are required to run this concurrent program Disable Import of Configuration Model Disables transfer of BOM model data to the Oracle Configurator schema for the specified Model Inventory Item Organization Code Model Inventory Item See Also Enter or choose from the drop down list the code defined for the applicable organization Enter or choose from the drop down list the Model Inventory Item for which you want to dis able data transfer to the Oracle Configurator
234. f in addition the Privilege To Maintain Cost Information function is excluded Enter or select a cost type to associate with each resource overhead rate Enter the Resource Unit Cost that is the resource s current standard cost per UOM To associate overheads with resources 1 Navigate to the Resource Overhead Associations window Do this by choosing the Overheads button from the Resources window Note You cannot view costing information if the Privilege To View Cost Information function is excluded from the responsibility You cannot update costing information if in addition the Privilege To Maintain Cost Information function is excluded Enter or select the cost type for the resource The Allow Updates check box indicates whether the cost type is defined as updatable Enter or select the overhead to associate with the resource For example you could assign resource cost as dollars per hour If you enter a new resource you can directly enter a frozen unit cost However you cannot directly update the frozen unit cost for a previously entered resource To group similar types of equipment by resource You can define Equipment Types to group similar types of resources For example you can define an Equipment Type of Forklift Setting Up 1 29 See Also Navigate to the Equipment Types window Do this by choosing the Equipment button from the Resources window You can choose the Epuipment button if the Resource
235. fferent computers different operating systems different networks and even different database management systems into a single unified computing and information resource Oracle is the world s leading supplier of software for information management and the world s second largest software company Oracle offers its database tools and applications products along with related consulting education and support services in over 145 countries around the world Thank you for using Oracle Bills of Material and this user s guide Oracle values your comments and feedback At the end of this guide is a Reader s Comment Form you can use to explain what you like or dislike about Oracle Bill of Materials or this user s guide Mail your comments to the following address or call us directly at 650 506 7000 Oracle Applications Documentation Manager Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood Shores CA 94065 U S A Or send electronic mail to mfgdoccomments_us oracle com XX Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide g vo Setting Up CHAPTER T his chapter provides information on setting up Oracle Bills of Material including Overview of Setting Up page 1 2 e Setup Steps page 1 7 e Defining Bills of Material Parameters page 1 13 e Creating Alternates page 1 15 e Creating Custom Deletion Constraints page 1 16 e Creating a Department Class page 1 18 Defining a Department
236. figuration item to the sales order such that Order Management ships the new item to fulfill the order Item attributes and sourcing rules for the configuration item are inherited from the base model items Note The functions documented here are for use in ATO environments only Steps Taken to AutoCreate Configuration Items 5 24 Create unique configuration items complete with bills of material and routings based on the model bill and routing to fulfill customer orders for manufactured configurations A cost rollup is performed for each new configuration to establish accurate standard costs that are posted to cost of goods sold Lead time rollup is performed for configuration items with discrete routing in order to calculate an accurate manufacturing lead time for the configuration Note The function documented here is for use in ATO environments only To autocreate configuration items 1 Navigate to the Submit Requests window See Submitting Requests Oracle Applications User s Guide 2 To autocreate a configuration item based on an order number enter the order number Otherwise skip the Sales Order Number field 3 If you chose not to enter an order number enter the number of release offset days for the configuration items To minimize the impact of order changes you can delay creating configuration items You can create configuration items for only those sales orders where the estimated discrete job release date i
237. figure to Order 5 5 5 6 Level Item Item Type Optional Planning Qty UNIX Manual Purchased Item 100 UNIX Diskettes Subassembly 100 Planning Bills of Material In the example below the Training Computer at level 1 is a planning item that represents a family of products whose demand you want to forecast by family The Training Computer planning bill contains three components at level 2 that are each ATO models Each component specifies a planning factor that represents the percentage of Training Computer orders that are for that model All components in the bill for a planning item must have a planning percentage Planning percentage totals can exceed 100 to over plan The following table is an example of a single level planning bill of material Single Level Bill for Training Computer Level Item Item Type Optional Planning Qty Optional components of model and option class bills can also have planning factors Notice that in the example in the table above the Laptop Computer has a planning percent of 60 and the Operating System option class has a planning percent of 90 The two options under the option class DOS and UNIX have 80 and 20 respectively If there is a forecast for 100 units of the Training Computer Oracle Master Scheduling MRP computes the forecasts for DOS and UNIX by exploding the forecast for 100 units considering each planning percent Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide DOS
238. finished good product configuration See configuration productionline The physical location where you manufacture a repetitive assembly usually associated with a routing You can build many different assemblies on the same line at the same time Also known as assembly line production rate Hourly rate of assemblies manufactured on a production line production relief The process of relieving the master production schedule when a discrete job is created This decrements the build schedule to represent an actual statement of supply profile option A set of changeable options that affect the way your applications run In general profile options can be set at one or more of the following levels site application responsibility and user project A unit of work broken down into one or more tasks for which you specify revenue and billing methods invoice formats a managing organization and project manager and bill rates schedules You can charge costs to a project as well as generate and maintain revenue invoice unbilled receivable and unearned revenue information for a project project blanket release An actual order of goods and services with a project and task reference against a blanket purchase agreement Project Drop Shipment A process of having the supplier provide the items directly to your customer for a project or task The sales order is linked to a project and task The purchase requisition is linked to the
239. for the production line TAKT Time effective resource hours available per day Average daily demand task A subdivision of project work Each project can have a set of top level tasks and a hierarchy of subtasks below each top level task See also work breakdown structure tax authority A governmental entity that collects taxes on goods and services purchased by a customer from a supplier In some countries there are many authorities e g state local and federal governments in the U S while in others there may be only one Each authority may charge a different tax rate You can define a unique tax name for each tax authority If you have only one tax authority you can define a unique tax name for each tax rate that it charges A governmental entity that collects taxes on goods and services purchased by a customer from a supplier In some countries there are many authorities e g state local and federal governments in the U S while in others there may be only one Each authority may charge a different tax rate Within Oracle Bills of Material tax authority consists of all components of your tax structure For example California San Mateo Redwood Shores for State County City Oracle Bills of Material adds together the tax rates for all of these locations to determine a customer s total tax liability order invoice tax codes Codes to which you assign sales tax or value added tax rates Oracle Receivables lets you choos
240. forecast 100 x 60 x 90 x 80 44 units UNIX forecast 100 x 60 x 90 x 20 11 units See Also Overview of Bills of Material page 2 2 Two Level Master Scheduling Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Configure to Order 5 7 Configure to Order Environments Model Bills of Material You can define model and option class bills of material that list the options your customers can choose from when they place a sales order for an assemble to order configuration To define assemble to order models whose configurations you assemble using work order flow schedules or purchase orders You must set the Assemble to Order Item Master field to Yes for the model and option class items The following table shows an example of this Item Attributes for Configure to Order Items BOM Assemble Pick Item Item Type Item Type to Order Components When you assign an option class item to a model or option class bill of material the component item option class must have the same value for the Assemble to Order Item Master field or Pick Components Item Master field as the parent item model or option class So you can only assign assemble to order option classes to assemble to order models and pick to order option classes to pick to order models You can also define hybrid model bills where you list some options that you pick and some options that you assemble using a final assembly order When you place an order your cust
241. fy the size and timing of planned order quantities for the item The planning process suggests planned order quantities that cover net requirements for the period defined by the value you enter here The planning process suggests one planned order for each period Use this attribute for example to reduce the number of planned orders the planning process would otherwise generate for a discretely planned component of a repetitively planned item fixed lead time The portion of the time required to make an assembly independent of order quantity such as time for setup or teardown Fixed Lot Size Multiplier An item attribute the planning process uses to modify the size of planned order quantities or repetitive daily rates for the item For discretely planned items when net requirements fall short of the fixed lot size multiplier quantity the planning process suggests a single order for the fixed lot size multiplier quantity When net requirements for the item exceed the fixed lot size multiplier quantity the planning process suggests a single order with an order quantity that is a multiple of the fixed lot size multiplier quantity For repetitively planned items when average daily demand for a repetitive planning period falls short of the fixed lot size multiplier quantity the planning process suggests a repetitive daily rate equal to the fixed lot size multiplier quantity When average daily demand for a repetitive planning per
242. g MRP offsets component requirement dates except it uses resource offset percentages Oracle Capacity computes resource offset days as the planned order lead time multiplied by the resource offset percentage Oracle Capacity then finds the workday that is the number of days past the work order start date to find the resource start date and time Component Requirement Dates for ATP Checks Oracle Inventory lets you check component available to promise ATP for assemble to order ATO and Pick to Order PTO items Oracle Bills of Material allows you to specify the components of an ATO or PTO product that must be promised using ATP When you check ATP for a product having such components Inventory determines the requirement date for components by first computing the manufacturing lead time for that product using the dynamic lead time calculation and then finding the date that is the number of workdays before the requested ship date Inventory assumes that all ATO product components are required at the beginning of the ATO job Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Overview of Capacity Planning Oracle Capacity User s Guide Overview of On hand and Availability Oracle Inventory User s Guide 6 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Required Lead Time Information See Also Bills of Material lets you automatically compute item bill of material and routing information required for dynamic lea
243. g processing lead time for A for the lead time lot size equals 10 The following table illustrates the component offset days and lead time percent for each component Cumulative Manufacturing Lead Time Component Cum Mfg Op Seq Lead Time Offset Days Cum Mfg Lead Time Percent Lead Time Offset Days Bills of Material calculates cumulative manufacturing lead time as follows manufacturing lead time for A Maximum cumulative manufacturing lead time offset days for component B C or D Cumulative manufacturing lead time 10 16 26 days Manufacturing Lead Times 7 15 The following table illustrates the cumulative total lead times assigned to components B C and D Cumulative Total Lead Time Component Cum Total Op Seq Lead Time Offset Days Cum Total Lead Time Percent Lead Time Offset Days Bills of Material calculates cumulative total lead time for A as follows total lead time for A Maximum cumulative total lead time offset days for component B C or D Cumulative total lead time 10 17 27 days 7 16 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Calculating Lead Times You can calculate manufacturing lead times for one item a range of items or a category of items The calculation updates the lead time attributes of all manufacturing items that you include regardless of whether you manually maintain an item s lead times Lead Times By Item Category You can limit the item
244. g Manager does not reduce order quantities on master production schedule entries A value of Past due means the planning process reduces order quantities on master production schedule entries to zero when the due date for the entry becomes past due A value of Within demand time fence means the planning process reduces order quantities on master production schedule entries to zero when the due date for the entry moves inside the demand time fence A value of Within planning time fence means the planning process reduces order quantities on master production schedule entries to zero when the due date for the entry moves inside the planning time fence reference designator An optional identifier you can assign to a component on a bill For example when the bill requires four of a component you can assign four reference designators to that component one for each usage reference document type The kind of source used to provide default information on a return such as a sales order purchase order entered on a sales order or an invoice See also reference source reference information collection element A collection element that represents an Oracle Application object such as an item lot number serial number routing supplier and customer See collection element types reference source Provides default information on a return by allowing the user to enter a unique combination of reference document type document number and line
245. g process multi department resource A resource whose capacity can be shared with other departments multi source An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer distribute the quantity of a single requisition line to several suppliers whenever the buyer wants to purchase the requisition line item from more than one supplier multiple installations Refers to installing subledger products AP AR PO OE multiple times This is no longer necessary under a Multi Org implementation multiple sets of books A General Ledger concept for having separate entities for which chart of accounts calendar or functional currency differs N National Automated Clearing House Association The NACHA is a non profit organization responsible for developing and maintaining the rules and guidelines for using the ACH network negative requirement A requirement supplied to a discrete job or repetitive schedule instead of being consumed by it Negative requirements can be created to support by products or other reusable components nervousness Characteristic exhibited by MRP systems where minor changes to plans at higher bill of material levels for example at the master production schedule level cause significant changes to plans at lower levels net change simulation Process used to make changes to supply and demand and re plan them net requirements Derived demand due to applying total supply on hand inventory scheduled receipts and safety st
246. ganization Item and Alternate columns represent Common Bill Details Configure to Order 5 17 Shared Bills of Material for Laptop Computer Organization Alternate Common Bill Common Bill Common Bill Details Details Details Organization Item Alternate Global Primary Sacramento Laptop Com Primary Computers puter Austin Primary Sacramento Laptop Com Primary puter Option Dependent Routing Steps for Discrete Manufacturing Oracle Bills of Materials lets you define routing steps for models that can be selected as options for configurations You can assign multiple routing steps to a single optional component You can specify that a routing step is option dependent which causes the configuration to include that routing step only if an option referencing that step was chosen You can assign multiple routing steps to a single optional component model bill You specify one value in the op sequence column on the main BOM form The operation you specify on the main window is used as the back flush location for the item You can assign additional operation sequence to the components by using a child window The child window is available from any optional BOM component line by button The following table presents an example of option dependent routing steps Indented Bill of Material for Laptop Computer Level Item Item Type Op Seq Optional Qty Lemos me e e 5 18 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Level Item It
247. gory you can choose You should purge all appropriate documents before purging your supplier information Glossary 59 because Purchasing does not purge suppliers that you referenced on existing documents purge status A Purchasing method of reporting the progress of a purge you initiate The Status field lets you take an action on your purge process Initiate Confirm Abort or reports on the current status of the purge Printed Deleting Completed Aborted Completed Purged push transaction A material transaction to issue component items from inventory to work in process before you manufacture the assembly Q quality action An action such as sending electronic mail or putting a job on hold triggered when an action rule is evaluated and found to be true For example if quality results values indicate that a critical measurement for a discrete job assembly is out of tolerance the job is put on hold quality data repository The database table which stores quality data quality results Actual results recorded during quality data collection These results might include test or inspection outcomes measurements taken details of defects lot attributes start and stop times for machines and resources quantity accepted The number of items you accept after inspection quantity based order An order you place receive and pay based on the quantity unit of measure and price of the goods or services that you purchase
248. h as a plant warehouse division department and so on Order Management refers to organizations as warehouses on all Order Management windows and reports organization specific level attribute An item attribute you control at the organization level original system The external system from which you are transferring data into Oracle Bills of Material tables origination The source of a forecast entry or master schedule entry When you load a forecast or master schedule the origination traces the source used to load it The source can be a forecast master schedule sales order or manual entry outlier quantity The amount of sales order left over after the maximum allowable amount outlier update percent was used to consume a forecast outlier update percent The maximum percent of the original quantity forecast that a single sales order consumes It is used to limit forecast consumption by unusually large sales orders output variable A variable whose output changes based upon the outcome of action rule processing You can use output variables in alert actions to define mail IDs display exception data and pass parameters to concurrent program request SQL script and operating system script alert actions in Oracle Quality outside operation An operation that contains outside resources and possibly internal resources as well outside processing Performing work ona discrete job or repetitive schedule using resources p
249. hat automatically charges overhead costs to a job or repetitive schedule as you perform moves or charge resources overload A condition where required capacity for a resource or production is greater than available capacity overrun percentage An item attribute the planning process uses to decide when to suggest new daily rates for the item The planning process only suggests a new daily rate for the item if the current daily rate exceeds the suggested daily rate by more than the acceptable overrun amount This attribute lets you reduce nervousness and eliminate minor rate change recommendations when it is more economical to carry excess inventory for a short time than it is to administer the rate change This attribute applies to repetitively planned items only The related attribute for discretely planned items is Acceptable Early Days See acceptable early days Glossary 49 overwrite option Option to overwrite existing orders on an MRP plan or an MPS plan during the planning process Without overwriting you can keep your existing smoothed entries as well as add new ones By overwriting you erase the existing entries and add new one according to the current demand The overwrite option in used with the append option See append option P packslip An external shipping document that accompanies a shipment itemizing in detail the contents of that shipment packing instructions Notes that print on the packslip These instructi
250. have been applied to cover gross requirements reservation A guaranteed allotment of product to a specific sales order A hold is placed on specific terms that assures that a certain quantity of an item is available on a certain date when transacted against a particular charge entity Once reserved the product cannot be allocated to another sales order or transferred in Inventory Oracle Order Management checks ATR Available to Reserve to verify an attempted reservation Also known as hard reservation reserve An action you take in Purchasing to reserve funds for a purchasing document or an action in Order Entry to allocate products for a sales order If the document passes the submission tests and if you have sufficient authority Purchasing reserves funds for the document Reserve for Encumbrance account The account you use to record your encumbrance liability You define a Reserve for Encumbrance account when you define your set of books When you create encumbrances automatically in Purchasing or Payables General Ledger automatically creates a balancing entry to your Reserve for Encumbrance account when you post your encumbrance journal entries And General Ledger overwrites the balancing segment for your Reserve for Encumbrance account so you automatically create the reserve for encumbrance journal entry to the correct company resource Anything of value except material and cash required to manufacture cost and sc
251. having the same item master organization as the current organization 5 Indicate whether to archive the deleted entities in the archive tables De Attention You can archive bill and routing information but not item information The option to archive is not available if you are deleting only items 6 Enter the item bill or routing to delete or from which to delete components or operations The Details tabbed region displays the organization the entity belongs to its type and the alternate if applicable The Effectivity tabbed region displays the effective date range See Effective Date Fields page 2 37 The Results tabbed region displays the delete status and the date of deletion if applicable 7 To delete an alternate bill or routing enter the alternate 8 If you are deleting components choose the Components button if you are deleting operations enter the Operations button 9 When finished choose either the Delete Group button or the Check Group button P To specify components to delete 1 Navigate to the Components window Do this by choosing the Components button from the Deletion Groups window 2 Entera component item to delete The Results tabbed region displays the status as Error Check OK or Deleted A status of Pending indicates the delete program has notrun yet The Effectivity tabbed region displays the effective date range of the component See Effective Date Fields page 2 37 If
252. he configuration item cost in the manufacturing organization plus any transfer charge defined in the shipping network Currency conversion is also taken into consideration if the organization uses different currencies You can invoke Oracle Configurator from within Oracle Bills of Material to create a configured bill of material and routing for a pre defined ATO item This is very useful in a business to business environment where the same configuration is ordered repeatedly Preconfigured items can be built to forecast and kept on hand Customers can order the preconfigured items directly as they would a standard ATO item You can create pre configured Multilevel and Multi organizational ATO items When you create a preconfigured ATO item if the base model BOM has child level non phantom models the configurator displays the multi level structure defined in the OM item validation organization associated with the operation unit defined in the profile option MO operating unit When you select done from the configurator screen the system automatically creates the item the BOM and the routing for all non phantom models in the structure The system generates unique names for lower level configuration items by appending a sequence to the model name If you define sourcing rules for any of the child models in the base model BOM the system assigns the sourcing rule to the configured items and creates the BOM and routing in the appropriate manufactu
253. he item and or the alternate for the bill z Find Indented Bills M1 L IP Select Current Revision e Latest Revision Alternate E Engineering Bill Levels Display Future and Current M lmplernented Only CEATA Operation Seq Item Seq a E Costs Cost Type Lead Time material Control Use Planning 95 Note If you entered an alternate the explosion process will search for all components with the same alternate label If at any level an alternate with the same label is not found the primary is used The explosion process then continues searching for the original alternate label 3 Enter the revision the revision date and the number of levels to explode for this bill See Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Bills of Material 2 29 2 30 Select a Display option All Current or Future and Current components effective as of the revision date you specify Use the Implemented Only field to further restrict the components displayed See ECO Statuses Oracle Engineering User s Guide Select a sort option for each level of the bill by operation sequence then item sequence or item sequence then operation sequence Indicate whether to see costing information and if so enter the cost type You can simulate product costs for budgeting and planning analysis purposes To do so the Privilege to View Cost security function must be enabled for the responsibility Indicate whether to vie
254. he specific services your service item includes service level Percentage of demand that can be filled immediately by available inventory It is used to determine the amount of inventory to carry as safety stock service material Material used for the repair and or maintenance of an assembled product service order An order containing service order lines Service may be for new products or for existing previously ordered products service program A billable service item Usually a service that customers purchase in addition to a product s base warranty service person An employee whose function is to provide support and service to customers Service person is also a synonym for service specialist serviceable item An inventory item that your organization supports and services either directly or through the supplier of the item regardless of who actually manufactures the item A serviceable item can be an end item both an end item and a component or part in other end items or just a component serviceable item class A category that groups serviceable items Each class must be of the type Serialized or Non Serialized You can group serialized serviceable items in a serialized serviceable item class you can group non serialized serviceable items in a non serialized serviceable item class A Glossary 71 given item may be the member of only one item class at any given time serviced customer product An entity that iden
255. hedule products Resources include Glossary 66 people tools machines labor purchased from a supplier and physical space resource authorizations Resource Authorizations address the supplier s need to have long lead time components or to invest in material processing without incurring economic hardship if requirements are reduced resource basis The basis for resource usage quantity that indicates whether that quantity is required per item or per lot resource charge See resource transaction resource group Resources grouped together according to user defined criteria to facilitate bill of resource generation and capacity planning resource offset percent An operation resource field that represents as a percent of the processing lead time for an item the item when a resource is required on a routing For example if the processing lead time for an item is 10 days and the resource is required on the fourth day then the resource offset percent is 30 Capacity uses resource Offset percent to calculate setback days during the bill of resource load process resource requirement A resource and quantity needed to build an assembly on a job or repetitive schedule Discrete job and repetitive schedule resource requirements are created based on the resource requirements specified on the assembly s routing Resource transactions fulfill resource requirements resource roll up Rolls up all required resources for a end assembl
256. hout the express written permission of Oracle Corporation If the Programs are delivered to the US Government or anyone licensing or using the Programs on behalf of the US Government the following notice is applicable RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement Otherwise Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe back up redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and Oracle disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs Oracle is a registered trademark and Oracle8i Oracle9i Oracle Discoverer PL SQL SOL Net and SQL Plus are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation Other names may be trademarks
257. ial contains a list of items and planning percentages planning manager A process that performs once a day and period maintenance tasks These tasks include forecast consumption master schedule relief forecast and master schedule loads and other miscellaneous data cleanup activities planning percent A component usage percentage that facilitates planning for optional components on model and option class bills and all components on planning bills planning process The set of processes that calculates net material and resource requirements for an item by applying on hand inventory quantities and scheduled receipts to gross requirements for the item The planning process is often referred to as the MPS planning process when planning MPS planned items only and the MRP planning process when planning both MPS and MRP planned items at the same time Maintain repetitive planning periods is another optional phase in the planning process planning schedule Used to communicate long range forecast and material release information to suppliers Planning Time Fence A Master Scheduling MRP item attribute used to determine a future point in time inside which there are certain restrictions on the planning recommendations the planning process can make for the item For discretely planned items the planning process cannot suggest new planned orders for the item or suggest rescheduling existing orders for the item to an earlier date
258. ide Flow Manufacturing See Also Note When your model s routings has no option dependent routing steps or has a minimum amount of time spent at option dependent steps you can choose not to calculate lead times for each configuration item Oracle Manufacturing automatically assigns the model item s lead time information to the new configuration item when you do not specify to calculate lead times for the configuration item Configuration items with flow manufacturing routings inherit the lead times from the model item master in the appropriate manufacturing organization Flow manufacturing environments do not calculate lead time However Total Product Cycle Time is an optional calculation during the AutoCreate Configuration Item process Overview of Lead Time Management page 7 2 Item Numbering Methods You can choose from four methods to automatically assign item numbers to configuration items e Replace model item number with a sequence number e Replace model item number with the order number line number Note When using the order number line number option in a multi level environment the top level model item will be replaced with the order number line number Sub level models will be replaced with the number line number sequence number to differentiate them from the top level configuration e Append a sequence to the model number User defined Configuration Item numbering For each method you can specify whi
259. ied shift are copied Note If you copy calendar information to an existing calendar all new information is appended to the existing calendar existing information in other words is retained gt To copy a calendar or shifts 1 Navigate to the Copy window Do this by choosing Copy from the Tools menu If you are copying calendar information enter the calendar to copy information from and indicate if you want none all or specific shift information If you select a specific shift enter the shift number If you are copying shift information enter the calendar you want to copy the shift information from and the specific shift number Overview of Workday Calendar page 1 31 Setting Up 1 39 Creating a Workday Pattern P Tocreate a workday pattern 1 See Also Navigate to the Workday Patterns or Shift Workday Patterns window You can do this by choosing the Workday Pattern button from either the Workday Calendar or Shifts window Enter a sequence number in which the workday patterns are applied when the calendar is built Enter the number for consecutive workdays on and off For example if you want Monday through Friday on and Saturday and Sunday off enter 5 for Days On and 2 for Days Off Enter a description for the sequence Repeat the previous three steps for each workday pattern to create All defined sequences are repeated for the duration of the workday calendar If there are two sequences s
260. ify multiple resources and usage rates For each resource you can specify whether to schedule it and whether it overlaps the prior or next operation If you specify that a resource overlaps the prior operation Oracle Work in Process schedules the resource so that the last resource on the prior operation ends at the same time as this resource Conversely if you specify a resource that overlaps the next operation Work in Process schedules the resource so that the first resource on the next operation begins at the same time as this resource Resources can be defined as simultaneous or alternates with other resources independent of an assembly s routing Two or more resources can be scheduled to be working concurrently within the same job operation For example a drilling machine and machinist must be scheduled at the same time Each operation contains a scheduled sequence of resources You can define the sequence in which resources are consumed See Creating a Routing page 3 10 You can create a different resource or group of resources that can be used to substitute the primary resource or group of resources within a job operation For Routings 3 7 3 8 example if unskilled labor is unavailable to perform a task it can be substituted with skilled labor The scheduling system will schedule the skilled labor if the unskilled labor is fully committed This is referred to as alternative scheduling Work in Process schedules assuming th
261. iles as well as running and reviewing reports and concurrent processes You can access this user s guide online by choosing Getting Started with Oracle Applications from any Oracle Applications help file User Guides Related to This Product Oracle Applications Demonstration User s Guide This guide documents the functional storyline and product flows for Vision Enterprises a fictional manufacturer of personal computers products and services As well as including product overviews the book contains detailed discussions and examples across each of the major product flows Tables illustrations and charts summarize key flows and data elements xiv Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Oracle Configurator User s Guide Oracle Engineering User s Guide This guide enables your engineers to utilize the features of Oracle Engineering to quickly introduce and manage new designs into production Specifically this guide details how to quickly and accurately define the resources materials and processes necessary to implement changes in product design Oracle Financials Regional User s Guide This manual describes functionality developed to meet specific legal and business requirements that are common to several countries in a given region Consult this user s guide along with your country specific user s guide and your financial product s manual to effectively use Oracle Financials in your country Oracle Flow Manufa
262. ills A 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Window Name Navigation Path Calculate Lead Times page 7 17 Routings gt Lead Times Calendar Dates page 1 43 Setup Calendars Dates or Setup Calendars Shifts Dates Change Types See ENG Setup Change Types Component Changes page 2 24 Bills Mass Changes Changes Delete Range page 2 20 Bills gt Bills gt Designators gt Delete Range Deletion Constraints page 1 16 Setup gt Delete Constraints Deletion Groups page 4 2 Delete Groups Department Classes page 1 18 Setup gt Department Classes Departments page 1 19 Routings Departments Descriptive Elements page 2 19 Bills gt Bills gt Elements Exceptions page 1 42 Setup Calendars Dates Exceptions Exception Templates page 1 34 Setup Exception Templates Import Bills and Routings page Bills Import or Routings Import 1 45 Indented Bill of Material page Bills Indented Bills 2 29 eference Designators page 2 20 Bills gt Bills gt Designators Resource Groups See CAP Setup gt Resource Groups Resource WhereUsed page 3 25 Routings gt Resource WhereUsed Routing Details page 3 10 Routings Routings Routing Details Routing Documents page 2 22 Routings Documents Oracle Bills of Material Windows and Navigator Paths A 3 Window Name Routing Revisions pag
263. ine either a primary or an alternate routing If you are a Flow Manufacturing customer you can also create a Flow Routing IZ Attention You cannot create routings for planning or pick to order items Note Use attachments such as detailed operation instructions for routing operations See Attaching Files page 2 22 Prerequisites Q You must define at least one department before you can create a routing Q BOM Allowed must be set to Yes for the item you are creating a routing for You can create a routing manually copy an existing routing or reference a common routing See Copying Bills and Routings page 2 14 See Referencing Common Bills and Routings page 2 18 The procedure below describes how to manually create a routing 3 10 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide gt To create a routing 1 Navigate to the Routings window FE Routings M1 LAX M TT Alternate Capable To Promise Revision A Beye 30 MAY 2002 Bae Future and Current bi Zlimplemented Only Operations Referenced Seg Code F BUE Effective Disabled wio Note If your current responsibility does not include the Privilege to Maintain security function you can only view routing information If so enter selection criteria in the Find Routings window and choose the Find button The Routings Summary folder window appears 2 Enter a manufacturing item to create a routing for
264. ing lead time based upon a repetitive assembly s routing Work in Process lets you specify the production line where you build each assembly and the line speed determines the production run rate to schedule that assembly on that line If you have a fixed speed line all assemblies should use the same line speed For variable speed lines you need to specify different speeds for each assembly The line speed for any particular assembly cannot exceed the line s maximum rate Defining Production Lines Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Overview of Lead Time Management page 7 2 6 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting See Also Dynamic lead time offsetting is based on order quantity lead times and the workday calendar It is a faster scheduling method that quickly estimates the start date of an order an operation or a resource Dynamic lead time offsetting always computes a date that is a particular number of days from a specified date in the workday calendar It accounts for changes in lead time based on order quantity using the fixed and variable components of manufacturing lead time as well as operation and resource offsets Overview of Lead Time Management page 7 2 Uses of Dynamic Lead Time Offsetting Oracle Manufacturing functions whose processing performance is most critical use dynamic lead time offsetting while other functions that schedule exact operation and resou
265. ing with the same alternate label components are assigned to operations on the primary routing 3 Enter or select the revision and the revision date Bills of Material 2 11 2 12 If you are updating or viewing a bill use the Display poplist to display all current or future and current components effective as of the revision date you specify Check the Implemented Only field to further restrict the components to display See ECO Statuses Oracle Engineering User s Guide The Bills of Material window contains the following tabbed regions Main Effectivity Component Details Material Control Order Entry Shipping and Comments Enter the item sequence operation sequence and the component item See Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 In the Main tabbed region enter the quantity used to make one unit of this assembly item at the current operation This can include negative or decimal values subject to the following rules e l ick to order bills cannot have fractional component quantities if Oracle Order Management is installed e Plick to order option class components cannot have negative values e Components with Check ATP turned on cannot have negative or zero quantities e Ifthe component has Quantity Related turned on then the component quantity cannot be fractional or negative e f an implemented component has Quantity Related turned on then the component quantity must be equal to the number of ref
266. ings that use a particular resource p gt To view resource usage 1 Navigate to the Resource WhereUsed window E Resource VhereUsed M1 PUE EUTSUTNSEEEEUS MAR 2001 Usages Operation Details peration Seq Effective ltem Alternate a ERR ER ERR ERI BC 2 Enter the name of the resource for which to view the operation and routing usage 3 Enter an effective date Operation information effective on this date is displayed The Resource WhereUsed window contains four tabbed regions Operation Details Resource Details Descriptions and More The Operation Details tabbed region displays the operation sequence department the effective date range and the routing in which the resource is used Routings 3 25 The Resource Details tabbed region displays the resource the basis type the usage rate or amount and its inverse and the number of resource units assigned The More tabbed region displays the resource sequence the activity for the resource the scheduling type Yes No Prior Next and whether this is an engineering routing See Also Assigning Operation Resources page 3 18 Resource Where Used Report page 8 23 3 26 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Routings Field Reference This section describes the use of certain major fields Completion Subinventory and Locator Fields See Also In a routing you can define the completion subinvento
267. inimum and maximum inventory levels minimum firm rate The aggregate schedule that is partially firm since only some of the detail schedules are firm within a particular time frame Minimum Order Quantity An item attribute the planning process uses to modify the size of planned order quantities or repetitive daily rates for the item For discretely planned items when net requirements fall short of the minimum order quantity the planning process suggests the minimum order quantity For repetitively planned items when average daily demand for a repetitive planning period falls short of the minimum order quantity the planning process suggests the minimum order quantity as the repetitive daily rate Use this attribute for example to define an order quantity below which it is not profitable to build the item minimum rate The minimum number of completed assemblies a production line can produce per hour mobile devices Oracle Mobile Supply Chain Applications uses equipment with the ability to communicate to an application server by the Internet or local area networks This equipment includes hand held Radio Frequency RF devices wearable computing and ring scanner systems lift truck mounted RF computers and personal digital assistants PDA mobile manufacturing A component of Oracle Mobile Supply Chain Applications enabling you to perform all work in process material transactions using a mobile client device networked with a
268. intervention hit miss tolerance A limit you define for the difference between the on hand quantity and the actual cycle count quantity You express positive and negative hit miss tolerances as percentages of the on hand quantity hold A feature that prevents an order or order line from progressing through the order cycle You can place a hold on any order or order line hold parameter A criterion you use to place a hold on an order or order line Valid hold parameters are customer customer site order and item hold source An instruction for Order Entry to place a hold on all orders or lines that meet criteria you specify Create a hold source when you want to put all current and future orders for a particular customer or for a particular item on automatic hold Order Entry gives you the power to release holds for specific orders or order lines while still maintaining the hold source Oracle Order Entry holds all new and existing orders for the customer or item in your hold source until you remove the hold source hold type Indicates the kind of hold you place on an order or order line Glossary 33 implement To make an ECO active so that no further changes can be made to that ECO Usually the day you implement an ECO is also the effective date for component changes After that date you must make further changes through a new ECO or directly to the bill implementation date The date a component becomes part of a bill of
269. ints 6 Indicate whether to delete if there are rows found or no rows found by the SQL Select Statement Setting Up 1 17 7 Enter a failure message from Oracle Application Object Library s message dictionary to display if the delete fails See Also Deletion Constraints page 4 8 Creating a Department Class Use department classes to group departments for shop floor scheduling and control and to identify manufacturing cells and flexible machine centers Department classes are used for reporting purposes P To create a department class 1 Navigate to the Department Classes window s Department Classes M1 Departments 1 18 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 2 Enter text that uniquely describes the department class For example you could use ASSY to group all final assembly departments 3 Choose the Departments button to display the departments assigned to this department class and the dates when these departments can no longer be assigned to routing operations Note Assign departments to classes when you define departments See Also Defining a Department page 1 19 Department Classes Report page 8 17 Defining a Department A department is an area within your organization that consists of one or more people machines or suppliers where you want to collect costs apply overhead and compare load to capacity You assign a department to each operation in a routing and assign res
270. inue collections activities for inactive customers cutoff date An indication of the last date to be included in a plan or horizon cycle action A cycle action is a discrete event that can occur one or more times during the life of an order Actions can occur at the order level where all lines on the order are processed together such as credit or legal reviews Actions can also occur at the line level where each line can be processed independently such as shipping confirmation or backordering Oracle Order Entry uses actions to identify each step in your order cycle See also action result order cycle Glossary 20 cycle counting An inventory accuracy analysis technique where inventory is counted on a cyclic schedule rather than once a year D daily line capacity The daily production rate of assemblies on a production line This is equal to the line speed in hours times the line production hours daily quantity See daily rate daily rate The number of completed assemblies a repetitive schedule plans to produce per day Also known as production rate See repetitive rate data group Specifies an ORACLE ID user and determines to which schema a responsibility s forms connect database diagram A graphic representation of application tables and the relationships among them database view Provides access to an underlying database table You do not need to know how the data is stored to use a database view There a
271. iod exceeds the fixed lot size multiplier quantity the planning process suggests a repetitive daily rate that is a multiple of the fixed lot size multiplier quantity fixed order quantity An item attribute the planning process uses to modify the size of planned order quantities or repetitive daily rates for the item When net requirements fall short of the fixed order quantity the planning process suggests the fixed order quantity When net requirements for the item exceed the fixed order quantity the planning process suggests multiple orders for the fixed order quantity For discretely planned items use this attribute to define a fixed production or purchasing quantity for the item For repetitively planned items use this attribute to define a fixed production rate for the item For example if your suppliers can only supply the item in full truckload quantities enter the full truckload quantity as the fixed order quantity for the item fixed price discount A discount that fixes the final selling price of the item so it is not affected by changes to the list price of the item It is a method of implementing discounts to the list price where the final price is contractually fixed regardless of changes to the list price as is the case with GSA prices For example if Item A has a list price of 100 a fixed price discount specifying a selling price of 90 results in a selling price of 90 even if the list price later increases to
272. ion Code list of values You can define a new standard operation by selecting Standard Operations from the Tools menu If you use a standard operation code the operation information for that code will be copied into the operation you are currently defining You can then update that information as desired See Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 Attention You can assign the same standard operation to more than one operation sequence within the same routing The Routings window has five tabbed regions Main WIP Operation Yield ECO and Description Enter the department in which the operation is performed Enter an effective date range See Effective Date Fields page 2 37 For operations in ATO model or option class routings only indicate whether the operation is option dependant that is whether the operation is dependant on the choice of an optional component All mandatory components and their related operations appear on Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 12 13 14 15 the routing for each configuration The default is enabled See Overview of Configure to Order page 5 2 Optionally enter the item s manufacturing lead time percent required to complete all previous operations on the routing See Calculating Manufacturing Lead Times page 7 17 If the manufacturing lead time equals 10 days and all previous operations combined require 2 days the lead time percent is 20 Open the WIP
273. ion Wizard to coordinate your setup activities This guide describes how to use the wizard Oracle Applications Developer s Guide This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle Applications development staff It describes the Oracle Application Object Library constituents needed to implement the Oracle Applications user interface described in the Oracle Applications User Interface Standards It also provides information to help you build your custom Developer 2000 forms so that they integrate with Oracle Applications Oracle Applications Flexfields Guide This guide provides flexfields planning setup and reference information for the Oracle Bills of Material implementation team as well as for users responsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle Applications product data This manual also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data Oracle Applications Installation Manual for Windows Clients This guide provides information you need to successfully install Oracle Financials Oracle Public Sector Financials Oracle Manufacturing or Oracle Human Resources in your specific hardware and operating system software environment Oracle Applications Product Update Notes If you are upgrading your Oracle Applications refer to the product update notes appropriate to your update and product s to see summaries of new features as well as changes to database objects profile options and seed d
274. ion values into the text of the message detailed scheduling A method of scheduling production that considers minute to minute resource availability information as well as exact resource requirements from routings direct receipt The receipt of an item directly to its final destination either directly to the person who requested the item or directly to the final inventory location It differs from a standard receipt in that it is received into a receiving location and delivered in one transaction rather than received and delivered in two separate transactions disable date A date when an Oracle Manufacturing function is no longer available for use For example this could be the date on which a bill of material component or routing operation is no longer active or the date a forecast or master schedule is no longer valid discount A reduction of the list price of an item In Oracle Order Entry you can associate discounts with price lists and apply them either automatically or manually to an order or order line See also best discount earned discounts fixed price discount price adjustment discrete job A production order for the manufacture of a specific discrete quantity of an assembly using specific materials and resources in a limited time A discrete job collects the costs of production and allows you to report those costs including variances by job Also known as work order or assembly order discrete manufac
275. ionship between the product family item and the product family category is established by the equality of their concatenated key flexfield segment values The category has the same name as the product family item Consequently product family item categories have the same flexfield structure as the System Items Bills of Material 2 49 See Also Flexfield A new structure called Product Family has been defined for the Item Categories Flexfield Each product family member item and the product family item itself are assigned to the corresponding category within the Product Family category set The assignment is removed when an item is no longer a member of a product family Assigning Product Family Members page 2 50 Setting Planning Percentages for Product Family Members page 2 51 Assigning Product Family Members Prerequisites a To create a product family you must first define all of the family members as items and the product family item See Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide and Defining Product Families page 2 49 To assign product family members 1 Navigate to the Product Family window Note If you are using Oracle Flow Manufacturing you can select Product Family Members from the Flow Manufacturing menu Select a product family item Select item members of the product family The description type forecast control and planning method for the member items are displayed for the items
276. is a Machine type Enter an Item Number in the Equipment field Save your work Note If you have Warehouse Management installed you can use the Resources form to define a class of manual or machine resources For example a forklift machine resource is indicated by entering the resource name and description as well as which equipment items are capable of performing pallet picking See Set Up Equipment Resources Oracle Warehouse Management User s Guide gt To group employees by resource You can define the roles which represent what an employee can do for a required task For example a role could be defined as Cycle Counter or a Case Picker Navigate to the Employees window Do this by choosing the Employees button from the Resources window You can choose the Employees button if the Resource is a Person type Enter an Employee to associate with the resource Save your work Note If you have Warehouse Management installed you can use the Resources form to define employees qualified for each resource For example a hazardous materials manual resource is indicated by entering the resource name and description as well as which employees are capable of performing hazardous material tasks See Set Up Warehouse Employee Resources Oracle Warehouse Management User s Guide Defining a Department page 1 19 Defining a Cost Type Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Setting Up Inventory Standard Costing Oracle Cost Manageme
277. ith the Ship Model Complete item attribute set to Yes This indicates that the entire configuration must be delivered in the same shipment If the item attribute is set to No components can ship separately ATO items and configurations are inherently Ship Together models See also ship set ship via See freight carrier shipment An individual package sent to a customer Thus a shipment might contain an entire order if all items in that order are pick released and packed together A shipment might contain just part of an order that is pick released and packed A shipment might also contain only part of a released order line where some of the items on the picking slip are not in stock shipment priority A term that indicates the urgency with which an order should be shipped to the customer shipment release An actual order of goods and services against a planned purchase order The planned purchase order determines the characteristics of the items on the order The planned purchase order also has the expected quantities prices and ship to locations and delivery dates for the items on the order You identify a shipment release by the combination of the planned purchase order number and the release number Each planned purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute the quantity of each shipment across multiple accounts shipment relief The process of relieving the master demand schedule when a sales orde
278. ities and production rates repetitive schedule allocation The process of dividing suggested aggregate repetitive schedules and allocating them across individual production lines based on predefined line priorities and production rates repetitive schedule status An Oracle Manufacturing function that lets you describe various stages in the life cycle of a repetitive schedule and control activities that you can perform on the schedule replacement order A sales order created to replace goods being returned by a customer replenish to order See assemble to order ATO report An organized display of Oracle Applications information A report can be viewed on line or sent to a printer The content of information in a report can range from a summary to a complete listing of values report headings General information about the contents of the report report options Options for sorting formatting selecting and summarizing the information in the report This section describes the options available for each report requisition template A feature that lets you define a list of commonly purchased items from which a requestor can create a requisition You can define the list of items by referencing an existing purchase order Requestors use the requisition template to create simple pre sourced requisitions request date The date the customer requests the products be either shipped or received requested due date The job du
279. l you can share model and option class bills of material between organizations You define the model and option class bills in the primary manufacturing organization that owns each bill creating common bills in your item validation organization and other manufacturing organizations to reference the bill in the primary manufacturing organization For example you can enter orders for the Laptop Computer in your item master organization Global Computers and build the Laptop Computer in two other organizations Sacramento and Austin And all engineering changes to the Laptop Computer and its components originate from the Sacramento organization You define the Laptop Computer model item in your item master organization Global Computers and assign the item to the Sacramento and Austin organizations Then you can define the Laptop Computer s model bill of material in the Sacramento organization creating common bills of material in the Global Computers and Austin organizations Each common bill references the model bill in the Sacramento organization For each component that has its own bill of material option class and standard items you define the component s bill in the Sacramento organization and create common bills in the Global Computers and Austin organizations where each common bill references a bill in the Sacramento organization The following table presents an example of a bill of material shared between organizations The Or
280. l An assembly that uses the bill of material of another assembly as its bill This enables you to reduce your maintenance effort by sharing the same bill structure among two or more assemblies For example if you have identical bills of material that produce the same product in two different organizations you can define common bills of material for the identical structures Glossary 13 common inventory Items residing in inventory or work in process that are not identified to any project common job A standard or non standard discrete job without a project reference common locator A locator without a project or project and task reference See also project locator common locator A locator flexfield without project or task segment values A common locator represents a physical location common routing A routing that uses the routing of another assembly as its routing This enables you to reduce your maintenance effort by sharing the same routing and operations for two or more assemblies common subinventory Subinventory that does not have a project reference into which items can be delivered and out of which items can be issued and transferred completed assembly An assembly you built on a discrete job or repetitive schedule and received into inventory completed job A discrete job whose quantity planned equals the number of assemblies actually completed completed schedule A repetitive schedule whose number of asse
281. le of products or services Salespeople are associated with orders returns invoices commitments and customers You can also assign sales credits to your salespeople schedule date The date for a master schedule entry for an item A schedule for an item has a schedule date and an associated quantity For Order Management it is considered the date the order line should be ready to ship the date communicated from Order Management to Inventory as the required date any time you reserve or place demand for an order line schedule end date For repetitive items defines the end of the repetitive rate for a master schedule schedule entry A schedule for an inventory item For discrete items stated by a date and quantity For repetitive items stated by a date schedule end date and quantity schedule group An identifier used to group jobs for scheduling and releasing purposes For example you might group together all jobs that must be completed on a specific date and are being built on the same production line Jobs within a schedule Glossary 70 group can be sequenced See also build sequence schedule smoothing The manual process of entering quantities and dates on the master production schedule that represent a level production policy scheduled receipt A discrete job repetitive schedule non standard job purchase requisition or purchase order It is treated as part of available supply during the netting process Sched
282. le Applications User s Guide Using Query Operators Oracle Applications User s Guide Searching For Information Oracle Applications User s Guide Performing Query by Example and Query Count Oracle Applications User s Guide Viewing An Indented Bill of Material page 2 29 Item Where Used Report page 8 19 Consolidated Bill of Material Report page 8 12 Creating Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals Bills of Material 2 35 Bills of Material Field Reference This section describes the use of certain major fields Item and Operation Sequence Fields 2 36 Item Sequence Field The item sequence indicates the sequence of the item on the bill It is used to sort components on reports and when choosing options from a model bill in Oracle Order Management This defaults to the value of the highest existing component item sequence plus the value of the BOM Component Item Sequence Increment profile option If this profile option is not set the default is 10 You can override or change this number Operation Sequence Field Every routing carries operations You can use the Routings form to assign operations to routings Each operation must have a sequence number called the Operation Sequence Number On a bill the operation sequence indicates the order in which you perform operations on a routing You can have the system automatically generate Operation Sequence Numbers using a user defined incremen
283. le Work in Process automatically explodes through the requirement for DOS to its components DOS Diskettes and DOS Manual since the DOS option is a phantom item DOS Diskettes is a subassembly so it also has a standard bill of material although it is not shown below The following table presents a model bill of material with a standard bill of material underneath it Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Model Bill of Material with Standard Bill Underneath Supply Level Item Item Type Optional Type Qty 2 Laptop Computer ATO Model Operating System ATO Option Class 3 24 E Pull u Option Quantity Ranges For each option you can specify a quantity range that limits the quantity of the option you can order during Order Management In the example below you can order only one CPU and Operating System but you can order up to 10 VGA1 or VGA2 monitors and up to 20 EGAT or EGA2 monitors The following table presents an example option quantity range for a laptop computer Configure to Order 5 13 Option Quantity Ranges for Laptop Computer Min Level Item Item Type Optional Qty es 1 es 1 es 1 MEC o n a Yi Peripherals Guide Purchased Item N Diskettes Purchased Item 1 Laptop Computer ATO Model n a CPU ATO Option Class 386 Processor Purchased Item 486 Processor Purchased Item Monitor ATO Option Class VGA ATO Option Class Purchased Item
284. line for an item that your company purchases in component parts exploder The first of the three processes that comprise the planning process under the standard planning engine The exploder explodes through all bills of material and calculates a low level code for each item The low level codes are used by the planner to ensure that net requirements for a component are not calculated until all gross requirements from parent items have first been calculated The exploder runs before the snapshot and planner Under the memory based planning engine the memory based snapshot performs exploder functions express delivery An option that lets you deliver the entire quantity of a receipt Glossary 27 without entering quantities for each shipment or distribution express receipt A site option that lets you receive an entire purchase order or blanket purchase agreement release with one keystroke express requisitions To create requisitions quickly from predefined requisition templates You only need to provide an accounting flexfield and quantities to create a requisition for commonly purchased items F FIFO first in first out costing method A cost flow methodused for inventory valuation Inventory balances and values are updated perpetually after each transaction is sequentially costed It assumes that the earliest inventory units received or produced are the first units used or shipped The ending inventory therefore consis
285. ll To Ship To and Statements but you can enter additional responsibilities container The receptacle box tank etc in which items to be shipped are placed context element A collection element associated with a quality collection transaction Values for context elements are automatically transferred to Oracle Quality as their parent collection transaction are entered context field prompt A question or prompt to which a user enters a response called a context field value When Oracle Applications displays a descriptive flexfield pop up window it displays your context field prompt after it displays any global segments you have defined Each descriptive flexfield can have up to one context prompt context field value A response to your context field prompt Your response is composed of a series of characters and a description The response and description together provide a unique value for your context prompt such as 1500 Journal Batch ID or 2000 Budget Formula Batch ID The context field value Glossary 16 determines which additional descriptive flexfield segments appear context response See context field value context segment value A response to your context sensitive segment The response is composed of a series of characters and a description The response and description together provide a unique value for your context sensitive segment such as Redwood Shores Oracle Corporation Headquarters or
286. lls Any bill of material type can have an alternate Oracle Master Scheduling MRP uses the primary bill to plan your material Oracle Order Management uses the primary bill for model and option class products to list available options When you build an item roll up costs and perform other functions that use bills of material you can specify whether to use the primary bill the default or an alternate bill You can also use engineering change orders to control changes to primary and alternate bills of material Use alternate bills to account for manufacturing variations that produce the same assembly by specifying the parent item number and an alternate name when you create a bill You cannot enter new revisions for alternate bills of material You can use an alternate to define an engineering bill or routing The alternate used as a prototype variation from the primary manufacturing bill that produces essentially the same assembly Bills and routings can share alternate labels If you create an alternate bill with the same label as an alternate routing components are assigned to operations on the alternate routing If there is no routing with the same alternate label components are assigned to operations on the primary routing Creating Alternates page 1 15 Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 Engineering Bills of Material and Routings Oracle Engineering User s Guide Bills of Material 2 5 Item and Routing Revisio
287. lls of Material lets you decide whether to allow unearned discounts If you allow unearned discounts Oracle Bills of Material lets you give a customer the unearned discount if the customer pays after the discount date or after the discount grace day period Oracle Bills of Material defaults the discount taken to zero if the discount is unearned If the discount is earned Oracle Bills of Material defaults discount taken to the amount of the earned discount Oracle Bills of Material lets you override the discount taken amount during payment entry and warns you if you are taking an unearned discount EDI See Electronic Data Interchange EDI EDIFACT Electronic Data Interchange for Administration Commerce and Trade is the current acronym for standards developed within Working Party 4 See also WP4 effective date Date when an Oracle Manufacturing function is available for use For example this could be the date a bill of material component or routing operation becomes effective or the date you anticipate revised item changes become part of a bill of material and can no longer be controlled by an ECO efficiency A productivity measure that focuses on actual performance against a standard Expressed in a percentage figure it is calculated by dividing actual resource time charged to a task by the standard resource requirements for the same task efficiency variance A quantity variance defined as the difference between the amount of
288. lt type In Oracle Workflow the name of the lookup type that contains an activity s possible result values See also result code result value result value In Oracle Workflow the value returned by a completed activity such as Approved See also result code result type return In Purchasing an AutoCreate option that lets a buyer return a requisition line and all other unpurchased requisition lines on the same requisition to the requisition preparer In Order Entry it is the opposite of a sales order It involves receipt of goods previously sold to a customer credit to a customer and possibly replacement with an identical or similar product return material authorization RMA Permission for a customer to return items Receivables allows you to authorize the return of your sales orders as well as sales made by other dealers or suppliers as long as the items are part of your item master and price list Return of Material Goods RMG See Return Material Authorization return reason Justification for a return of product Many companies have standard reasons that are assigned to returns to be used to analyze the quantity and types of returns See also credit memo reasons return to supplier A transaction that allows you to return to the supplier items from a fully or partially received purchase order and receive credit for them revenue recognition The schedule for which revenue for a particular transaction is recorded in
289. lude Addition Adjustment Transfer and Retirement An accounting control feature that determines how Cash Management matches and accounts for transactions Cash Management transaction types include Miscellaneous Receipt Miscellaneous Payment Non Sufficient Funds NSF Payment Receipt Rejected and Stopped transaction worker An independent concurrent process launched by a transaction manager to validate and process your manufacturing transactions transition In Oracle Workflow the relationship that defines the completion of one activity and the activation of another activity within a process In a process diagram the arrow drawn between two activities represents a transition See also activity Workflow Engine traveler See route sheet triangulation A triangle that is created when three partners are involved in a drop shipment transaction two level master scheduling A technique that facilitates the forecast explosion of product groupings into related master production schedules The top level MPS is usually defined for a product line family or end product while the second level is defined for key options and components two way matching Purchasing performs two way matching to verify that purchase order and invoice information match within tolerance U ultimate ship to location The final destination of a shipment UN number An identifier for a hazardous material Each Identification number has a description
290. ly implemented or all components used by assemblies as of the effective date Display Option Choose one of the following options All Report all past current and pending compo nents associated with the bill This option is only available if Levels to Implode is set to 1 Current Report all components effective as of the revi sion date Future and current Report all future and current components as of the revision date This option is only avail able if Levels to Implode is set to 1 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Date Enter a revision date and time Bills of Material uses the bill of material information associated with this date when determining item usage See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Creating Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals Reports 8 21 Resource Report Report Submission Report Parameters See Also Use the Resource Report to report resource cost and overhead information In the Submit Requests window select Resource Report in the Name field Resource Detail Indicate whether to print resource cost and overhead information for the resource Resources From To To restrict the report to a range of resources select the beginning and ending resources Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 22 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Resource Where Used Report Report Submission
291. m Oracle Engineering is displayed If the routing was transferred from Engineering the ECO text is displayed See Also Item and Routing Revisions page 2 6 Transferring or Copying Engineering Items Bills and Routings Oracle Engineering User s Guide Routings 3 17 Assigning Operation Resources gt To assign a resource to a routing operation 1 Navigate to the Operation Resources window You can do this by choosing the Resources button from the Routings window Es Operation Resources VSM 10 Sequence 10 uH BEES 13 JUN 2002 Resources Rate or Amount Saisie Alternates 2 Enter the sequence number of the resource and the resource name You can use any resource assigned to the department Valid values for sequence range from 1 to 9999 and must be unique for the operation 3 Select a basis type by which to charge and schedule the resource The default is the basis specified for the resource Item Charge and schedule the resource by multiplying the usage rate by the job or schedule quantity for the assembly Select Item when your charges fluctuate with quantity change Lot Charge and schedule the resource by charging the usage rate or amount once per job or schedule Select Lot when your resource 3 18 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide 10 usage quantity is the amount required per job or schedule for example setup charges Enter a value for the Rate or
292. mbering method you select Setting Up 1 13 1 14 Append Sequence Appends a sequence number to the item segment you entered for the numbering segment Replace with Sequence Replace the item segment you entered in the numbering segment with a sequence number Replace with Order Line Number Replace the item segment you entered for numbering segment with the sales order and line number User Defined Allows you to define a numbering scheme that meets your business needs If you would like Work in Process to maintain the individual operation sequence numbers for phantom subassemblies and to charge their resource and overhead costs to the parent or higher level assembly you set the following two parameters in Oracle Bills of Material Use Phantom Routings Set this parameter to specify whether phantom routing resources and overhead costs including those for outside processing resources assigned to phantom routing operations are charged to the parent or higher level assembly Setting this parameter also implies department inheritance for resources thus phantom resources can be used by departments that they are not owned by or assigned to as a borrowed resource You set the parameter at the inventory organization level and it then applies to all phantoms within a single inventory organization These are its two values e Yes If you select this value phantom routing components and resources and overheads are included in the
293. mblies planned equals the number of assemblies actually completed completion date The date you plan to complete production of the assemblies in a discrete job completion locator An inventory location within a completion subinventory where you receive completed assemblies from work in process completion subinventory Aninventory location at the end of your production line Glossary 14 where you receive completed assemblies from work in process Often this is the supply subinventory for subassemblies or finished goods inventories for final assemblies component A serviceable item that is a part or feature in another serviceable item Your customers cannot report service requests against this type of serviceable item directly You can reference components when you enter service requests against actual end item type serviceable items or products For example if you define three inventory items A B and C where A and B are products end item type serviceable items but C is a component non end item type serviceable item of A you can enter service requests against A and B directly but not against C When you enter a service request against product A you can reference C because it is a component of A See also standard component component demand Demand passed down from a parent assembly to a component component item An item associated with a parent item on a bill of material component yield The percent of the amo
294. me department resources for an assembly operation code A label that identifies a standard operation operation completion pull transaction A material transaction where you backflush components from inventory to work in process as you complete the operation where the component is consumed See also backflush transaction operation completion transaction A move transaction from one operation to the next where you have completed building the assembly at that operation In this process you can also charge resources and overheads and backflush component items Glossary 47 operation instructions Directions that describe how to perform an operation operation offset Elapsed days from the start of your first operation until the beginning of your current operation operation overlap scheduling A scheduling technique that allows you to schedule resource activities in the prior and next operations to overlap with the current operation operation sequence A number that orders operations in a routing relative to each other option An optional item component in an option class or model bill of material option class A group of related option items An option class is orderable only within a model An option class can also contain included items option class bill of material A bill of material for an option class item that contains a list of related options option class item An item whose bill of material contains a list of
295. ment blanket release An actual order of goods and services against a blanket purchase agreement The blanket purchase agreement determines the characteristics and prices of the items The blanket release specifies actual quantities and dates ordered for the items You identify a blanket release by the combination of the blanket purchase agreement number and the release number Glossary 10 blind receiving A site option that requires your receiving staff to count all items on a receiptline Blind receiving prevents display of expected receipt quantities in receiving windows BOM item type An item classification that determines the items you can use as components in a bill of material BOM Item types include standard model option class and planning items booking An action on an order signifying that the order has all the necessary information to be a firm order and be processed through its order cycle bucket days The number of workdays within a repetitive planning period budget organization An entity such as a department division or activity responsible for entering and maintaining budget data You define budget organizations for your agency then assign appropriate accounting flexfields to each budget organization bucket patterns Bucket patterns can be defined to include daily weekly monthly or quarterly buckets Bucket patterns are used to bucket quantity requirements on Planning or Shipping Schedules budget
296. meters Department Class Detail Indicate whether to print member departments associated with the department classes See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Reports 8 17 Department Report Use the Department Report to report department resource and overhead information Report Submission In the Submit Requests window select Department Report in the Name field Report Parameters Overhead Details Indicate whether to print department overhead information Resource Details Indicate whether to print department resource information Department Class Enter a department class to print member departments Departments From To To restrict the report to a range of departments select the beginning and ending department See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 18 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Item Where Used Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Item Where Used Report to report the assemblies that use the inventory items you specify In the Submit Requests window select Item Where Used Report in the Name field All Organizations Choose one of the following options No Report assemblies for the current organiza tion Yes Report assemblies for all organizations hav ing the same item master organization as the current organization and for those organiza tions accessible by the user responsi
297. meters you use when defining pricing rules Pricing components can be made up of one or multiple pricing parameters pricing parameters A parameter you use to create components to be used in a pricing rule Valid pricing parameters include segments of your item flexfield or Pricing Attributes descriptive flexfield pricing rule A mathematical formula used to define item pricing You create a pricing rule by combining pricing components and assigning a value to the components Oracle Order Entry automatically creates list prices based on formulas you define See also pricing components primary bill of material A list of the components you most frequently use to build a product The primary bill is the default bill for rolling up costs defining a job and calculating cumulative item lead times Master Scheduling MRP uses this bill to plan your material Glossary 55 primary customer information Address and contact information for your customer s headquarters or principal place of business Primary addresses and contacts can provide defaults during order entry See also standard value primary line See lead time line primary role Your customer contact s principle business function according to your company s terminology For example people in your company may refer to accounting responsibilities such as Controller or Receivables Supervisor primary routing A list of the operations you most frequently perform to build a
298. n lower level material and capacity requirements are analyzed by material planners before any change is made to current due dates manualresource A resource manually charged to a discrete job or repetitive schedule manufacturing lead time The total time required to manufacture an assembly manufacturing material Raw materials and work in process material mass change order A record of a plan to replace delete or update one or more component items in many bills of material at the same time mass loading An Oracle Manufacturing function to create one or more discrete jobs or repetitive schedules based on planned orders or schedules in your MRP or master production schedule mass rescheduling An Oracle Manufacturing function where you can reschedule or change the status of one or more discrete jobs based on your planned reschedule recommendations in your MRP or MPS master demand schedule The anticipated ship schedule in terms of rates or discrete quantities and dates master production schedule MPS The anticipated build schedule in terms of rates or discrete quantities and dates master schedule The name referring to either a master production schedule or a master demand schedule See master demand schedule and master production schedule master schedule load The process of copying one or more source forecasts master schedules or sales orders into a single destination master schedule When copying forecasts you
299. ncluded automatically For example the single level bill for the Laptop Computer configuration that was ordered in the example would include the Computer Case and Keyboard because they are mandatory components for the model the 486 processor the VGA1 monitor and DOS since they are options that were explicitly chosen It would also include VGA Manual and Monitor Manual since they are mandatory components of the VGA option class and the Monitor option class respectively And it would include the Laptop Computer model itself plus the CPU Monitor VGA and Operating System option classes The following table presents a single level bill of material Single Level Bill of Material Operation Item Mutually Component Sequence Optional Exclusive Item Keyboard CPU 5 32 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Operation Item Mutually Component Sequence Optional Exclusive Item 486 Processor Monitor VGA VGA 1 VGA Manual Monitor Manual Operating System DOS Bills of Material assigns each component to the operation sequence and the item sequence from its original bill For example the 486 processor is item sequence 20 in the CPU option class bill and it references operation 25 in that bill Multi Level Bill of Material In a multi level multi organization setup the model bill of material in the manufacturing organization is used for the creation of a configuration bill of m
300. ncluded on the job and on the pick list of the job not the phantom itself Oracle Master Scheduling MRP plans the phantom subassembly using the lot for lot lot sizing technique Otherwise the same rules apply to phantoms as for other assemblies Set the lead time of a phantom to zero to avoid lead time offset during the planning process When model or option class bills are components to another bill of material the component supply type is phantom See Two Level Master Scheduling Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide The cost rollup treats phantom assemblies the same as regular assemblies The phantom is treated as a distinct entity the cost elements of the phantom material resource and so on are added to the cost elements of the higher assembly Also the full cost rollup process sets the pending phantom assembly burden to 0 Overview of Configure to Order page 5 2 Item Attributes Listed in Alphabetical Order Oracle Inventory User s Guide 2 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Primary and Alternate Bills of Material See Also A primary bill is a list of the components you most frequently use to build a product An alternate bill is another list of components for the same basic assembly The primary bill is the default for rolling up costs defining a job and calculating cumulative item lead times You must define a primary bill before you define an alternate A primary bill can have many alternate bi
301. nd processing lead times Using detailed scheduling fixed and variable lead times are computed as the difference between the total time required for two scheduled jobs In other words Bills of Material plots total time required for a Manufacturing Lead Times 7 7 work in process job as a function of order quantity for both order quantities and computes the slope of the line that the two points define The following diagram illustrates discrete lead times calculation as described in the text above Figure 7 2 Discrete Lead Times Calculation Time Required Variable Lead Time Time Required Job 2 Job 1 Workdays rate Lead Time Lot Size Job 2 Time Required Job 2 Job 1 Job 1 Fixed Lead Time Lead Time Lot Size Lead Time Order Quantity Lot Size DS Attention Although Bills of Material uses detailed scheduling to compute lead times all calendar days are considered workdays regardless of days off workday exceptions or shift exceptions Bills of Material uses the following formulas to compute fixed and variable lead times Schedule a job for zero quantity beginning on the system date and compute fixed lead time as follows 7 8 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide completion date of one item system date Schedule a job for the lead time lot size beginning on the system date and compute variable lead time rate as follows completion date of all items system date fixed lead tim
302. ndatory components on model or option class bills only if the Forecast Control attribute is set to Consume and Derive Enter a component planning percent to specify a distribution percentage for the components You can enter a planning percent greater than 100 to overplan a component The default is 100 Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Two Level Master Scheduling Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Enforce Integer Requirements The Enforce Integer Requirements attribute enables you to generate demand in integer quantities and eliminate pegging partial quantities across the demand If you pass the demand in integer values for lower level components in the BOM you avoid passing fractional values across the BOM This enables pegging to reflect the true integer nature of supply and demand You can select from one of three following values 2 40 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Up Down None See Also The system rounds the gross requirements for every demand for the component to the next higher integer value To set the value to up you must set the item master attribute Rounding in Oracle Inventory The system rounds the gross requirements for every demand for the component to the next lower integer value This is the default value Leaving the value at none allows pegging in fractional quanti ties across the BOM MPS MRP Planning Attributes Oracle Inventory
303. ndatory standard component as the component quantity multiplied by the option class extended quantity regardless of the quantity entered on the sales order Shipping Details Fields Shippable Indicates whether the component item is shippable The default is determined by the value of the Shippable Item attribute in the item master Include on Ship Indicates whether Oracle Order Management Docs prints the components on external shipping documents such as pack slips and commer cial invoices The default is off 2 44 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Required to Ship Required for Revenue Indicates whether the component is required to ship the order You can only update this check box if the Assemble to Order item at tribute for the assembly item in the Define Item window is disabled This attribute only affects PTO included items not ATO items or configurations and is only effective if your OE Reservations profile option is set to No If OE Reservations is set to Yes then the Ship Model Complete inven tory attribute and the Ship Set feature in Or der Management control what is required to ship and what prints on the pick slip Indicates whether the component is required to recognize revenue before you ship the or der You can only update this check box if the Assemble to Order item attribute for the as sembly item in the Define Item window is disabled This attribute is recognized by the Receiv abl
304. nent Monitor Manual that is included for any monitor choice The VGA option class has a mandatory component VGA Manual that is included if you choose VGA1 or VGA2 The following table presents a BOM with multiple layers of option classes Indented Bill of Material for Promotional Laptop Mutually Level Item Item Type Optional Planning Exclusive 5 10 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Level Item Diskettes Mutually Optional Planning Exclusive Purchased Item Laptop Computer ATO Model CPU ATO Option Class 386 Processor Purchased 486 Processor Purchased Monitor ATO Option Class VGA ATO Option Class VGA Manual Purchased Item Purchased Item Purchased Item as far pee 9 ps me qme e X enema pente e ape eee Multi Level Bills of Material A model item can be a component of another model assembly If you specify any supply type other than phantom for the lower level models they will be treated as sub assemblies during the AutoCreate Configuration process In the example above change the monitor to a Model instead of an option class Give ita BOM supply type other than phantom When you place an order for a Promotional Laptop you choose from the same list of options as you would in the original example However now a new configuration item BOM and routing is created for both the Laptop Computer and the Monitor
305. nfigurations using descriptive elements that indicate the Processor Type Monitor Type and Operating System chosen for each configuration You could then assign the Laptop Computer model item to a catalog group that specifies those descriptive elements but not assign any values to those attributes since the Laptop Computer is a model not a specific configuration You would also assign each option item to a catalog group with descriptive elements that describe that option So you Configure to Order 5 21 would assign the processor option items 386 486 to a Processors catalog group containing a Processor descriptive element as well as others that might describe more specific processor attributes The following table presents cataloging configurations Catalog and Descriptive Elements Descriptive Descriptive Item Catalog Group Element Name Element Value Laptop Computer Personal Computers Processor n a n a Monitor n a OS 386 Processor Processors Processor 486 Processor Processors Processor VGA1 Monitors Monitor VGA2 Monitors Monitor EGA1 Monitors Monitor EGA2 Monitors Monitor Operating Systems Operating Systems You would also specify which descriptive elements to assign automatically to an ordered configuration based on options chosen under each option class in the Laptop Computer s bill For example when you defined the bill for the CPU option class you would specify that
306. ng the parent item on a work order and then shipping it Pick to order is also an item attribute that you can apply to standard model and option class items pick to order PTO item A predefined configuration order pickers gather as separately finished included items just before they ship the order See also kit pick to order PTO model An item with an associated bill of material with optional and included items At order entry the configurator is used to choose the optional items to include for the order The order picker gets a detailed list of the chosen options and included items to gather as separately finished items just before the order is shipped picking The process of withdrawing items from inventory to be shipped to a customer picking header Internal implementation of picking header that identifies distinct combinations of Pick Release criteria Warehouse Sales Order Shipping Priority Freight Carrier Ship To Backorder in the previous product design Picking Headers will be generated internally at Pick Release to ensure compatibility with the View Orders However when a delivery is closed in the Ship Confirm window Picking Headers will be updated internally again to ensure all Glossary 51 picking lines of a Picking Header are associated with the same delivery The reason to maintain Picking Headers at Ship Confirm again is for the compatibility of the Update Shipment program Update Shipment will proces
307. ng the same item master organization as the current organization and for those orga nizations accessible by the user responsibility Organization Hierarchy Enter a valid organization hierarchy name from the list of values If the value for the All Organizations parameter is set to No and you have provided a value for the Organization Hierarchy parameter then the report will provide bill listing information for the current organization and all organizations below the current organization in the specified organization hierarchy If this parameter is left blank and the All Organizations parameter is set to No then the report will provide bill listing information for the current organization You can enter a value in this field only if you have entered No in the All Organizations field Items From To To restrict the report to a range of items select the beginning and ending item numbers Reports 8 3 See Also Category Set Enter a category set to report on The default is the category set you defined for your functional area Categories From To To restrict the report to a range of categories select the beginning and ending category Alternate Selection Choose one of the following options All Report the bill of material information for the primary and alternate assemblies Primary Report the bill of material information for only the primary assembly Specific Report the bill of material information f
308. ngineering items as components to an engineering bill Bills of Material users can assign only manufacturing items as components to manufacturing bills Phantoms A phantom assembly is a non stocked assembly that lets you group together material needed to produce a subassembly When you create a bill of material for a parent item you can specify whether a component is a phantom One bill of material can represent a phantom Bills of Material 2 3 See Also subassembly for one parent item and a stocked subassembly for another parent item Oracle Work in Process explodes through a phantom subassembly to the components as if the components were tied directly to the parent assembly You can define routing for phantoms assemblies the same way as other assemblies Work in Process ignores phantom assembly routings when you define a job or repetitive schedule You can compute manufacturing and cumulative lead times for phantom assemblies that have routings If you do not want to offset the components of a phantom assembly in the planning process exclude the phantom item from the lead time calculations In general phantom assemblies behave like normal assemblies when they represent a top level assembly such as when you master schedule them or manufacture them using a discrete job As a subassembly however they lose their identity as distinct assemblies and are a collection of their components The components of the phantom subassembly are i
309. nly the item no alternate name and you can assign a routing revision For example you can define a routing for an item that includes two operations an assembly and a testing operation You typically build your product with these operations so you define this routing as the primary routing for the item The following table presents an example primary routing Primary Routing Alternate Name Operation Description Sequence Assembly Test A B 3 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide You can define an alternate routing to describe a different manufacturing process used to produce the same product Unlike a new primary routing specify the item and alternate name to define an alternate routing You must define a primary routing before you can define alternate routings and you can define any number of alternate routings for an item For example you have three test machines one new machine capable of performing both tests A and B and two older machines that can only perform test A or test B Ideally you would like to use the new machine that can perform both tests but if it is unavailable you use the other machines to complete the job The following table presents an example of a primary and alternate routing for Item A Primary and Alternate Routings Alternate Name Operation Description Assembly Test A B Sequence Split Test Assembly Bills and routings can share alternate labels If you create an alternat
310. ns See Also You can define any number of revisions for the item and any number of routing revisions for an item s routing De Attention Item revisions and routing revisions function alike and are discussed together below However item revisions and routing revisions are two distinct pieces of information They are created and maintained separately and have no influence over each other Assign each revision a unique three character alphanumeric revision identifier such as A B B1 and so on and a revision date Revisions are sorted according to ASCII rules Each revision must be greater than the previous revision Therefore you cannot use revision 10 after revision 9 because according to ASCII sorting 10 precedes 9 Use letters and or numbers to label revisions Letters are always upper case and numbers may include decimals To ensure that revisions sort properly according to ASCII sorting rules decimals should always be followed by a number Therefore valid revisions can include A B 1 2 A1 B1 1A 1B 0 0 0 1 A 0 A 1 and so on When you create an item or a routing the beginning revision defaults to the value for Starting Revision in the Organization Parameters window When you create or update a bill of material or routing you can choose to create a new revision or modify an existing revision When adding new revisions you should be sure that the revision date you enter does not overlap with other existing revisi
311. ns form is used to define which resources of a given department are required in order to perform a warehouse task Oracle Warehouse Management refers to standard operations as Task Types The rules engine uses the Code defined for the 3 22 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also 10 Standard Operation to reference the Task Type A bulk picking task may require a forklift machine and a pallet picker manual resource Oracle Warehouse Management uses a rules based system to determine the task type or standard operation each task should be associated with Tasks of a given type are then dispatched to users associated with the resource definition who have the qualified equipment for the task available to them See Set Up Warehouse Task Types Oracle Warehouse Management User s Guide Enter the department where the operation is performed Enter the minimum transfer quantity of assemblies to move from this operation to the next For operations in ATO model or option class routings only indicate whether the operation is option dependant that is whether the operation is dependant on the choice of an optional component All mandatory components and their related operations appear on the routing for each configuration The default is enabled See Overview of Configure to Order page 5 2 Select your Count Point and Autocharge options See Count Point and Autocharge page 3 27 Indicate whether to backflush components on sh
312. nsaction A move transaction that completes assemblies into inventory assembly scrap transaction A move transaction where you charge a scrap account as you move assemblies into a Scrap intraoperation step This reduces the value of your discrete job assembly UOM item A purchasing item associated with an outside resource that you purchase using the assembly s unit of measure The assembly s unit of measure should be the same as the purchasing item s unit of measure asset item Anything you make purchase or sell including components subassemblies finished products or supplies which carries a cost and is valued in your asset subinventories asset subinventory Subdivision of an organization representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items such as a storeroom where quantity balances are maintained for all items and values are maintained for asset items assigned units The number of resource units assigned to work at an operation in a routing For example if you have 10 units of machine resource available at a department you can assign up to 10 of these units to an operation in a routing The more units you assign the less elapsed time Work in Process schedules for the operation assignment set A group of sourcing rules and or bills of distribution and a description of the items and or organizations whose replenishment they control ATO See assemble to order ATO item See assemble to order item AT
313. nt User s Guide Cost Management Profile Options and Security Functions Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Resource Report page 8 22 1 30 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Overview of Workday Calendar A workday calendar defines the valid working days for a manufacturing organization and consists of repeating pattern of days on and days off and exceptions to that pattern This allows you to for example designate a normal workday as a scheduled downtime day or designate a holiday as a workday You can define one or more workday calendars and assign them to any number of organizations and any number of organizations can share a calendar You can specify the start and end dates and the weekend schedule for each calendar Repeating Workday Patterns Workday Exceptions You can also define a series of repeating workday patterns for a given calendar For example you have a repeating two week pattern where you work five days the first week and three days the second week Or you have a repeating pattern of 17 consecutive workdays followed by four days off When you build the calendar Oracle Bills of Material automatically determines the valid workdays for you based on the patterns you specify You can also specify repeating workday patterns for shifts see below There are three ways to apply exceptions to the workday calendar e selecting individual exception days loading them from an exception template ano
314. nt should be included in cost rollups If enabled the material cost of this component but not the routing cost is included in the cost of the parent item Optionally open the Material Control tabbed region and enter the supply type See Supply Types Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Enter the supply subinventory and the locator See Supply Subinventory and Locator page 2 42 If you have set the BOM Default WIP Supply Values for Components profile option to Yes these values default from the item master If any of these values are left blank Work in Process will read the values contained in the item master See Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 For model option class and kit bills open the Order Entry tabbed region and enter the minimum and maximum sales order quantities See Minimum and Maximum Quantities page 2 43 Indicate whether to check ATP See Check ATP page 2 43 Indicate whether the component is optional and mutually exclusive See Mutually Exclusive and Optional page 2 42 Enter the basis See Basis page 2 43 Open the Shipping tabbed region and choose whether the component should be listed on shipping documents required to ship or required for revenue See Shipping Details page 2 44 Choose buttons to perform related tasks Substitutes assign substitute components Bills of Material 2 13 See Also Designators create reference designators Element
315. nts for the item A value of MRP planned percent means the planning process plans to safety stock quantities it calculates dynamically as a user defined percentage of the average gross requirements for a user defined number of days The user defined percentage is defined by the value you enter for the Safety Stock Percent attribute for the item For discretely planned items the user defined number of days is defined by the value you enter for the Safety Stock Bucket Days attribute for the item For repetitively planned items the planning process uses the repetitive planning period rather than Safety Stock Bucket Days These safety stock quantities are dynamic in that they vary as a function of the average gross requirements calculated by the planning process for the item A value of Non MRP planned means the planning process plans to safety stock quantities calculated and maintained in Inventory These safety stock quantities are fixed in that the Snapshot loads them from Inventory before the planning process and they do not vary unless they are recalculated in Inventory Safety Stock Bucket Days An item attribute the planning process uses when you set the Safety Stock attribute for the item to MRP planned percent The planning process dynamically calculates safety stock quantities for the item by multiplying the average gross requirements for the item over the time period defined by the value you enter for Safety Stock Bucket Days b
316. obs requisitions purchase orders and other entities within Oracle Manufacturing If the Project Cost Collection Enabled parameter is also set you can collect and transfer manufacturing cost to Oracle Projects Project Manufacturing Costing A series of features in Project Manufacturing designed to support manufacturing costing in a project manufacturing environment Project Manufacturing Costing allows you to track item cost by project or a group of projects and transfer project related manufacturing transaction costs to Oracle Projects Project MRP A series of features in Project Manufacturing designed to support manufacturing planning processes in a project manufacturing environment Project MRP allows you to segment all sources of supply and demand by project and task This allows the planning process to net and plan supply by project and task project purchase order A purchase order with a project and task reference Glossary 57 project requisition A requisition with a project and task reference project sales order A sales order with a project and task reference project subinventory A subinventory with a project reference into which terms can be delivered and out of which items can be issued and transferred project task A subdivision of Project Work Each project can have a set of top level tasks and a hierarchy of subtasks below each top level task You can charge costs to tasks at the lowest level only See also
317. ock quantities against total demand gross requirements and reservations Net requirements lot sized and offset for lead time become planned orders Typically used for rework prototype and disassembly net weight Weight of the contained load Commonly calculated as GROSS TARE this includes the weight of any packing Glossary 45 materials paper cardboard separators Styrofoam peanuts etc nettable control An Oracle Manufacturing function that lets you specify whether the MRP planning process considers the requirements of the job or schedule in its netting calculations network routing Network routings in Oracle Shop Floor Management comprise a collection of operations which include primary paths and alternate paths You are able to define a separate routing for each item at each sector When you create routings in the Routings window you define all possible paths new average cost Cost of an item after a transaction that affects the average cost is processed See current average cost new on hand quantity The quantity on hand immediately after the transaction is performed and saved Equal to current on hand quantity plus total quantity See current on hand quantity total quantity node An instance of an activity in an Oracle Workflow process diagram as shown in the Process window of Oracle Workflow Builder See also process non quota sales credit See non revenue sales credit non revenue sales credit S
318. omers can choose the options for the assembled configurations as well as the picked options that ship with the order For each of these hybrid model bills you set the Pick Components Item Master field to Yes for the top model item and assign assemble to order model items as components where the Assemble to Order Item Master field is Yes So the components of a PTO model can include ATO models as well as PTO option classes and included items Also an option under a PTO model or option class can be a standard ATO item that requires a manufacturing work order to assemble it but unlike the ATO model has no options A model bill lists the option classes options and standard items that exist for a model The bill of material for a PTO model lists the option classes options and included items that exist for that model In the 5 8 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide example below the Promotional Laptop is a PTO model where you have both picked and assembled components The single level bill under the Promotional Laptop contains one option one option class two included items and an ATO model Both the Accessories option class and Diskettes are optional and you can choose any number of options under the Accessories option class The included items Battery Pack and Laptop Computer are not optional in the bill The single level bill under the Laptop Computer ATO model contains two mandatory components and three option classes The mandatory
319. omputers Processor Type Fast Computer 01 e ewe yw s Configure to Order 5 39 Since the Personal Computers catalog group specifies that each of the three descriptive elements should be included in the item description Bills of Material would automatically assign the description Fast VGA MS DOS to the configuration item See Also Overview of Item Catalogs Oracle Inventory User s Guide Searching for Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide 5 40 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Deactivating Configuration Items Bills of Material lets you automatically deactivate item numbers associated with completed configuration orders You can also deactivate configuration items to remove them from item master reports and screens before you actually purge them from the database See Deletion Constraints page 4 8 You can deactivate configuration items in a multilevel multi organization Bill of Material The deactivation program deactivates the item in the current organization only because the item may have existing demand or pending transactions in other organizations To deactivate the item in all organizations you must run the deactivate items process in each organization When you set up Inventory and Bills of Material you can define an item status to identify inactive configuration items You can use this status to disable the configuration item from all Oracle Manufacturing functions You would normally specify No for e
320. on dates Revisions are time stamped so you can determine the latest revision for multiple revisions defined on the same date New revision numbers must be greater than the revision number of the currently effective revision Different versions of a bill of material or routing can be defined within the same revision You can change component information for bills or operation information for routings without modifying the revision For example assume that you defined an initial revision A on 18 AUG and made a change on 20 AUG without creating a new revision If you make another change on 22 AUG you can create a new revision B effective 22 AUG There are now three different versions of the item revision A of 18 AUG revision A of 20 AUG and revision B of 22 AUG Defining Item Revisions Oracle Inventory User s Guide Routings page 3 2 2 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Components Bills of Material restricts the types of items you can assign as components based on the type of bill you are defining The following table lists valid components for each parent item type Valid Parent Component Relationships Parent BOM Item Type Component BOM Item Type Standard Item Standard Item Model Item Standard Item Model Item Option Class Item Option Class Item Standard Item Model Item Option Class Item Planning Item Standard Item Model Item Option Class Planning It
321. on routing That way lower level options can still reference the model s routing For example you can reference the Laptop Computer s routing as a common routing for the CPU option class referencing the Laptop Computer s routing steps in the option class bill Ina multi level multi organization environment each non phantom model should have its routing defined in its manufacturing organization Option Dependent Events for Flow Manufacturing A flow routing consists of processes line operations and events You can designate option dependent events by checking the Optional check box for an event On your bills of material you associate an option with event sequences via operation sequences on the BOM You can assign multiple routing steps to a single optional component The option dependent events will only be included in the configuration routing if an option referencing that event was chosen Ina multi level multi organization environment each non phantom model should have its routing defined in its manufacturing organization Operation Sequence Inheritance 5 20 You can specify that items within the model structure inherit the operation sequence from their parent option class or model You invoke this option by setting the site level profile BOM Inherit Option Class Operation Sequence Number to yes Bills of Material applies inheritance logic for all items in the model structure with an operation sequence defaulted to 1
322. one and only one product family You will be able to plan based on the planning percentages and effectivity of the product family members IS Attention You must make sure that the Product Family flex structure is configured to match the System Items structure If the System Items structure is changed it should be reflected in the Product Family structure as well See System Item Structure Oracle Inventory User s Guide P Tocreate a product family item 1 is Navigate to the Master Item window Attention If you are a Flow Manufacturing customer select Product Family from the Flow Manufacturing window The product family template is automatically applied Apply the product family template See Item Templates Oracle Inventory User s Guide To define a default template for product family items you must select a template from the INV Product Family Item Template Name profile option The template assigned in this profile option will be automatically applied when you create a new product family item Note You are not required to use the product family template If you choose not to use a template make sure that you define the correct product family attributes Specifically the item must be an inventory item and the BOM Item Type must be Product Family The item must also be BOM allowed Each product family corresponds to an item category A new category is added for each product family item that is defined The relat
323. one of our many Education Centers or you can arrange for our trainers to teach at your facility In addition Oracle training professionals can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to meet your needs For example you may want to use your organization structure terminology and data as examples in a customized training session delivered at your own facility Support From on site support to central support our team of experienced professionals provides the help and information you need to keep Oracle Bills of Material working for you This team includes your Technical Representative Account Manager and Oracle s large staff of consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business xviii Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide area managing an Oracle8 server and your hardware and software environment Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle Applications Data Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL Plus Oracle Data Browser database triggers or any other tool to modify Oracle Applications data unless otherwise instructed Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create store change retrieve and maintain information in an Oracle database But if you use Oracle tools such as SQL Plus to modify Oracle Applications data you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data Because Oracle Applications tables are interrelated any chang
324. only in the current organization To use a bill in another organization you must either copy it or reference it as a common The procedure below describes how to create a bill See Copying Bill and Routing Information page 2 14 See Referencing Common Bills and Routings page 2 17 Prerequisites L Define the parent item and all components as inventory items and set the BOM Allowed attribute to Yes and BOM Item Type to model option class planning or standard See Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P Tocreate a bill of material 1 Navigate to the Bills of Material window ET of Material M1 Lol x tc o OOO max Revision BAC 08 MAR 2001 18 53 40 6 n Display Filmplemented Only Unit Effectivity Item Seq Operation Seq Revision En sp ES E Note If your current responsibility does not include the Privilege to Maintain security function you can only view bill information If so enter selection criteria in the Find Bills window and choose the Find button The Bills Summary folder window appears 2 Enter the parent item for which you are creating a bill and if you are creating an alternate bill enter the alternate Note Bills and routings can share alternate labels If you create an alternate bill with the same label as an alternate routing components are assigned to operations on the alternate routing If there is no rout
325. ons are for external shipping personnel For example you might wish to warn your carriers of a fragile shipment or your customer s receiving hours parameter A variable used to restrict information in a report or determine the form of a report For example you may want to limit your report to the current month or display information by supplier number instead of supplier name parent transaction A transaction entered in an Oracle Manufacturing product that invokes quality data collection Pareto slaw Vilfredo Pareto s theory that a small percentage of a group accounts for the largest fraction of the impact for the group For example 90 of your inventory value may be attributed to 576 of your inventory items passing result A passing result signals successful completion of an order cycle approval action Once an order or order line has achieved an approval action passing result it no longer appears on the approval Glossary 50 window See also approval action order cycle past due requirements Past due requirements include Release requirements that fall before the schedule horizon start date payback demand Temporary material transfer when one project borrows demand from another project payback supply Temporary material transfer when one project lends supply to another project payment batch A group of invoices selected for automatic payment processing via Oracle Payables AutoSelect function payment documen
326. ons of sale a supplier offers you for an item or items A quotation usually includes a detailed description specifications of goods or services the supplier offers Suppliers consider quotations as an offer to sell when given in response to an inquiry A quotation may be verbal or written You often get verbal quotations for minor purchases by telephone You usually send a request for quotation if you want a written quotation from a supplier Written quotations often have an effective date and an expiration date quotation type A QuickCode you define to categorize your quotation information Purchasing provides you with the following set of predefined quotation types Catalog Verbal Telephone or From RFQ You can define other quotation types that better fit your business R rate variance For resources charged to work in process this variance is the difference between the actual resource rate and the standard resource rate times the resource quantity charged to the job or repetitive schedule You create rate variance entries if you charge resources using an actual rate and you chose Yes for the Standard Rate field in the Resources window rate based capacity Capacity planning at the production line level Required capacity available capacity and capacity load ratio are calculated for individual production lines Required and available capacity are stated in terms of production rate per line per week raw materials Purchased
327. op floor moves at this operation A backflush transaction automatically pulls Operation pull components from inventory Work in Process also pulls all Operation pull components at non backflush operations preceding this operation through the previous completed backflush operation To enable operation yield in Shop Floor Management enter the Operation Yield for each operation listed The valid values range between zero and one This field is displayed for Shop Floor Management enabled organizations Indicate whether this operation yield needs to be considered in the cost rollup as required by the costing team This field is displayed for Shop Floor Management enabled organizations Choose the Operation Resources button to assign resources to the standard operation See Assigning Operation Resources page 3 18 Defining a Department page 1 19 Routings 3 23 Overview of Shop Floor Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Overview of Routings page 3 2 Overview of Bills of Material page 2 2 Defining Activities and Activity Costs Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents page 2 22 Work in Process Standard Cost Transactions Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Standard Operation Report page 8 27 Defining Parameters Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide 3 24 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Viewing Resource Usage You can view the operations and rout
328. or 3 27 subinventory 3 27 Completion locator 2 13 Completion subinventory 2 13 Component computing requirement dates for ATP 6 6 valid attributes and bill types 2 7 valid relationships 2 7 Component item for bills 2 12 Components on bills of material 2 6 Components window Viewing Item Usage 2 29 Components window Deleting Items Bills Routings Components and Operations 4 4 Computing component requirement dates for ATP 6 6 dynamic lead time 6 7 fixed lead time 7 7 7 12 manufacturing lead time 7 2 7 3 7 6 MRP material requirement dates 6 5 operation lead time percents 7 12 resource load for planned orders 6 6 variable lead time 7 7 7 12 Computing fixed lead time 7 11 Computing variable lead time 7 11 Configuration item autocreate 5 24 bills of material 5 32 catalog 5 21 5 37 cost rollup 5 36 creating multi level bill for options 5 33 creating single level bill for options 5 32 deactivating 5 41 lead time calculation 5 26 match and reserve 5 29 numbering method 5 27 preconfiguring items 5 36 routings 5 34 weight and volume calculation 5 30 Configuration Items progress order 5 25 Configure to Order BOM support 5 4 information sources 5 2 overview 5 2 Configure to Order environments 5 8 Constraints when deleting bills and routings 4 8 Copy options for
329. or models Standard items include purchased items subassemblies and finished products standard note A routine message you can predefine and automatically or manually attach to orders returns order lines and return lines to convey important information See also one time note automatic note standard note A long note you define for Oracle Manufacturing and can later reference on as many documents as you want standard operation A commonly used operation you can define as a template for use in defining future routing operations standard planning engine A planning engine that drives the planning process This planning engine consists of three phases Glossary 76 each of which follows a strict sequence the exploder the snapshot and the planner These phases are followed by two optional phases CRP planner and maintain repetitive planning periods See memory based planning engine planning process standard purchase order A type of purchase order you issue when you order delivery of goods or services for specific dates and locations for your company Each standard purchase order line can have multiple shipments and you can distribute the quantity of each shipment across multiple accounts See purchase order standard rate The frozen standard unit cost for a resource standard receipt A receipt routing in which shipments are received into a receiving location and then delivered in a separate transaction Standard re
330. or the alternate assembly you specify Alternate Enter a specific alternate to report Common Organization Enter the organization where you define bills of material in your current organization reference Oracle Bills of Material prints the bill information for each common bill of material Common Bill Enter common bills that report bill of material information Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Creating Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals 8 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bill of Material Loop Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Bill of Material Loop Report to check for loops in a bill of material Bill loops occur when you assign an assembly as a component to itself somewhere in the multilevel structure You must fix loops before you can run an accurate MRP or define a discrete job or repetitive schedule for the assembly If no loop exists No Data Found is printed on the report In the Submit Requests window select Bill of Material Loop Report in the Name field Item Selection Choose one of the following options Range Check for loops in the bill of material struc ture for a range of items you specify Specific Check for loops in the item you specify Oracle Bills of Material displays this option as the default Item Enter a top level item not a component of another item Bills of Material checks for loops
331. oss all revisions You keep track of inventory quantities by revision when an item is under revision quantity control You keep track of inventory quantities by item when an item is not under revision quantity control RFQ See request for quotation RMA See Return Material Authorization RMG Return of Material Goods See Return Material Authorization Glossary 68 roll forward An Oracle Manufacturing technique where you can automatically take the material you over issued to a particular repetitive schedule and move it forward into the next available repetitive schedule rough cut capacity planning The process of converting the master schedule into capacity needs for key resources See routing based capacity and rate based capacity rough cut planner The routine that automatically calculates required resources for rough cut capacity planning done when running a report or inquiry Rounding Control An item attribute the planning process uses to decide whether to use decimal or whole number values when calculating planned order quantities or repetitive rates for the item A value of Do not round order quantities the planning process uses and displays decimal values when calculating planned order quantities and suggested repetitive rates for the item A value of Round order quantities means the planning process rounds decimal values up to the next whole number when calculating planned order quantities and suggested daily rates fo
332. ources that are available for that department When you define a department you specify any department overhead costs and the resources that are available You can enter multiple resources for each department For each resource you can specify the shifts that the resource is available For each resource shift you can also specify capacity modifications that change the available hours per day units per day or workdays Setting Up 1 19 gt To define a department 1 Navigate to the Departments window ES Departments M1 Department Description Cost Category Class Location Project Expenditure Org Inactive On a8 2 Enteraname for the department unique for the organization 3 Optionally enter a department class See Creating a Department Class page 1 18 4 Enteralocation for the department Ue Attention You must assign a location to a department if it is the receiving department following outside processing See Outside Processing Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Enter a project expenditure organization 6 Optionally enter an inactive date on which you can no longer assign this department to routing operations 7 Enter the Scrap Account in order to charge the departments that have scrapped material This field is displayed for Shop Floor Management enabled organizations 8 Enter the Estimated Absorption Account in order to estimate the expected scrapped material
333. ources to a Department page 1 21 Define Overheads Optional You can define resource overhead by using the Define Overhead form Each overhead sub element has a default basis default activity and absorption account The overhead absorption account offsets your corresponding overhead cost pool in the general ledger Context Perform this step once per organizational resource See Also Defining a Resource page 1 24 Associate Overheads with Departments Optional Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Step 15 Step 16 Step 17 Step 18 You can assign overhead rates or amounts to your department by cost type and department The cost rollup uses the assigned basis type to allocate the overhead charge The cost rollup assigns the activity to the calculated overhead cost You can define pending rates and use the cost rollup update process to change the pending rates to Frozen overhead rates Context Perform this step once per organizational department See Also Defining a Department page 1 19 Define Alternates Optional You can define any number of alternate names that you use when you create alternate bills of material and routings You use alternate bills and routings to produce an identical product using a different bill or routing You can apply the same alternate name to a bill of material and a routing Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Primary and Alternate Bills of Materi
334. outing has two operations with the same duration 1 day the first operation s lead time percent is zero and the second operation s lead time percent is 50 Oracle Manufacturing stores the offset percent for each resource on a routing operation as the percent of manufacturing processing lead time required for previous operations calculated from the start of the job to the start time of a resource at an operation For example both operations in the previous example for lead time percent require one day eight hours to perform If you have two different resources assigned to the second operation and each resource requires four hours to complete their task the offset percent is 50 for the first resource and 75 for the second resource Fixed and Variable Lead Times You can automatically compute processing fixed and variable lead times for manufactured items whether they are produced using discrete jobs or repetitive schedules A value of zero is assigned to the fixed variable and processing lead times of a manufactured item that does not have a routing and is not assigned to a production line Discrete Jobs Lead Times Bills of Material computes manufacturing lead time by forward scheduling two jobs the first job is scheduled for a quantity of zero and the second job is scheduled for a quantity equal to the item s lead time lot size The first job determines the fixed lead time and the second job determines the variable a
335. oved Releases release reason Justification for removing a hold on an order or order line release with forecast For a Shipping Schedule Indicates that the schedule releases requirements include Approved Releases The schedule forecast requirements include Unimplemented Planned Orders and Approved Requisitions released job schedule A discrete job or repetitive schedule that you have signified available to be worked on and transactable remit to addresses The address to which your customers remit their payments remittance advice A document that lists the invoices being paid with a particular payment document remittance bank The bank in which you deposit your receipts renewal order An order containing service order lines to renew or extend existing services applied to products reorder point planning Aninventory planning method used to determine when Glossary 63 and how much to order based on customer service level safety stock carrying cost order setup cost lead time and average demand repetitive allocation An Oracle Manufacturing technique for applying transaction quantities and costs across several repetitive schedules that are building the same repetitive assembly on the same line See flow charging repetitive assembly An assembly that you build in a repetitive manufacturing environment for example on a production line You can also build a repetitive assembly in discrete jobs if you operate in a h
336. p lt enter value here gt will be used as the default value Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions page 1 42 Define Bill of Material Parameters Required You assign the maximum number of bill of material levels for bill explosions loop checks and implosions For assemble to order manufacturers you assign configuration item information Oracle Cost Management does require that you assign values to each parameter if you compute an organization s manufacturing costs based on bill of material and routing information defined in Oracle Bills of Material Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Defining Bill of Material Parameters page 1 13 Define Department Classes Optional You can define department classes to group departments and to identify manufacturing cells This information is for your reference only Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Creating a Department Class page 1 18 Define Resources Optional You can define a resource as anything of value except material and cash required to manufacture cost and schedule products Resources include people tools labor purchased from a supplier and physical space Context Perform this step once per organization See Also Defining a Resource page 1 24 Define Resource Groups Optional You can group department resources by resource group to
337. page 1 19 e Assigning Resources to a Department page 1 21 e Defining a Resource page 1 24 e Creating a Workday Exception Template page 1 34 Creating a Workday Calendar page 1 36 e Creating a Workday Pattern page 1 40 e Creating Shifts and Shift Times page 1 41 e Importing Bills and Routings page 1 45 e Bills of Material Profile Options page 1 46 Setting Up 1 1 Overview of Setting Up This section contains an overview of each task you need to complete to set up Oracle Bills of Material Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard If you are implementing more than one Oracle Applications product it is recommended that you use the Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard AIW to coordinate your setup activities The Wizard guides you through the setup steps for the applications you have installed suggesting a logical sequence that satisfies cross product implementation dependencies and reduces redundant setup steps You can use the Wizard to see a graphical overview of setup steps read online help for a setup activity and open the appropriate setup window You can also document your implementation for further reference and review by using the Wizard to record comments for each step Related Product Setup Steps The following steps may need to be performed to implement Oracle Bills of Material These steps are discussed in detail in the Overview of Setting Up sections of oth
338. pter 1 describes how to set up Bills of Material Implementation information and procedures are contained in this chapter e Chapter 2 describes different types of bills of material and explains how to create them e Chapter 3 describes how to create routings and standard operations e Chapter 4 explains how to delete item bill and routing information e Chapter 5 explains how to use configure to order functionality to process orders for unique product configurations while maintaining control of inventory planning and cost accounting e Chapter 6 describes the three scheduling methods used in Manufacturing Scheduling detailed scheduling repetitive line scheduling and dynamic lead time offsetting e Chapter 7 explains how to calculate manufacturing lead times e Chapter 8 provides information on running Bills of Material reports e The appendices provide you with navigation paths to all windows and Tools menu options in Bills of Material Documentation Accessibility xii Our goal is to make Oracle products services and supporting documentation accessible with good usability to the disabled community To that end our documentation includes features that make information available to users of assistive technology This documentation is available in HTML format and contains markup to facilitate access by the disabled community Standards will continue to evolve over time and Oracle Corporation is actively engaged wi
339. ption dates to that calendar For a given workday calendar you can specify any number of shifts Each shift can have a different weekend schedule and a list of specific work interval start and end times For both calendars and shifts you can assign sets of workday exceptions and repeating workday patterns Shifts inherit workday exceptions and workday patterns from the base calendar Shift exceptions can either add to or override those of the base calendar If an exception on the base calendar changes those shifts that do not have an overriding exception on that date will automatically reflect the change Those shifts that do have an overriding exception on that date will not reflect the change and must be changed manually if they are to reflect the change in the base calendar Shift exceptions are applied to a calendar the same way as workday calendar exceptions by selecting individual exception days by defining exception templates or by copying a set of exceptions from another shift The following diagram illustrates the steps Bills of Material uses to determine workdays from an organization s workday calendar and exception template information Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bills of Material designates the calendar date as a non workday Is the date a day off in the workday pattern Bills of Material designates the calendar date as a non workday Is the date a workday exception day off Bill
340. ption of submission parameters Reports 8 1 Bill of Material Comparison Report Use the Bill of Material Comparison Report to report the comparison between two manufacturing assemblies You can compare primary bills manufacturing and engineering bills alternates and different revisions Based on your comparison criteria if the assemblies have identical components item sequences operation sequences yields quantities and implementations one line is printed for each identical component Otherwise the report prints a separate line for each different component Report Submission Use the Report Bill of Material Comparison window to submit this report Report Parameters The parameters for the Bill of Material Comparison Report are identical to those you supply when comparing bills of material online See Also Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide Comparing Bills of Materials page 2 32 8 2 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bill of Material Listing Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Bill of Material Listing to report manufacturing and engineering bills without any associated component or routing information In the Submit Requests window select Bill of Listing Report in the Name field All Organizations Choose one of the following options No Report the bill listing for the current orga nization Yes Report the bill listing for all organizations havi
341. quest Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 28 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Oracle Configurator Concurrent Programs If you want to build configuration models based on BOM models you can use a series of concurrent programs provided in Bills of Material to transfer BOM and Item Master data from the Bills of Material schema to the Oracle Configurator schema The Oracle Configurator uses this data in its development environment Oracle Configurator Developer to define a configuration model Use the following concurrent programs in the Other gt Configurator menu to transfer disable transfer or refresh BOM Model data from the Bills of Material schema to the Oracle Configurator schema e Populate Configuration Models e Refresh Configuration Models e Disable Import of Configuration Model When you run the Oracle Configurator concurrent programs from these submenus you are prompted to enter the required parameters if any Once you complete the entry of these parameters they are automatically added to the Submit Request form Note If you are familiar with these concurrent programs and know the required parameters you can also run these concurrent programs directly from the Submit Request form Parameters Populate Configuration Models Transfers BOM Model tree structures and associated Item Master data from the BOM schema to Oracle Configurator schema This data is then available in Oracle Configurator Developer for d
342. quired for revenue See Shipping Details page 2 44 To set Engineering Change Order ECO options For Oracle Engineering only 1 From the Mass Change Bills window choose the Tools menu item and choose Set ECO Options Use the Plan check box to indicate whether you want Oracle Master Scheduling MRP to include the revised item in the planning process Indicate whether each revised item s effective date is based upon the planned item s use up date If so check the Use Up check box Enter an item whose use up date is tied to each revised item effective date The default is the use up item associated with the plan name This can be the revised item or a component of the revised item Oracle Alert automatically notifies the planner for the revised item if the use up date changes based on information from a new MRP plan Bills of Material 2 27 See Also Bill Component Validation Rules page 2 46 Engineering Change Order Schedule Report Oracle Engineering User s Guide Overview of Engineering Change Orders Oracle Engineering User s Guide 2 28 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Viewing an Indented Bill of Material An indented multilevel exploded manufacturing or engineering bill of material displays the structure of a manufacturing or engineering item P To view an indented bill of material 1 Navigate to the Indented Bill of Material window 2 Inthe Find Indented Bills window enter t
343. quisition can include many lines generally with a distinct item on each requisition line Each requisition line includes at least a description of the item the unit of measure the quantity needed the price per item and the Accounting Flexfield you are charging for the item See also internal sales order purchased assembly An assembly that you normally buy purchased item An item that you buy and receive If an item is also an inventory item you may also be able to stock it See also inventory item purchasing documents Any document you use in the purchasing life cycle including requisitions RFOs quotations purchase orders and purchase agreements purchasing open interface A Purchasing function that lets you import price sales catalog information from your suppliers It receives the catalog data electronically verifies and processes the data and imports the data directly into Purchasing as blanket purchase agreements or quotations purge A technique for deleting data in Oracle Manufacturing that you no longer need to run your business purge category A Purchasing feature you use to purge a particular group of records from the database Purchasing lets you choose from the following separate categories Simple Requisitions Simple Purchase Orders Suppliers Simple Invoices only if you installed Payables and Matched Invoices and POs only if you installed Payables The last category is the most comprehensive cate
344. r including dynamic network routings lot transactions lot genealogy co product functionality and costing information Oracle Work in Process User s Guide This guide describes how Oracle Work in Process provides a complete production management system Specifically this guide describes how discrete repetitive assemble to order project flow and mixed manufacturing environments are supported Installation and System Administration Oracle Alert User s Guide This guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status of your Oracle Applications data Multiple Reporting Currencies in Oracle Applications If you use the Multiple Reporting Currencies feature to record transactions in more than one currency use this manual before implementing Oracle Bills of Material This manual details additional steps and setup considerations for implementing Oracle Bills of Material with this feature Multiple Organizations in Oracle Applications If you use the Oracle Applications Multiple Organization Support feature to use multiple sets of books for one Oracle Bills of Material installation this guide describes all you need to know about setting up and using Oracle Bills of Material with this feature xvi Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Oracle Applications Implementation Wizard User s Guide If you are implementing more than one Oracle product you can use the Oracle Applications Implementat
345. r 3 18 Setup checklist 1 4 flowchart 1 4 overview 1 2 steps 1 7 Share resources across departments 1 21 Shift Calendar Dates window Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions 1 42 Reviewing the Workday Calendar 1 43 Shift number when creating shifts 1 41 Shift number to assign to resource 1 22 Shift times start and stop 1 41 Shifts window Assigning Resources to a Department 1 22 Creating Shifts and Shift Times 1 41 Shippable 2 13 2 42 Shipped number of days ago 5 42 Simulation set 1 10 for capacity change 1 22 Simultaneous Resources 3 19 Sort option 2 28 Special menu B 2 Standard bills of material 2 2 Standard comments 1 11 Standard instructions 1 11 Index 7 Standard Operations Creating a Standard Operation 3 22 Standard operations code 3 22 Standard rate 3 20 for charging jobs and schedules 1 26 Starting value 2 19 Subinventory See Completion subinventory Supply subinventory Substitute components assigning 2 19 Substitute Components window Assigning Substitute Components 2 13 2 19 Substitute item 2 19 Substitute Resources 3 20 Supply locator 2 40 Supply subinventory 2 40 T Total lead time for discrete items calculation 6 8 Total lead time for repetitive items calculation 6 8 Type of delete entity 4 3 U Unit Effectivity 2 12 Update WI
346. r ships This decrements the demand schedule to represent an actual statement of demand shipment schedule An itemized list of when how where and in what quantities to ship an order line shippable item An item with the Shippable inventory item attribute set to Yes indicating that this item will appear on pick slips and packslips See also intangible item shippablelines Picking line details that have been pick released and are now eligible for Ship Confirm shipping documents Shipping related reports such as the Bill of Lading Commercial Invoice Mailing Label Pack Slip Vehicle Load Sheet Summary and Waybill shipping instructions Notes that print on the pick slip These instructions are intended for internal use shipping schedule Used to communicate near term release shipment information to suppliers The Shipping Schedule provides a tool for refining the requirements conveyed on the Planning Schedule in support of Just In Time JIT delivery shop floor status An Oracle Manufacturing function that lets you restrict movement of assemblies at an operation and intraoperation step within a discrete job or repetitive schedule short code An abbreviated notation of a collection element value short notes A Purchasing feature that lets you provide up to 240 characters on your documents Typically these notes are for your supplier approver buyer or receiver shortage An open requirement with no inventory in th
347. r Transaction window issues a warning when you move a quantity less than this minimum Attachments You can attach files which may include instructions to routing operations See Attaching Files to Bills and Routing Operations page 2 22 Option Dependent Operations When you define routings for model and option class items you can indicate the operations that appear in a configuration item s routing only if you choose an option that references that operation Bills of Material automatically creates a configuration item s routing including all operations that are not option dependent and any option dependent operations referenced by a chosen option See Configure to Order Environments page 5 8 Resource Usage You can associate multiple resources with an operation on a routing For each resource you can determine if you want to include that resource in scheduling and lead time calculations You can also collect costs for a resource on a routing if you specified the resource as a costed resource See Defining a Resource page 1 24 Resource parents and resource sets are used to group similar resources Routings can then be defined with their general resource requirements while WIP lots are tracked with the usage of the specific resources While a resource can belong to several resource sets a resource can only belong to one parent resource When a WIP lot is at an operation with a parent resource or resource set attached
348. r all organizations below the current organization in the chosen organization hierarchy If you select All Organizations then processing is done for all organizations that have the same item master organization as the current organization Organization Hierarchy Organization e Item Choose OK Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide De Attention In addition to navigating to the Define Bills form you can also common bills by running the stand alone concurrent program See Also Creating Organization Hierarchies Using Oracle HRMS The Fundamentals Assigning Descriptive Elements For each model and option class bills only you can specify a list of item catalog descriptive elements Values are assigned to catalog descriptive elements when new configuration item are created The descriptive element value of the chosen option is assigned for each descriptive element Prerequisites L For model bills you must assign the item to a catalog group See Defining Item Catalog Groups Oracle Inventory User s Guide P Toassign descriptive elements 1 Navigate to the Descriptive Elements window Do this by choosing the Elements button from the Bills of Material window 2 Enter a descriptive element to assign automatically based on the option chosen in the current bill For model bills you can only specify a descriptive element name within the model item catalog group For option class bills you can specify a desc
349. r procedure that implements one or more business functions or parts of a business function in an application Modules include forms concurrent programs and subroutines move transaction A transaction to move assemblies from operation to operation or Glossary 44 within an operation on a discrete job or repetitive schedule MPS See master production schedule MPS explosion level An option for a master demand schedule that lets you limit the explosion through unnecessary levels during the MPS planning process Set the explosion level to the lowest level on the bill of material that an MPS planned item exists so the planning process does not need to search through all levels for MPS planned items MPS plan A set of planned orders and suggestions to release or reschedule existing schedule receipts for material to satisfy a given master schedule for MPS planned items or MRP planned items that have an MPS planned component Stated in discrete quantities and order dates MPS planned item An item controlled by the master scheduler and placed on a master production schedule The item is critical in terms of its impact on lower level components and or resources such as skilled labor key machines or dollars The master scheduler maintains control for these items MRP See material requirements planning MRP net quantity The quantity planning views as supply coming from a discrete job on the scheduled completion date MRP plan
350. r the item Planned order quantities and suggested daily rates are always rounded up never down The planning process carries any excess quantities and rates forward into subsequent periods as additional supply route sheet A report that provides full routing operation resource and material requirement details for jobs and repetitive schedules Typically used to know how when where and who builds an assembly Also known as traveler routing A sequence of manufacturing operations that you perform to manufacture an assembly A routing consists of an item a series of operations an operation sequence and operation effective dates routing revision A specific version of a routing that specifies the operations that are active for a date range routing based capacity Capacity planning at the resource level Required capacity available capacity and capacity load ratio are calculated for individual resources assigned to operations on routings Required and available capacity are stated in terms of hours per resource per week run Anintraoperation step where you move assemblies that you are working on at an operation S safety stock Quantity of stock planned to have in inventory to protect against fluctuations in demand and or supply Safety Stock item attribute Anitem attribute the planning process uses to decide whether to use fixed or dynamically calculated safety stock quantities when planning material requireme
351. racle Manufacturing functions Also known as product structures bill of resource set A group of bills of resources A bill of resource set can have one or many bills of resources within it Glossary 9 bill of resources A list of each resource and or production line required to build an assembly model or option bill revision A specific version of an item which specifies the components that are active for a date range bill to address The customer s billing address Itis also known as invoice to address It is used as a level of detail when defining a forecast If a forecast has a bill to address associated with it a sales order only consumes that forecast if the bill to address is the same bill routing reference A bill or routing you assign to non standard discrete jobs You use the bill reference to create the material requirements for the job You use the routing reference to create the routing for the job blanket purchase agreement A type of purchase order you issue before you request actual delivery of goods or services You normally create a blanket purchase agreement to document a long term supplier agreement A blanket purchase agreement may contain an effective date and an expiration date a committed amount or quantity You use a blanket purchase agreement as a tool for specifying agreed prices and delivery dates for goods and services before ordering them blanket purchase order See blanket purchase agree
352. rce start and end times use detailed scheduling For example Master Scheduling MRP generates MRP plans as quickly as possible so it schedules planned order start dates using dynamic lead time offsetting Work in Process however uses detailed scheduling to schedule jobs since it schedules resource usages in departments with exact start date end dates and times not scheduling a resource when one is not available Results from detailed scheduling and dynamic lead time offsetting may differ The more resource availability exceptions and capacity modifications from the workday calendar you have the more detailed scheduling results differ from dynamic lead time offsetting results Assigning preprocessing lead time to manufactured items can also produce different results detailed scheduling does not use lead times in its calculations while dynamic lead time offsetting does Material Requirement Dates Master Scheduling MRP computes component requirement dates for planned orders using the offset percentage for the operation where each component is used Master Scheduling MRP multiplies the operation offset percentage times the planned order lead time to get Manufacturing Scheduling 6 5 See Also offset days and then finds the workday that is the number of days past the planned order start date Resource Load by Department Date for Planned Orders Oracle Capacity offsets resource requirement dates the same way that Master Schedulin
353. rces 3 6 scheduling 3 7 M Manufacturing Lead Times calculating 7 17 Manufacturing Scheduling overview 6 2 repetitive line 6 4 Mass change bill of material See Bills of material mass change Mass change order number 2 23 Match and Reserve 5 29 multi level configurations 5 30 Material control 2 28 Material requirement dates 6 5 Maximum bill levels 1 12 Maximum quantity 2 13 2 41 Minimum quantity 2 41 Minimum quantity 2 13 3 13 3 23 Minimum transfer quantity 3 6 Model bills of material 2 2 MRP material requirement dates 6 5 Mutually exclusive 2 13 2 40 N Numbering method 1 12 Numbering segment 1 12 O Offset percent 3 19 Operation defining 3 5 lead time percents 7 12 outside processing 3 9 scheduling 6 3 Operation sequence on bills of material 2 34 Operation Documents window Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents 2 20 Operation sequence inheritance 5 20 Operation Yield 3 13 Option class bilss of material 2 3 Option dependent 3 23 Option dependent routing steps discrete manufacturing 5 18 flow manufacturing 5 20 Option quantity ranges 5 13 Optional 2 40 Order lead time calculation 5 26 Organization 2 17 when autocreating configuration items 5 25 when copying a bill 2 15 when deactivating configuration items 5 42 Outside
354. rchase order Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger Purchase order encumbrance is also known as obligation encumbrance or lien purchase order receipt See receipt purchase order revision A number that distinguishes printed purchase order versions Purchasing automatically sets the revision to 0 when you initially create a purchase order Each purchase order you print displays the current revision number purchase order shipment A schedule for each purchase order line composed of the quantity you want to ship to each location You can also provide delivery dates for each shipment line You can create an unlimited number of shipments for each purchase order line You receive goods and services against each shipment line purchase price variance The variance that you record at the time you receive an item in inventory or supplier services into work in process This variance is the difference between the standard unit cost for the item or service and the purchase unit price multiplied by the quantity received You record purchase price variances in a purchase price variance account for your organization Since standard cost is a planned cost you may incur variances between the standard cost and the purchase order price purchase requisition An internal request for goods or services A requisition can originate from an employee or from another process such as inventory or manufacturing Each re
355. rchased Item 12Hour Battery Purchased Item Accessories PTO Option Class Mouse Product LaserPrinter Product Scanner Product Purchased Item Purchased Item CPU ATO Option Class Purchased Item Purchased Item ATP calculation can also be done for a product family A product family calculation takes into account demand and supply for individual items that are members of the product family Oracle supports multiple levels of ATP check components For example a standard component of a model could contain a phantom item with ATP check components in its bill In that case you would set the ATP Components Item Master field to Yes for both the model and the phantom item That way Order Management knows to continue Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide exploding the bill through the phantom item looking for components to include in the group ATP check for the configuration Note Multi level multi organization environments require that ATP Check be based on the results of your planning input See Planning Process Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning User s Guide Multi Organization Bills of Material Setup You can enter sales orders for assemble to order configurations with a warehouse as the shipping organization and build the configurations in other organizations In a multi level structure each level can be built in a different organization Using common bills of materia
356. re two types associated with Oracle Quality the collection plan results and the collection import results database views date effectivity A technique used to identify the effectivity date of a configuration change A component change is controlled by effective date within the bill of material for the unchanged parent part number days off The number of consecutive days off a shift has before a day on days on The number of consecutive days that a shift works before a day off default value Information Oracle Order Entry automatically enters depending on other information you enter See also standard value delayed service order An order for service against existing customer products The service order is delayed because service is ordered later than the product is ordered delete entity An item bill of material or routing you choose to delete delete group A set of items bills and routings you choose to delete delete subentity A component or operation you choose to delete deletion constraint A business rule that restricts the entities you can delete A deletion constraint is a test that must succeed before an item bill or routing can be deleted deliver to location A location where you deliver goods previously received from a supplier to individual requestors delivery Internal delivery of items to requestors within your organization delivery A set of order lines to be shipped to a customer s ship
357. rease current daily rates for the item inside the planning time fence The planning process does not suggest a new daily rate less than the current daily rate minus the acceptable rate decrease amount If you do not define a value for this attribute the planning process assumes that there is no lower limit to the new daily rate it can suggest for the item inside the planning time fence If you set this attribute to zero the planning process assumes it cannot suggest any rate less than the current daily rate inside the planning time fence Inventory defaults the value of this attribute to zero This attribute lets you minimize short term disruption to shop floor schedules by restricting short term rate change suggestions This attribute applies to repetitively planned items only Acceptable Rate Increase An item attribute the planning process uses to decide how much to increase current daily rates for the item inside the planning time fence The planning process does not suggest a new daily rate that is greater than the current daily rate plus the acceptable rate increase amount If you do not define a value for this attribute the planning process assumes there is no upper limit to the new daily rate that it can suggest for the item inside the planning time fence If you set this attribute to zero the planning process assumes it cannot suggest any rate greater than the current daily rate inside the planning time fence Inventory defa
358. receiving material actual shortage An actual shortage exists when available quantity is less than demand quantity Checks for actual shortages occur when inventory is incremented Alerts and notifications are generated only for actual shortages adjustment tolerance Determines when Inventory does not make a cycle count adjustment Inventory does not make an adjustment if your physical count differs from the on hand inventory quantity by less than the specified tolerance You define adjustment tolerance when you define an item aggregate repetitive schedule The sum of detail schedules for an item across all work in process manufacturing lines in terms of a daily rate and a start and end date Glossary 3 aggregate resources The summation of all requirements of multi department resources across all departments that use it agreement A contract with a customer that serves as the basis for work authorization An agreement may represent a legally binding contract such as a purchase order or a verbal authorization An agreement sets the terms of payment for invoices generated against the agreement and affects whether there are limits to the amount of revenue you can accrue or bill against the agreement An agreement can fund the work of one or more projects An arrangement with a customer that sets business terms for sales orders in advance Oracle Order Entry lets you assign pricing accounting invoicing and payments terms to
359. redit profile class credit check rule Glossary 17 credit check rule A rule that defines the components used to calculate a customer s outstanding credit balance Components include open receivables uninvoiced orders and orders on hold You can include or exclude components in the equation to derive credit balances consistent with your company s credit policies credit memo A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice credit memo reasons Standard explanations as to why you credit your customers See also return reason critical path The series of operation start and completion dates and times that result from the detailed scheduling algorithm cross reference A user defined link from an item number to another piece of information CRP planner A process that may optionally be run as part of the planning process The CRP planner calculates capacity requirements for resources and production lines using the material requirements calculated by the planning process CUM Total received for a supplier site item and organization within a CUM Period CUM periods The Period you are going to use to track the quantity received to date for a particular organization In the Automotive industry this may be a model year cumulative manufacturing lead time The total time required to make an item if you had all raw materials in stock but had to make all subassemblies level by level Bills of Material automatically
360. related options option dependent operation An operation in a model or option class item s routing that appears in a configuration item routing only if the configuration contains an option that references that operation option item A non mandatory item component in an option class or model bill of material order cycle A sequence of actions you or Oracle Order Entry perform on an order to complete the order An order cycle lets you define the activity an order follows from initial entry through closing You can define as many order cycles as your business requires Order cycles are assigned to order types See also action result Glossary 48 order cycle action See cycle action order date The date an order for goods or services is entered See also work order date order modifier An item attribute that controls the size of planned orders suggested by the planning process to mimic your inventory policies order scheduling See scheduling order setup cost The fixed cost associated with placing an order of any quantity for an item ordertype Classification of an order In Order Entry this controls an order s order cycle order numbering source credit check point transaction type and standard value rule set OrderImport An Order Entry open interface that allows you to import your transaction information from an original system into Oracle Bills of Material See also feeder program organization A business unit suc
361. rent Report all components effective as of the revi sion date Oracle Bills of Material displays this option as the default Future and current Report all future and current components as of the revision date Explosion Quantity Enter a quantity to explode This quantity is used to calculate the requirements for the components of the parent item by multiplying this quantity by the component usage in the bill of material Assembly Detail Indicate whether you want to print assembly detail associated with the bill Use Planning Percent Indicate whether you want to use the planning percent to calculate the component requirements of the present item Component requirements are calculated by multiplying the component usage quantity by the explosion quantity and then multiplying the component planning percent Submitting a Request Oracle Applications User s Guide 8 14 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Delete Items Report Report Submission Report Parameters Use the Delete Items Report to report the delete history for items components bills of material operations and routings In the Submit Requests window select Delete Items Report in the Name field Delete Group From To To restrict the report to a range of delete groups select the beginning and ending delete group Item Indicate whether to print delete groups that delete items Bill of Material Indicate whether to print del
362. repetitive schedules You can choose all suggestions from an MRP plan or only those that meet a certain criteria planning bill of material A bill of material for a planning item that contains a list of items and planning percentages You can use a planning bill to facilitate master scheduling and or material planning The total output of a planning bill of material is not limited to 100 it can exceed this number by any amount planning exception set A set of sensitivity controls used to define exceptions in your plan You define the exception set according to your selected criteria and then report on exceptions that meet those criteria You can assign an exception set to an item Planning Exception Set An item attribute the planning process uses to decide when to raise planning exceptions for the item Enter the name of the planning exception set that groups together the sensitivity controls and exception time periods for item level planning exceptions for the item The item level planning exceptions include overcommitted shortage excess and repetitive variance planning group A grouping mechanism that allows you to group multiple projects for planning and netting purposes Projects within the same planning group can share supply planning horizon The amount of time a master schedule extends into the future planning item A type of item representing a product family or demand channel whose bill of mater
363. ring organization 5 36 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide In this case you cannot see the entire configured bill structure for the organization A match is attempted during pre configuring processing if the profile BOM Match to Existing Configuration Yes If a similar configuration exists the system gives you a choice to use the existing configuration or to create a new configuration for the pre defined item If you choose the existing configuration the process aborts and no BOM or Routing is created for the item If you choose not to use the existing configuration the system creates a new BOM and Routing for the item but reuses the lower level matched configurations The system updates the match tables with the new preconfigured item and BOM so future matches reflect the new preconfigured item You must set the configurator URL properly to enable you to call the configurator from within BOM P Topreconfigure an item 1 Createa new item in the master organization and assign it to the appropriate manufacturing organization 2 Enterthe base item in the model field on the BOM tab of the item master 3 Inthe manufacturing organization create a new bill of material for your item without components 4 Place your cursor in the Components region From the Tools menu choose Configure Bill The Configurator window displays enabling you to pick your options Once done this item can be planned ordered and stocked
364. riptive element name from any catalog group When you order a configuration Bills of Material automatically creates and assigns the configuration item to the model s item catalog group and assigns values to the descriptive elements in this group See Also Overview of Configure to Order page 5 2 Bills of Material 2 19 Creating Reference Designators 2 20 Reference designators are sequenced comments and instructions that pertain to a component For example you may have drawings that clarify the assembly process for certain components or further instructions for the use of a large quantity of the same component You can specify whether to assign one reference designator for every usage of the component or assign any number of reference designators to the component Planning bills and model option class and planning components cannot have reference designators Reference designators are sorted in alphanumeric order on inquiries and reports You can also specify a comment for each reference designator To create reference designators 1 Navigate to the Reference Designators window Do this by choosing the Designators button from the Bills of Material window 2 Indicate whether you want component quantity related to the number of reference designators Off Assign any number of reference designators to each component the default The number of reference designators is independent of the component quantity With Q
365. ross requirements Note that gross requirements for projected on hand does not include derived demand from planned orders Note also that the planning process uses current due dates rather than suggested due dates to pass down demand to lower level items See projected available balance customer address A location where your customer can be reached A customer may have many addresses You can also associate business purposes with addresses Also known as customer location See also customer site customer agreement See agreement customer agreement type See agreement type customer bank A bank account you define when entering customer information to allow funds to be transferred from these accounts to your remittance bank accounts as payment for goods or services provided See also remittance bank customer business purpose See business purpose customer class A method to classify your customers by their business type size or location You can create an unlimited number of customer classes customer family agreement An agreement for a specific customer available to any related customer See also agreement generic agreement customer interface A program that transfers customer data from foreign systems into Receivables customer interface tables A series of two Oracle Receivables tables from which Customer Interface inserts and updates valid customer data into your customer database Customer Item model Allows you
366. rovided by a supplier outside processing operation Any operation that has an outside processing resource See outside resource outside processing item An item you include on a purchase order line to purchase supplier services as part of your assembly build process This item can be the assembly itself or a non stocked item which represents the service performed on the assembly outside resource A resource provided by a supplier that you include in your routings such as supplier sourced labor or services This includes both PO move and PO receipt resources over completions Completing an assembly quantity into inventory that is greater than the Discrete job or Repetitive schedule start quantity whether or not the assemblies have a routing over completion quantity The transaction quantity minus the available quantity over moves Moving a quantity from one interoperation step to another that is greater than the quantity at the interoperation step whether or not the assemblies have a routing overhead The indirect expenses allocated in your budgeting process and assigned to your resources or departments You charge overhead costs based on resource value resource units or operation completions You typically include administration facility depreciation activity and other costs you cannot directly charge to your manufactured items Does not include material overhead overhead transaction A work in process transaction t
367. rs the AutoCreate Configuration Item process finds all orders whose work order or flow schedule release date is within the Release Offset Days you specified and automatically creates configuration items for those orders Bills of Material automatically defines a new unique configuration item in the item master and assigns a bill of material and routing See tables in the Resulting Bills of Material page 5 32 and Resulting Routings page 5 34 sections presenting what will be assigned to the new configuration item Lead Time Calculation Option Discrete Manufacturing Bills of Material lets you optionally compute the manufacturing and cumulative lead times for each new configuration item to establish accurate lead times based only on the options chosen The configuration manufacturing and cumulative lead times are calculated for the configuration item based on the configuration item routing This calculation is done in the manufacturing organization For example the AutoCreate Configuration Item concurrent program could automatically compute fixed and variable lead times for the Laptop Computer configuration based on the routing steps that were included from the model routing In this case the Clean Processor step would contribute to the lead time So if the Clean Processor step included one hour of setup time then it would contribute one hour to the fixed lead time for the configuration 5 26 Oracle Bills of Material User s Gu
368. ry Bill Indented GUI Obsolete Substitute Components Personal Profile Values Navigator Setup gt Profiles Bill Components Comparison Navigator Bills gt Comparison Bill Details Navigator Bills gt Bills gt Bill Details GUI Obsolete Deletion Groups Navigator Bills gt Bills gt Substitutes Navigator Routings gt Delete Groups Departments Navigator Routings gt Departments Indented Bills of Material Navigator Bills gt Indented Bills Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu B 7 Character Mode Form and Menu Path GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path View Item Cost Information Use the Cost Management responsibility and See Navigate Inquiry Item Cost Oracle Cost Management User s Guide or online help iew Item Revisions Item Revisions lt Ss Navigate Inquiry Item Revision Navigator Bills gt Bills gt Revision ew Item Usage Item WhereUsed avigate Inquiry WhereUsed Item Navigator Bills gt Item WhereUsed ew Resource Usage Resource WhereUsed avigate Inquiry WhereUsed Resource Navigator Routings gt Resource WhereUsed ew Routing Details Routing Details Ze Ze Ze avigate Inquiry Routin Navigator Routings Routings Routing Details 8 quiry 8 8 8 8 8 See Also Oracle System Administrator Character Mode Forms and Corresponding GUI Windows B 8 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide GLOSSARY A ABC classification
369. ry and locator where you store finished assemblies upon completion When you define a job or repetitive schedule Work in Process uses these values as the default and you can change the completion subinventory and locator if necessary Upon completion of assemblies the completion subinventory and locator you defined for the job and repetitive schedule is the default and you can change these values if necessary Overview of Assembly Completions and Returns Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Count Point and Autocharge Fields You can define which operations in a routing record move transactions by defining how resources are consumed at that operation The Count Point and Autocharge check boxes work together In the following discussion the Count Point and Autocharge check boxes can be set to either on or off However you cannot set Count Point on and Autocharge off When you move assemblies from an operation with Count Point on Autocharge on operation to another count point operation set the same way Work in Process automatically completes all Count Point off Autocharge on count point operations between them To transact a Count Point off Autocharge off count point operation you must explicitly move assemblies into and out of that operation Moving assemblies past a Count Point off Autocharge off count point operation acts as though the operation did not exist in the routing This is particularly useful for rework or deb
370. s assign descriptive elements Bill Details reference common bills Revision define item revisions Copying Bill and Routing Information page 2 14 Referencing Common Bills and Routings page 2 17 Assigning Descriptive Elements page 2 19 Creating Reference Designators page 2 20 Assigning Substitute Components page 2 21 Defining Item Revisions page 2 21 Attaching Files page 2 22 Checking for Bill Loops page 2 23 Deleting Components and Operations page 4 6 Bill Component Validation Rules page 2 46 Bill of Material Listing Report page 8 3 Customizing the Presentation of Data in a Folder Oracle Applications User s Guide Copying Bill and Routing Information You can save time defining new similar bills or routings by copying their information rather than creating them manually You can copy a bill or routing from your current organization or from another organization that shares your same item master organization You can then modify your new bill or routing as necessary You can copy any revision of a primary or alternate bill or routing Subinventory and locator information are not copied across organizations 2 14 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Bills of Material Only When you copy bills from your current organization everything is copied to the new bill including the supply type and the supply subinventories and locators You can only copy bills between items having the
371. s Alternates Navigate Setup BOM Alternates Navigator Setup gt Alternates Define Bill of Material Delete Range Navigate Bill Define Navigator Bills gt Bills gt Designators gt Delete Range or Add Range Navigator Bills gt Bills gt Designators gt Add Range Define Bills of Material Parameters Parameters Navigate Setup BOM Parameters Navigator Setup gt Parameters Define Change Order types Change Types Navigate Setup BOM Types Navigator Setup gt Change Types Define Delete Constraint Deletion Constraints Navigate Setup BOM Delete Navigator Setup gt Delete Constraints Define Department Departments Navigate Setup Organization Department Navigator Routings gt Departments Define Department Classes Department Classes Navigate Setup Organization DeptClass Navigator Setup gt Department Classes De D Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Security Define Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Security gt Define Define Key Flexfield Segments Key Flexfield Segments Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Segments Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Segments Define Key Segment Values Segment Values Navigate Setup Flexfields Key Values Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Key gt Values Define Location Location Navigate Setup Location Navigator Setup gt Locations Define Resource Groups Application Utilities Navigate Setup Organization ResourceGroup Navigator Setup gt Resource Group fin
372. s a component to itself somewhere in the multilevel structure of the bill Navigates to the Transfer Engineering Data window so that you can transfer engineering data to manufacturing Navigates to the Copy Bill Rtg From win dow where you can copy bills or routings Navigate to the Common Bill Rtg window where you can reference a common bill or routing Navigate to the Oracle Product Configurator window Rolling Up Assembly Costs Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Rolling Up Cumulative Lead Times page 7 18 Checking for Bill Loops page 2 23 Transferring or Copying Engineering Items Bills and Routings Oracle Engineering User s Guide Copying Bill and Routing Information page 2 14 Referencing Common Bills and Routings page 2 17 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Oracle Bills Of Material Character Mode Forms and Corresponding GUI Windows The following table matches character mode forms with their corresponding GUI windows or processes This information supplements Windows and Navigator Paths in the product online documentation Text in brackets indicates a button The GUI Navigator paths are based on the BOM Supervisor responsibility The following table presents more information on any window navigate to the window and choose the help icon Character Mode Form and Menu Path GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path Assemble to Order Reports and Processes NNavig
373. s all Picking Headers associated with a delivery picking line An instruction to pick a specific quantity of a specific item for a specific order Each pick slip contains one or more picking lines depending on the number of distinct items released on the pick slip picking rule A user defined set of criteria to define the priorities Order Management uses when picking items out of finished goods inventory to ship to a customer Picking rules are defined in Oracle Inventory pipe Allows sessions in the same database instance to communicate with each other Pipes are asynchronous allowing multiple read and write access to the same pipe plan horizon The span of time from the current date to a future date that material plans are generated Planning horizon must cover at least the cumulative purchasing and manufacturing lead times and is usually quite a bit longer planned order A suggested quantity release date and due date that satisfies net item requirements MRP owns planned orders and may change or delete the orders during subsequent MRP processing if conditions change MRP explodes planned orders at one level into gross requirements for components at the next lower level dependent demand Planned orders along with existing discrete jobs also serve as input to capacity requirements planning describing the total capacity requirements throughout the planning horizon Glossary 52 planning production sequence number
374. s for a routing 1 2 You can create and calculate lead times from the Routings form Navigate to the Routings form Query on a manufacturing item s routing Routings 3 13 See Also 3 From the main menu select Tools gt Compute Lead Times or Rollup Lead Times If the item s Effectivity Control attribute is set to Date a concurrent program will run automatically to calculate the lead times If the item s Effectivity Control attribute is set to Model Unit Number a window will display to enter the Unit Number parameter When this number is entered a concurrent program will launch calculating lead time attributes See Bills of Material Attribute Group Oracle Inventory User s Guide Calculating Lead Times page 7 17 Defining a Department page 1 19 Creating a Standard Operation page 3 22 Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents page 2 22 Defining a Resource page 1 24 Deleting Components and Operations page 4 6 Attaching Files page 2 22 Creating a Bill of Material page 2 10 Routing Report page 8 24 Customizing the Presentation of Data in a Folder Oracle Applications User s Guide Creating a Network Routing Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide Defining Parameters Oracle Shop Floor Management User s Guide Switching Between Primary and Alternate Routings From the Routings window you can switch between Primary and Alternate routings Prerequisites L
375. s included in the manufacturing lead time calculation by specifying an item range or item category range when you submit the manufacturing lead time program Using item categories you can segregate the manufactured items whose lead times you manually maintain from those items you include in the manufacturing lead time calculation You can also limit the parent items included in the cumulative lead time calculations by using item categories Recomputing Lead Times Changes to routing and resource usages can impact an item s lead times After each change you make to a routing adjusting usages adding operations and so on recalculate the manufacturing lead time for the item Prerequisites L You must define a bill of material for the parent item and member items who s lead time is to be calculated See Defining Bills of Material Q You must define a routing for each item that will be used in the lead time calculation See Defining a Routing Q You must define a lead time lot size for the parent item who s lead time is to be calculated See Defining a Routing gt Tocalculate lead times 1 Navigate to the Calculate Lead Times window See Submitting Requests Oracle Applications User s Guide 2 Selecta Type Request calculate or roll up lead times without a report Set calculate lead times and produce either the Bills of Material Structure Report or the Routing Report Manufacturing Lead Times 7 17 See Also
376. s not default the operation You can still record movements into out of and through the operation by overriding the default in Work in Process Count Point on Autocharge on Assign this count point to operations you want to automatically default as destination operations in the Move Transactions window You should always assign this count point to the final operation in a routing to insure that you record move transactions into the operation and then record completion transactions You can automatically complete and charge operations in a routing with this count point Work in Process automatically completes an operation and charges its WIP Move resources to your job or schedule when you record a move transaction through or beyond the operation For operations that you always perform in a routing you can also monitor assembly moves into out of and through the operation For example choose this count point for critical time intensive or bottleneck operations Overview of Shop Floor Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Overview of Routings page 3 2 Routings 3 29 Schedule Field Yes No default Prior Next Charge Type Field 3 30 Include this resource when scheduling an op eration from a job or repetitive schedule and calculating manufacturing lead time for the assembly Do not include scheduling the operation or calculating the lead time Include this resource when scheduling a job or schedule b
377. s of Material designates the shift s Is the date a shift workday exception day off calendar date as a non workday for the shift No Bills of Material designates the shift s calendar date as a workday for the shift Setting Up 1 33 Organizations See Also For each organization you specify the calendar to use All scheduling functions use the calendar you specify Detailed scheduling uses specific resource availability information by department and shift to schedule resources Dynamic lead time offsetting however uses an organization s workday calendar and does not consider shift information Creating a Workday Exception Template page 1 34 Creating a Workday Calendar page 1 36 Organization Parameters Window Oracle Inventory User s Guide Creating a Workday Exception Template Exception templates define and group deviations to your workday calendar such as holidays downtime or scheduled maintenance When defining a workday calendar specify which days or shifts are on and off The workday calendar in combination with the exceptions to it determine the work pattern for each organization 1 34 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P To create a workday exception template 1 Navigate to the Exception Templates window S TT Templates yS n Da O LI Ed E x x 2 Enter a unique name for the exception template Enter
378. s of material 2 5 Alternates window Creating Alternates 1 14 Archive deleted entities 4 4 Assemble to Order model 5 3 Assemble to Order ATP check 5 15 autocreate configuration items 5 24 catalog configurations 5 21 deactivate configuration item 5 41 hybrid 5 3 item 5 3 model bill 5 8 5 17 multi level 5 3 multi organization 5 4 operation sequence inheritance 5 20 option class bill 5 10 option dependent routing steps discrete manufacturing 5 18 flow manufacturing 5 20 option quantity ranges 5 13 planning bill 5 6 standard bills 5 12 Assigned units 3 19 Assigning a completion subinventory and locator 3 16 Assigning Descriptive Elements 2 18 Assigning Operation Resources 3 18 Assigning Substitute Components 2 19 Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions 1 42 Attaching Files 2 20 3 6 Autocharge 3 23 3 27 AutoCreating Configuration Items 5 24 Available 24 hours resource 1 21 Available to Promise check 5 15 B Backflush 3 23 Transactions 3 5 3 13 Base model 2 24 Basis 2 13 2 41 Basis option class 5 14 Basis type 1 26 3 18 3 20 Batching autocreate configuration items 5 25 Bill component validation rules 2 43 Bill components 2 6 Bill Components Comparison window Comparing Bills of Material 2 30 Index 1 Bill Document
379. s that can replace the primary resource group Enter the substitute resource name This is one of the resources that may replace the resource group Enter the Replacement Group Number This is used to group substitute resources together to substitute a resource group Select a basis type by which to charge and schedule the resource The default is the basis specified for the resource Enter a value for the Rate or Amount in either the Usage or Inverse fields That is enter the resource consumed at the operation per item or per lot or it s inverse Entering a value for either field updates the other field Viewing Resource Usage page 3 25 Work in Process Standard Cost Transactions Oracle Cost Management User s Guide Resource Report page 8 22 3 20 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Rolling Up Costs See Also From the Routing window you can perform a single level cost rollup for the currently selected routing To roll up costs 1 Navigate to the Cost Rollup window Do this by choosing Cost Rollup from the Tools menu Enter the cost type Enter the effective date and time to determine the structure of the bill of material to use in the cost rollup You can use this to roll up historical and future bill structures using current rates and component costs The default is the current date and time Indicate whether to include unimplemented engineering change orders ECO Indicate whether to produc
380. s window Defining Bill or Routing Operation Documents 2 20 Bill loops See Checking for Bill Loops Bill of material operation sequence 2 34 Bill of Material Loop report 8 5 Bill of material types 2 2 Bills of Material configuration item 5 32 parameters 1 9 Bills of material 2 2 access control 2 9 copying 2 14 creating 2 10 field reference 2 34 importing 1 45 item sequence 2 34 mass change 2 22 2 23 model defining 5 8 5 17 model and option type 5 5 multi level 5 11 multi organization 5 12 option class defining 5 10 planning 5 6 profile options 2 9 referencing 2 16 standard 5 12 Bills of Material window Checking for Bill Loops 2 21 Referencing Common Bills and Routings 2 17 Creating a Bill of Material 2 11 Budgetary account See Glossary C Calculating manufacturing lead times 7 17 Calendar Dates window Assigning Workday or Shift Exceptions 1 42 Reviewing the Workday Calendar 1 43 Capacity Changes window Assigning Resources to a Department 1 22 Catalog configuration item 5 21 5 37 Category set when calculating lead times 7 18 Index 2 Change order type 2 23 Charge type 1 26 3 30 Check ATP 2 13 2 41 Class department 1 18 Common Bill window 2 16 Referencing Common Bills and Routings 2 17 Comparing bills of material 2 30 Completion locat
381. s within the number of days you specify See Program Parameters Definition Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide page 5 25 for information on how the system calculates an expected work order release date 4 Ifyou chose not to enter an order number enter the organization in which you want to autocreate configuration items 5 Indicate whether to compute the standard lead time for each new configuration item by actually scheduling a test WIP job to be completed on the requirement date If this is disabled the default the configuration item lead time value is derived from the value of the base model 6 Indicate whether you want to perform flow calculations If you specify Yes Total Product Cycle Time Yield Net Planning and Operation times will be calculated for your processes operations and events in the configuration flow routing If you specify No the data will be copied from the model Batch Versus Online Mode You can launch the AutoCreate Configuration Items concurrent program to create configuration items for one or more sales orders You can also create a configuration item for a single sales order line online from the Sales Order pad Action button Progress Order Sales Order Pad Action Button Progress Order You can create a configuration item for one sales order line from the Sales Order Pad By default this mode does not give you the option to perform lead time calculation or flow routing calculations
382. sales order pick slip for the Promotional Computer configuration along with any other chosen options and included items See Mutually Exclusive and Optional page 2 42 Option Class Bills of Material Option class bills can contain standard components options as well as other option classes Oracle Manufacturing lets you structure any number of levels of option classes within option classes so you can create an indented hierarchy of choices You can also specify a mandatory component under any option class in the indented structure that would automatically be included anytime you choose an option from that option class or a lower level option class In the example below the indented Promotional Computer exploded to three levels contains one option class at level 2 Accessories and three option classes CPU Monitor and Operating System in its structure at level three The Accessories option class has one included item Peripherals Guide and three options Mouse LaserPrinter and Scanner When you place an order for the Promotional Laptop you can choose as many options as you like or no options from the Accessories option class If you choose at least one option you automatically include the Peripherals Guide for the order The Laptop Computer bill contains three option classes at level 3 and the Monitor option class has two option classes VGA and EGA in its structure at level 4 The Monitor option class has a mandatory compo
383. same project and task The procurement cost is collected in Oracle Projects project inventory Any and all items and costs in both project subinventories and project work in process jobs Project Inventory Inventory owned by a project and task You can segregate inventory by project using project locators project job A standard or non standard WIP job with a project reference The valuation accounts associated with this type of job will be project work in process Any balance remaining in such a job when it is closed will be reported as a variance project locator A locator with a project or project and task reference See also common locator project locator A locator with project and task segment values A project locator is a logical partition of a physical location by project and task project manufacturing The type of project that uses Projects with Manufacturing to track the costs of a manufacturing related project against a project budget Project Manufacturing A type of manufacturing environment where production requirements are driven by large projects You can plan schedule process and cost against a specific project or a group of projects If Oracle Project Manufacturing is installed and the Project References Enabled and Project Control Level parameters are set in the Organization Parameters window in Oracle Inventory you can assign project and if required task references to sales orders planned orders j
384. same BOM Item Type attribute For example if the new bill is a model bill you can only copy existing bills that are model bills Know the structure of the bill you are copying since the copy function only copies single level components of the bill For example if the parent item whose bill you want to copy has single level components that are subassemblies the bill copy function will not copy the components of the subassembly When you copy the bill from another organization the components on the bill you are copying must exist in the target organization The supply subinventories and locators are not copied Substitute component items must also exist in the target organization to be copied When copying an engineering bill to manufacturing only those single level manufacturing not engineering components are copied Routings Only When copying from another organization only operations occurring in departments that exist in both organizations are copied Similarly only resources that exist in both organizations are copied The resource must also belong to the same department in the target organization To copy bill or routing information 1 Navigate to the Copy Bill Rtg From window Do this by choosing the Tools menu item and then choosing Copy Bill Rtg From Bills of Material 2 15 Es Copy Bill M1 Copy From Organization M1 Seattle Manufacturing Alternate Engineering Bill Revision 8 9 08 MAR 2001 19 27 26
385. sary 35 item Anything you make purchase or sell including components subassemblies finished products or supplies Oracle Manufacturing also uses items to represent planning items that you can forecast standard lines that you can include on invoices and option classes you can use to group options in model and option class bills item attribute control level To maintain item attributes at the item master attribute level or the organization specific level by defining item attribute control consistent with your company policies For example if your company determines serial number control at headquarters regardless of where items are used you define and maintain serial number attribute control at the item master level If each organization maintains serial number control locally they maintain those attributes at the organization specific level item attributes Specific characteristics of an item such as order cost item status revision control COGS account etc item based resource A resource whose usage quantity is the amount required per assembly unit you make item category See category item flexfield A feature that lets you define the structure of your item identifier according to your business requirements You can define up to twenty segments for your item item groups A group of related products that can be added to one or more price lists item master level attribute An item attribute you control at the i
386. schedule upon completion of the current repetitive schedule autoschedule You can set upa supplier site item to have the schedules built by the concurrent program autoschedule The schedules are not built by the Scheduler s Workbench available capacity The amount of capacity available for a resource or production line available to promise ATP Ability to promise product for customer orders based on uncommitted inventory planned production and material available to promise quantity See available to promise ATP available to promise rule A set of Yes No options for various entities that the user enters in Oracle Inventory The combination of the various entities are used to define what is considered supply and demand when calculating available to promise quantity Available To Reserve ATR The quantity of on hand stock available for reservation It is the current on hand stock less any reserved stock Available To Transact ATT Quantity on hand less all reservations for the item which may be transferred within or out of inventory average costing A costing method which can be used to cost transactions in both inventory only and manufacturing inventory and work in process environments As you perform transactions the system uses the transaction price or cost and automatically recalculates the average unit cost of your items Glossary 8 average cost variance A variance account used to hold amounts generated
387. se orders from this requisition The approvals can come from any employee but a requisition is fully approved only when an employee who has enough authority approves it If you require encumbrance or budgetary control for requisitions a requisition is fully approved only when an employee with sufficient approval authority approves and reserves funds for the requisition requisition encumbrance A transaction representing an intent to purchase goods and services as indicated by the reservation of funds for a requisition Purchasing subtracts requisition encumbrances from funds available when you reserve funds for a requisition If you cancel a requisition Purchasing creates appropriate reversing entries in your general ledger requisition pool Requisition lines that are approved not cancelled and not yet ona purchase order reschedule To modify the schedule of a discrete job You can reschedule a discrete job by changing the start date completion date job quantity or any operation date on the routing Planning can automatically reschedule jobs that are not firm based on planning requirement changes rescheduling assumption A fundamental piece of planning process logic that assumes that existing open orders can be rescheduled into closer time periods far more easily than Glossary 65 new orders can be released and received As a result the planning process does not create planed order receipts until all scheduled receipts
388. sing Oracle Quality offset percent An operation resource field that holds the percent of total manufacturing lead time required for previous operations For example if all operations require a total of ten hours to perform and the offset percent for a resource is 40 then the resource is used four hours after the start of the first operation offsetting account The source or opposite side of an accounting entry For example when you charge resources in Work in Process you debit a resource to your work in process resource valuation account the offset account is the credit to the resource absorption account omit An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer prevent Purchasing from including certain displayed requisition lines when creating a purchase order or RFQ If you omit a requisition line Purchasing returns it to the available pool of requisition lines on account Payments where you intentionally apply all or part of the payment amount to a customer without reference to a debit item On account examples include prepayments and deposits on account credits Credits you assign to your customer s account that are not related to a specific invoice You can create on account credits in the Transaction window or through AutoInvoice on hand quantity The physical quantity of an item existing in inventory on hold job schedule A job or repetitive schedule not accepting further activity and is therefore untransactable one time
389. ss of certifying funds available You can check funds when you enter a requisition purchase order or invoice You can check funds when you enter actual budget or encumbrance journals When you check funds the transaction amount is compared with your funds available and you are notified whether funds are available for your transaction Checking funds does not reserve funds for your transaction funds reservation The creation of requisition purchase order or invoice encumbrance journal entries Purchasing immediately updates your funds available balances and creates an encumbrance journal entry in which you can post in your general ledger This is also the process of reserving funds available You can reserve funds when you enter actual budget or encumbrance journals When you reserve funds the amount of your transaction is compared with your funds available and you are notified on line whether funds are available G general ledger transfer The process of creating a postable batch for the general ledger from summarized inventory work in process activity for a given period Using Journal Import in General Ledger you can create a postable batch in your general ledger After running Journal Import you can post your journal using the General Ledger posting process General Services Administration See GSA generic agreement An agreement without a specified customer so it is available to all customers See also agreemen
390. standard or one time notes document sets A grouping of shipping documents you can run from the Confirm Shipments window drop shipment A method of fulfilling sales orders by selling products without handling stocking or delivering them The selling company buys a product from a supplier and has the supplier ship the product directly to customers DRP See distribution resource planning due date The date when scheduled receipts are currently expected to be received into inventory and become available for use dunning letters A letter you send to your customers to inform them of past due debit items Receivables lets you specify the text and format of each letter You can choose to include unapplied and on account payments duplicate An exception Oracle Alert located for the same action set during a previous alert check Oracle Alert does not consider a detail action to contain a duplicate exception until Oracle Alert sends the final action level to a specific action set and then locates the same exception for the same action set again For example if on Monday Oracle Alert notifies a buyer that a supplier shipment is overdue then on Tuesday Oracle Alert finds the shipment is still overdue you can choose whether Oracle Alert should re notify the buyer or suppress the message Glossary 24 dynamic distribution You can use output variables to represent electronic mail IDs When you define mail message alert actions in Ora
391. suit your business needs If you want or need to change them you should perform that setup step You need to perform Optional steps only if you plan to use the related feature or complete certain business functions The diagram below is described in detail in the Setup Checklist table and Setup Steps section that follow 1 4 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Step BOM 1 Profile Options Step BOM 2 Exception Tables Step BOM 3 Workday Calendar Step BOM 4 Workday Calendar to Organization Step BOM 9 Simulation Sets Y Step BOM 10 UN Locations os a ae Step BOM 11 VN Departments Step BOM 12 Resources and Resource Shifts to ee Step BOM 5 Define Parameters Step BOM 6 Units of Measure Step BOM 7 Resources Y Step BOM 8 Resource Groups Step P 13 Overheads Oracle Bills of Material Setup Step BOM 17 Standard Instructions Step BOM 18 Change Order Types Z Se Step BOM 19 Delete Constraints Ze Step BOM 14 d 14 Overheads with ac Step are 15 Alternates Step 16 Standard BOM Comments Setting Up Step Required The following table lists setup steps and a reference to their location within the Wizard For a detailed description of AIW reference levels see the Oracle Applic
392. system on hand quantities physical tags A tool for recording the on hand quantity for a specific item in a specific location A tag is most commonly a slip of paper posted at the item s location pick list A report that lists all component requirements sorted by supply type fora particular discrete job repetitive schedule or production line pick release An order cycle action to notify warehouse personnel that orders are ready for picking pick release batch See picking batch pick release rule A user defined set of criteria to define what order lines should be selected during pick release pick release sequence rule The rule for pick release that decides the order in which eligible order line details request item reservations from Oracle Inventory pickslip Internal shipping document pickers use to locate items to ship for an order If you use standard pick slips each order will have its own pick slip within each picking batch If you use the consolidated pick slip the pick slip contains all orders released in that picking batch pick slip grouping rule Criterion for grouping together various types of pick slips The rule dictates how the Pick Slip Report program groups released lines into different pick slips pick to order A configure to order environment where the options and included items in a model appear on pick slips and order pickers gather the options when they ship the order Alternative to manufacturi
393. t customer family agreement GSA General Services Administration A customer classification that indicates the customer is a U S government customer and pricing for products on the GSA price sheet should reflect the fixed pricing of the GSA contract Whenever a product is on the GSA price sheet it cannot be sold to commercial customers for the same or less price than the government customer gross requirements The total of independent and dependent demand for an item before the netting of on hand inventory and scheduled receipts gross weight The weight of the fully loaded vehicle container or item including packed items and packaging material guarantee A contractual obligation to purchase a specified amount of goods or services over a predefined period of time H hard reservation Sales order demand that you firm by reserving selected inventory for the purposes of material planning available to promise calculations and customer service issues hazard class A category of hazardous materials Most hazardous materials belong to only one hazard class Some materials belong to more than one hazard class and some materials do not belong to any If a material belongs to more than one hazard class you should list these classes in a specific order hidden collection plan A collection plan that consists entirely of context elements Data collection for these collection plans occurs in the background and requires no user
394. t size you can enter a lead time lot size Bills of Material then calculates manufacturing lead time using this value rather than the standard lot size If an item does not have a value for the standard or lead time lot size Bills of Material uses a quantity of one to compute manufacturing lead times Note If you enter a lead time lot size for an item consider the item s planning lot size to accurately offset lead times For planned items with a fixed order quantity set the lead time lot size to the fixed order quantity If a planned item has varying lot sizes assign a lead time lot size that represents the typical lot size Oracle Manufacturing uses routing operation and resource information to compute fixed variable and processing lead times for manufactured items Lead times are not calculated for purchased items even if they have a routing When computing manufacturing lead times primary routings are automatically updated with lead time and offset percents As with the item lead time attributes you can also manually assign these values 7 6 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Lead Time Percent Offset Percent Oracle Manufacturing stores the lead time percent for each routing operation as the percent of manufacturing processing lead time required for previous operations calculated from the start of a job to the start of an operation For example if an item s manufacturing lead time is two days and the primary r
395. t Medium used to instruct a bank to disburse funds to the account of a site location or supplier payment terms The due date and discount date for payment of an invoice For example the payment term 2 10 Net 30 lets a customer take a two percent discount if payment is received within 10 days with the balance due within 30 days of the invoice date pending A status where a process or transaction is waiting to be completed pending costs The future cost of an item resource activity or overhead Not used by cost transactions See frozen costs percent of capacity The required hours divided by the available hours for any given department resource and shift combination period See accounting period period expense An expense you record in the period it occurs An expense is typically a debit period based costing A method of collecting and reporting costs by period rather than by some other method such as by discrete jobs Used primarily in costing repetitive schedules and non standard expense discrete jobs periodic alert An alert that checks your database for the presence of a specific condition according to a schedule you define phantom assembly An assembly Work in Process explodes through when it creates the bill of material for a job or schedule A particular assembly can be a phantom assembly on one bill and a subassembly on another physical inventory A periodic reconciliation of item counts with
396. t factor A profile must be created where you can indicate how much the Operation Sequence Number will increment every time a new operation is generated You can change the generated value if necessary in the Routings form Valid values range from 1 to 9999 You can assign any component to any operation on the routing including all components to the same operation such as the first operation The planning process assigns material requirement dates based on the operations to which you assign each component You can define bills of material for items with or without routings If you use routings you can either define the bill first or the routing first With component to operation assignments you can schedule and issue component material to the operation that requires the component on the exact requirement date You can also assign the same component on the bill to different operations on the routing with different usage quantities for each assignment Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also If no routing exists for the item all components default to operation sequence 1 You cannot change this value until you define a routing for the item After you define the routing you can update your bill of material with routing operations if you want specific component to operation assignments If you define the routing before you define a bill assign components to valid routing operations or an operation sequence 1 when you define
397. t overlap with those of another For example if you must introduce three new components to a bill ina specific order you should assign each change to the appropriate parent item revision So component 1 of revision B may be effective today component 2 of revision C tomorrow then component 3 of revision D may be effective the following day If there are two operations on a routing and you replace the first operation with a new operation you should set the effective date for the new operation to the date the operation you are replacing becomes inactive Effective dates can be either the current date or a date in the future you cannot enter a date in the past For components the default effective date is the later of the current date or the date entered for the bill If an inactive date already exists for the operation sequence item combination the default effective date of any subsequent rows with the same operation sequence item combination is the same as the inactive date That means that the subsequent operation sequence item combination becomes effective immediately after the previous one becomes inactive You cannot assign duplicate components to the same operation with overlapping effective date ranges For example suppose component A001 at operation 10 is effective from 10 JAN to 14 FEB You may not add another component A001 at operation 10 to the bill with an effective date of 10 FEB 2 38 Oracle Bills of Material User s G
398. t tasks eliminates nonvalue added operations and combines related tasks into a single task This planning engine consists of only one phase the snapshot in which all planning tasks occur memory based snapshot Part of the snapshot phase listing the items for planning and performing selected snapshot tasks message The text or data Oracle Alert sends when it finds an exception while checking an alert message action An action that displays or logs a message for the user In Oracle Quality message actions differ from mail message actions message distribution A line on the bottom of your form that displays helpful hints warning message and basic entry errors On the same line ZOOM PICK EDIT and HELP lamps appear to let you know when Zoom QuickPick Edit and online help features are available See also distribution list methods variance For Work in Process this quantity variance is defined as the difference between the standard resources required per the standard bill of material and the standard resources required per the work in process bill of material This variance is included with the resource efficiency variance midpoint scheduling A scheduling technique where you specify an operation start or end date and Oracle Manufacturing automatically calculates production start and end dates min max planning An inventory planning method used to determine when and how much to order based on a fixed user entered m
399. te Labor Costs process Oracle Projects will calculate the cost of all expenditure items assigned to the Straight Time expenditure type class Formerly known as system linkage expense item Anything you make purchase or sell including components subassemblies finished products or supplies and that does not carry a cost Also known as a non asset item expense subinventory Subdivision of an organization representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items such as a storeroom where no value exists but the quantities may be tracked exchange rate A rate that represents the amount of one currency you can exchange for another at some point in time Oracle Applications use the daily periodic and historical exchange rates you maintain to perform foreign currency conversion re evaluation and translation You can enter and maintain daily exchange rates for Oracle Bills of Material to use to perform foreign currency conversion Oracle Bills of Material multiplies the exchange rate times the foreign currency to calculate functional currency exchange rate type A specification of the source of an exchange rate For example a user exchange rate or a corporate exchange rate See also corporate exchange rate spot exchange rate explode An AutoCreate option that lets a buyer split a single requisition line for an item into one or more requisition lines for different items Use this option to expand a requisition
400. te to the Deletion Groups window See Deletion Groups VSM re o MEN 7 NIENENEEENENENNNNM Last Submitted EU Wi Common Bills Only E Archive Entities to Delete Details Organization Description Type Alternate E Y If you are updating an existing deletion group the date it was last submitted if applicable is displayed 2 Enter a group name to identify the group of entities to delete Select what type of entity to delete UD Attention If the type of entity to delete is a bill then the checkbox Common Bills Only is enabled If you check this box only bills referencing the specified bill entities are considered for deletion If you do not check this box then both bills referencing the specified bill entities and non specified bill entities are considered for deletion 4 Indicate whether to create a delete group for the current organization an organization hierarchy or all organizations Note Create a delete group for the current organization by specifying the entities Item Bill Routing and subentities Deleting Information 4 3 4 4 Component Routing to be deleted You can enter an organization hierarchy name while creating the delete group for the current organization In this case processing is done for all subordinate organizations in the chosen organization hierarchy You can create a delete group for all organizations In this case processing is done for all organizations
401. tem master level as opposed to controlling at the organization level Glossary 36 item sequence The sequence of the component item on the bill of material used to sort components on reports item specification See specification type item status Code used to control the transaction activity of an item item specific conversion The conversion formula you define between the primary unit of measure for an item and another unit of measure from the same unit class If you define a conversion rate for a specific item Purchasing uses the item specific conversion rate instead of the standard conversion rate for converting between units for that item item type A term used by Oracle Workflow to refer to a grouping of all items of a particular category that share the same set of item attributes used as a high level grouping for processes For example each Account Generator item type e g FA Account Generator contains a group of processes for determining how an Accounting Flexfield code combination is created See also item type attribute item type attribute A feature of a particular Oracle Workflow item type also known as an item attribute An item type attribute is defined as a variable whose value can be looked up and set by the application that maintains the item An item type attribute and its value is available to all activities in a process Item Validation Organization The organization that contains your master list of
402. tem of alerts and action sets that focuses attention on time sensitive or critical information shortens your reaction time and provides faster exception distribution Exception reporting communicates information by either electronic mail messages or paper reports expected receipts report A printed report of all expected receipts for a time period and location you specify expenditure A group of expenditure items incurred by an employee or organization for an expenditure period Typical expenditures include Timecards and Expense Reports expenditure category Animplementation de fined grouping of expenditure types by type of cost expenditure organization For timecards and expense reports the organization to which the incurring employee is assigned unless overridden by organization overrides For usage supplier invoices and purchasing commitments the incurring organization entered on the expenditure expenditure type An implementation defined classification of cost you assign to each expenditure item Expenditure types are grouped into cost groups expenditure categories and revenue groups revenue categories expenditure type class An additional classification for expenditure types indicating how Oracle Projects processes the expenditure types Oracle Projects predefines five valid expenditure type classes Straight Time Overtime Expense Reports Usages and Supplier Invoices For example if you run the Distribu
403. th other market leading technology vendors to address technical Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers For additional information visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http www oracle com accessibility Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation JAWS a Windows screen reader may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however JAWS may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle Corporation does not own or control Oracle Corporation neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites Other Information Sources Online Documentation You can choose from many sources of information including online documentation training and support services to increase your knowledge and understanding of Oracle Bills of Material If this guide refers you to other Oracle Applications documentation use only the Release 11i versions of those guides All Oracle Applications documentation is available online HTML or PDF e Online Help The new features section in the HTML help
404. the Processor descriptive element should be assigned automatically based on options chosen under this class The Bills of Material window lets you specify descriptive elements for each model or option class bill of material If you want the autocreate configuration items process to concatenate descriptions you must specify descriptive elements for each model and option class bill An example of a concatenated description might be 486 VGA DOS The following table presents descriptive elements assigned to an ordered configuration 5 22 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also Descriptive Elements for Bills of Material Item Item Type Element Name Operating System Option Class Defining Items Oracle Inventory User s Guide Overview of Bills of Material page 2 2 On hand and Availability Oracle Inventory User s Guide Overview of Routings page 3 2 Configure to Order 5 23 AutoCreate Configuration Items Once you have entered and scheduled a sales order for an assemble to order model Bills of Material automatically defines a new unique configuration item complete with a bill of material and routing based on the model primary bill and primary routing for every non phantom model in your configuration These model BOMs and routings are created in the manufacturing organization defined by your sourcing rules When Bills of Material creates a configuration item for a sales order it links the new top level con
405. the status is listed as Error choose the Error button to review why the deletion failed Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide P To specify operations to delete 1 Navigate to the Operations window Do this by choosing the Operations button from the Deletion Groups window Enter the operation sequence to delete The Results tabbed region displays the status as Error Check OK or Deleted A status of Pending indicates the delete program has not run yet The Effectivity tabbed region displays the effective date range of the operation See Effective Date Fields page 2 37 If the status is listed as Error choose the Error button to review why the deletion failed P Tocheck entities for deletion is Attention If you perform a check on the item bill and routing the check program will return an Error status for the item This simply indicates that the item s bill or routing still exists In this case disregard the Error status for the item Choose the Check Group button to verify whether any deletion constraints are violated The delete concurrent program updates the entity s status to Error or Check OK A status of Pending indicates the delete program has not run yet gt To submit entities for deletion Choose the Delete Group button to submit the delete concurrent program The delete concurrent program first performs a check for all the entities listed for deletion Once the check succeeds the
406. ther calendar and another calendar shift e copying a set of exceptions from another calendar An exception template allows you to create groups of exception dates and apply them to different calendars You can define multiple workday exception templates that define different holidays and scheduled down times for different organizations Multiple exception templates can be applied to the same calendar As each template is applied new exception dates are added to the exception list for that calendar Conflicts on a particular date between one template and another are resolved as follows Setting Up 1 31 Shifts 1 32 e if the exception date already exists in the target calendar it is not copied e if the exception on day falls on a workday the exception is copied but is redundant and has no effect on the calendar e if the exception off day falls on a non workday the exception is copied but is redundant and has no effect on the calendar This allows you to define different holidays or scheduled down times for example for organizations in different countries Different organizations can use the same calendar but apply different exception dates In addition you can apply the same exception dates to different organizations You can optionally define exception templates lists of exception dates before you set up your workday calendar Then when you define your calendar you can choose an exception template and apply its exce
407. ther you can choose one or many options within an option class Oracle Order Management uses the Mutually Exclusive check box in combination with the Optional check box to determine the number of option items you can or must choose to order the components of the option class bill Refer to the table below for details on how the Optional check box and the Mutually Exclusive check box work together 2 42 Description X Optional Optional default Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Mutually Exclusive default Choose any number or no options on the option class bill Choose at least one option on the option class bill X Mutually Exclusive Choose one or no options on the option class bill Choose one and only one option on the option class bill Check ATP Available To Promise Field Check ATP indicates whether to perform an ATP check on the component The default is enabled if both the parent s Check Component ATP item attribute is Yes and the component s Check ATP item attribute is set to Yes You can update this check box only if all of the following are true e Selected the Check ATP attribute of the component item e Selected the Check Component ATP item attribute of the assembly item e Entered a component quantity greater than 0 Minimum and Maximum Quantity Fields Basis Field Oracle Order Management uses the minimum and maximum quantities to determine the number of
408. tifies a service your customer has recorded against a particular product installation If you order service against a product in Oracle Order Entry Oracle Service automatically links the product and the service being recorded against the product by creating a serviced customer product A customer product installation may have more than one serviced product serviced installation A synonym for serviced customer product set of books A financial reporting entity that partitions General Ledger information and uses a particular chart of accounts functional currency and accounting calendar This concept is the same whether or not the Multi organization support feature is implemented set transaction read only An ORACLE RDBMS command that allows you to consider all the transactions committed after its execution No transactions are written after the command is executed See read consistency setback days The number of days set back from the assembly due date that a resource is required to build the assembly setup time The time required to for a machine or work center to convert from the production of one item to another shelflife The amount of time an item may be held in inventory before it becomes unusable shift A scheduled period of work for a department within an organization Glossary 72 ship confirm A feature that allows shipping personnel to verify that they have shipped or backordered the items of an order line
409. tifies each approver when an ECO s approval status is set to Ready to approve approval tolerance Determines when Inventory automatically makes a cycle count adjustment or holds adjustments for approval You specify this as a percentage of quantity or value approve An action you take to indicate that you consider the contents of the purchasing document to be correct If the document passes the submission tests and you have sufficient authority Purchasing approves the document approved A purchase order or requisition status that indicates a user with appropriate authorization approved the purchase or requisition Purchasing verifies that the purchase order or requisition is complete during the approval process archiving The process of recording all historical versions of approved purchase orders Purchasing automatically archives a purchase order when you approve it for the first time Purchasing subsequently archives your purchase orders during the approval process if you have increased the revision number since the last time you approved the purchase order ASC X12 Accredited Standards Committee X12 group This group is accredited by ANSI and maintains and develops the EDI standards for the United States and Canada Glossary 5 ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard file format used for transmission and storage ASCII is a seven bit code with an eighth bit used for parity ASL Approved
410. tion You cannot add components to common bills The following table presents the validation rules used for adding components to different bill types Bill Component Validation Rules PTO PTO ATO PTO Option Item ATO Option ATO Standard Description Planning Model Class kit Model Class Item Item Planning Bill PTO Model Bill PTO Option Class Bill PTO Item kit Configuration Item Bill ATO Model Bill 2 46 Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide PTO PTO ATO PTO Option Item ATO Option ATO Standard Description Planning Model Class kit Model Class Item Item ATO Option No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Class Bill ATO Item Bill No No No No No Standard Item No No No No No Bill Yes You can add this component type to this bill type No You cannot add this component type to this bill type m These components must be optional a These components are treated as standard subassemblies Tm The Configuration Item must have a Base Model ATO Model and ATO Option class components will get WIP Supply Type Phan tom Configured items are Assemble to Order ATO items that have a base item identification ATO items have the Assemble to Order attribute set to Yes Pick to Order PTO items have the Pick Component attribute set to Yes For example if the parent item is a PTO model it is not allowed to have a component that is a planning item it is allowed to have a compon
411. tions sssri ire cee eee eee 5 21 AutoCreate Configuration Items eese 5 24 Steps Taken to AutoCreate Configuration Items 5 24 Batch Versus Online Mode so iesroscsrrcresiirmerorseass 5 25 Program Parameters Definition ssssse 5 25 Release Date Option s nica ainsi rg SRI D Re me Rees 5 25 Lead Time Calculation Option sssssse 5 26 Item Numbering Methods 0000 nr cece 5 27 Match and Reserve sssees ea ae ees 5 29 Match and Reserve for Multi Level Configurations 5 30 Weight and Volume Calculation 0 0 000 5 30 Resulting Bills of Material 00 cece eee 5 32 Single Level Bill of Material 0 00 e eee 5 32 Multi Level Bill of Material 0 0 eee eee 5 33 Resulting ROutings cesse viersterren eer RC Rn Rd 5 34 Cost Rollup 4 ntt eR Rm RE ewe ORTA HORT RTT 5 36 Pxeconfiguring Items sssecesiects e teer gent pce a eee heres 5 36 vi Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Configuration Item Catalog 6 6c cece ionns sas 5 37 Deactivating Configuration Items ssssssss 5 41 Manufacturing Scheduling eese 6 1 Overview of Manufacturing Scheduling 6 2 Oracle Manufacturing Products and Scheduling 6 2 Detailed Scheduling i2 prr rete Eee ee tk 6 3 Repetitive Line Scheduling
412. to define specific attributes for items per customer class customer and ship to bill to location The loading order forward reverse inverted non inverted is an example of this attribute customer location See customer address customer merge A program that merges business purposes and all transactions associated to that business purpose for different sites of the same customer or for unrelated customers customer phone A phone number associated with a customer You can also assign phone numbers to your contacts customer product An entity that identifies a serviceable item or customer product The customer product identifies not only the product and the customer but also the product quantity the product s serial number if the product is under serial number control and has been assigned a serial number the location of the product the various contacts such as service administration support and bill to associated with the product A customer may have several of the same customer products customer product line number A customer trading partner may have several production lines at their manufacturing facility The production line number identifies a specific production line where goods should be delivered to as per the customers specifications customer production sequence number A customer trading partner may have a particular sequence in which items are built into an assembly For example the customer m
413. to location on a given date in a given vehicle Multiple deliveries can be grouped into a single departure A single delivery may include items from different sales orders and may include backorders as well as regular orders delivery line A shippable and booked line from the planning pool which has been allocated to a delivery After allocation the line is no longer available in the planning pool After the delivery is closed the delivery line will also be considered closed demand Projected inventory issue transactions against an item For Order Management it is an action you take to communicate current or future product needs to manufacturing demand class A classification of demand to allow the master scheduler to track and consume different types of demand A demand class may represent a particular grouping of customers such as government and commercial customers Demand classes may also represent different sources of demand such as retail mail order and wholesale demand history Historical inventory issue transactions against an item demand interface A data collection point that collects and stores all sales order demand and reservation information demand management The function of recognizing and managing all demands for products to ensure the master scheduler is aware of them This encompasses forecasting order management order promising available to promise branch warehouse requirements and other sour
414. to lower level components A value of Buy means the item is usually purchased The Planner Workbench defaults the implementation type for planned orders for the item to Purchase requisition The planning process does not pass demand down from purchased items to lower level components make to order An environment where customers order unique configurations that must be manufactured using multiple discrete jobs and or final assembly orders where the product from one discrete job is required as a component on another discrete job Oracle Manufacturing does not provide special support for this environment beyond the support it provides for assemble to or der manufacturing mandatory component A component in a bill that is not optional Bills of Material distinguishes required components from options in model and option class bills of material Mandatory components in pick to order model bills are often referred to as included items especially if they are shippable mandatory collection plan A collection plan for which quality results must be entered before the parent transaction can be saved manual numbering A numbering option to let someone assign numbers manually to documents employees and suppliers manual rescheduling The most common method of rescheduling scheduled receipts The planning process provides reschedule messages that identify scheduled receipts that have inconsistent due dates and need dates The impact o
415. ts and is included in your month end accounts payable liability balance This account balance is cleared when the invoice is matched in Payables accrual accounting Recognition of revenue when you sell goods and recognition of expenses when a supplier provides services or goods Accrual based accounting matches expenses with associated revenues when you receive the benefit of the good and services rather than when cash is paid or received accrued receipts account The account used to accrue your uninvoiced expense receipts at month end by Purchasing The accrued receipts account may or may not be the same account as the accounts payable accrual account However both accrual accounts represent additional payable liabilities you include in your month end accounts payables liability balance You reverse the accrued receipts account by reversing the month end journal in the following period accumulate available An option used to calculate ATP information where available quantity of an item is carried from one ATP period to the next action A user initiated step taken to resolve an incident action message Output of the MRP process that identifies a type of action to be taken to correct a current or potential material coverage problem action result A possible outcome of an order cycle action You can assign any number of results to a cycle action Combinations of actions results are used as order cycle action prerequisites Se
416. ts of the most recently acquired goods FIFO cost flow does not have to match the physical flow of inventory feeder program A custom program you write to transfer your transaction information from an original system into Oracle Application interface tables The type of feeder program you write depends on the environment from which you are importing data FIFO costing Costing method where it is assumed that items that were received earliest are transacted first final assembly order A discrete job created from a configuration or an assemble to order item and linked to a sales order Also known as final assembly schedule final close A purchase order control you can assign to prevent modifications to or actions against completed documents lines and Glossary 28 shipments by final closing them Final closed documents are not accessible in the corresponding entry windows and you cannot perform the following actions against final closed entities receive transfer inspect deliver correct receipt quantities invoice return to supplier or return to receiving financial EDI The exchange of machine readable financial documents between a corporation and its financial institution The exchange includes both collections and disbursements in the form of credit and debit transfers related bank balance banking transactions and account analysis finished good Any item subject to a customer order or forecast See also product
417. ttribute to User defined time fence Master Scheduling MRP calculates the demand time fence for the item as the plan date or the next workday if the plan is generated on a non workday plus the value you enter here department An area within your organization that consists of one or more people machines or suppliers You can also assign and update resources to a department department class A group of departments departure A set of order lines that will be shipped in a specific vehicle on a given date time The departure may include multiple deliveries if items being shipped are destined for different customers or customer ship to locations departure order The order of jobs within a schedule group Jobs are normally sequenced within a schedule group in the order that they must be loaded onto the truck for shipment See also schedule group and build sequence Glossary 22 departure planned lines Scheduled delivery lines that have been planned for a specific departure departure planning The process of planning the necessary vehicles and grouping the scheduled shipments that will be included in a given departure Planning the departure requires consideration of vehicle load capacities container capacities and in the case of 866 sequenced transactions the loading order required to satisfy the customer s specified unload order departure planning mandatory A flag that indicates whether a scheduled shipment line must b
418. turing A manufacturing environment where you build assemblies in discrete jobs or batches Different from a repetitive production environment where you build assemblies on production or assembly lines at a daily rate dispatch report A report that prioritizes planned production work based on operation schedule dates and times disposition Directions that describe how to dispose of inventory affected by an ECO Engineering uses ECO disposition for informational purposes only distribution account An account where you record material material overhead resource outside processing and overhead charges incurred by a discrete job or repetitive assembly In a standard costing system this is where you record your standard costs distribution list A predefined list of electronic mail IDs that you can use rather than entering individual mail IDs To Cc and Bcc when defining mail message alert actions in Oracle Quality distribution resource planning DRP Application of replenishment inventory calculations to assist in planning of key resources contained in a distribution system such as sourcing and transport DRP is an extension of distribution requirements planning which applies MRP logic to Glossary 23 inventory replenishment at branch warehouses dock date The date you expect to receive a purchase order document reference A message that precisely identifies the document or part of document you want to describe using
419. uantity Related unchecked if the usage quantity of the component is four you could for example define six or more reference designators On Use one reference designator per usage of the component The component usage quantity must be a positive integer in order for you to use this option When the bill requires a quantity of four of a given component you assign four reference designators to that component one for each usage 3 Do one of the following e Enter a reference designator for the component A reference designator must be ten characters or less e Choose the Add Range or Delete Range button to open the Range window Enter a prefix and a suffix for the range of reference designators to add or delete For example if you enter A as the Prefix 1 and 4 as the starting and ending values and XYZ as the Suffix AIXYZ A2XYZ A3XYZ and A4XYZ are the reference designators Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide To number reference designators use the Starting Value field to define the beginning value for a range of reference designators Then either enter the number of values to add or delete or define the ending value in the Ending field 4 Save your work Assigning Substitute Components You can assign any number of substitute items to each bill component and you can assign the same substitute item to more than one component The substitute item quantity is the quantity needed to replace the full component
420. uction line line lead time basis A repetitive scheduling technique that uses a fixed line lead time for all production on a repetitive line or calculates the line lead time based on each assembly s routing line priority The line priority indicates which production line to use to build assemblies You create repetitive schedules on the highest priority line first then if the line capacity is less than demand additional repetitive schedules are created on other lines in decreasing order of their line priority For example if demand is for 1000 units per day on two lines with a daily capacity of 750 the line with the highest priority is loaded with 750 and the lower priority line with 250 For lines of equal priority the load is allocated evenly across lines line production hours The number of hours per day that production line operates This is equal to the difference between the line start time and line stop time line start time The time a production line starts running every day The line start time is used to schedule repetitive schedules on a line line stop time The time a production line stops running every day The line stop time is used to schedule repetitive schedules on a line line type Determines whether a purchasing document line is for goods services or any other type that you define The line type also determines whether the document line is based on price and quantity or on amount list price Your b
421. ug operations that are performed on a portion of the assemblies you process If you issue components with a supply type of Operation pull to an assembly at a Count Point off Autocharge off count point operation Routings 3 27 3 28 Work in Process backflushes these components when you move out of the Count Point off Autocharge off count point operation into a count point operation that allows backflushing Work in Process never pulls components with a supply type of Assembly pull from Count Point off Autocharge off count point operations However you must turn Backflush on for Count Point off Autocharge off count point operations The Backflush field should always be turned on for the last operation in a routing See Overview of Shop Floor Control Oracle Work in Process User s Guide In the following example the routing has five operations The second and fourth operations are not count points and you must explicitly move units in and out of the fourth operation if you want to charge the job or repetitive schedule for the consumed resources The following table presents an example of count point operations Count Point Operations Operation Description Count Sequence Point Assembly 1 Yes Auto charge Backflush Instructions Assembly 2 No Auto charge Painting No Direct Rework charge Packaging Yes Auto charge Count Point off Autocharge on 10 charge If color and texture do not me
422. uide See Also Yield Field See Also Use Oracle Master Scheduling MRP to identify any overlapping effective dates Item and Routing Revisions page 2 6 The yield is the percentage of the component that survives the manufacturing process A yield factor of 0 90 means that only 9076 of the usage quantity of the component on a bill actually survives to be incorporated into the finished assembly To compensate for the expected gain or loss any function that explodes a bill of material increases or decreases the material requirements for the component based on the yield component requirements component usage quantity component yield For example when Master Scheduling MRP plans a component with a usage quantity of 10 units per assembly and a component yield of 50 or 0 5 the resulting component requirements increase to 20 units per assembly Note You cannot enter component yield for an option class item or for any components of a planning bill The default is 1 indicating 100 yield no loss or gain Material Requirements Planning Oracle Master Scheduling MRP User s Guide Bills of Material 2 39 Planning Percent Field See Also Master Scheduling MRP uses component planning percentages in forecast explosions through planning model and option class bills of material Assign planning percentages to components on model option class and planning bills Note You can assign planning percents to ma
423. ule receipt dates and or quantities are not altered automatically by the MRP system scheduled resource A resource on a routing that is scheduled by Work in Process scheduling Order scheduling includes assigning demand or reservations warehouses shipment dates and lots or subinventories to an order line scrap Anintraoperation step where you move assemblies that cannot be reworked or completed scrap account An account that you may use to charge scrap transactions seasonality Repetitive pattern from year to year with demand for some periods considerably higher than others security rules Order Entry The control over the steps in the order process where you no longer allow users to add delete or cancel order or return lines or change order or return information Seiban manufacturing A type of manufacturing environment where demand and supply are identified by Seiban numbers to peg supply to demand This numbering system is widely used in Japan and Korea Seiban number An abbreviation for a manufacturing number in Japan and Korea It is the key production control number for all manufacturing entities including sales order planned order requisition purchase order and discrete job senior tax authority The first tax location in your sales tax structure This segment does not have a parent location For example if your sales tax structure is State County City then State is the senior tax authority sequenc
424. ults the value of this attribute to zero This attribute lets you minimize short term disruption to shop floor schedules by restricting short term rate change suggestions and applies to repetitively planned items only Glossary 1 acceptance Supplier acknowledgement of a purchase order that indicates that the supplier agreed to and accepted the terms of the purchase order accepted quantity The quantity of inventory items received from a customer based on a return authorization for which you credit the customer See also received quantity account See accounting flexfield account alias An easily recognized name or label representing an account charged on miscellaneous transactions You may view report and reserve against an account alias Account Generator A feature that uses Oracle Workflow to provide various Oracle Applications with the ability to construct Accounting Flexfield combinations automatically using custom construction criteria You define a group of steps that determine how to fill in your Accounting Flexfield segments You can define additional processes and or modify the default process es depending on the application See also activity Workflow function item type lookup type node process protection level result type transition Workflow Engine accounting class See WIP accounting class accounting flexfield A feature used to define your account coding for accounting distributions For example
425. unt of a component you want to issue to build an assembly that actually becomes part of that assembly Or the amount of a component you require to build plus the amount of the component you lose or waste while building an assembly For example a yield factor of 0 90 means that only 90 of the usage quantity of the component on a bill actually becomes part of the finished assembly compression days The number of days the planning process suggests you compress the order in other words reduce the time between the start date and the due date concurrent manager Components of your applications concurrent processing facility that monitor and run time consuming tasks for you without tying up your terminal Whenever you submit a request such as running a report a concurrent manager does the work for you letting you perform many tasks simultaneously concurrent process A task in the process of completing Each time you submit a task you create a new concurrent process A concurrent process runs simultaneously with other concurrent processes and other activities on your computer to help you complete multiple tasks at once with no interruptions to your terminal concurrent queue A list of concurrent requests awaiting completion by a concurrent manager Each concurrent manager has a queue of requests waiting in line If your system administrator sets up simultaneous queuing your request can wait to run in more than one queue con
426. utings gt Standard Operations Define Value Set Value Sets Navigate Setup Flexfields Validation Sets Navigator Setup gt Flexfields gt Validation gt Sets Oracle Bills of Material Special Menu B 5 Character Mode Form and Menu Path Define Workday Calendar Navigate Setup Calendar Define Define Workday Exception Sets Navigate Setup Calendar ExceptionSets Delete Item Information Navigate Delete Delete Items Report Navigate Report Setup Item Indented Bill of Material Cost Report Navigate Report Setup Cost Indented Item Cost Information Report Navigate Report Setup Item Cost CostItem GUI Window or Process and Navigation Path Calendar Dates Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Dates or Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Shifts gt Dates or Shifts Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Shifts or Shift Times Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Shifts gt Times or Workday Calendar Navigator Setup gt Calendars or Workday Patterns Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Workday Pattern or Exceptions Navigator Setup gt Calendars gt Dates gt Exceptions Exception Templates Navigator Setup gt Exception Templates Deletion Groups Navigator Delete Groups or Navigator Routings gt Delete Groups Delete History Report Navigator Reports gt Delete Groups Use the Cost Management responsibility and See Oracle Cost Management Us
427. vel cost three way matching Purchasing performs three way matching to verify the purchase order receipt and invoice information match within tolerance time bucket A unit of time used for defining and consuming forecasts A bucket can be one day one week or one period time fence A policy or guideline established to note where various restrictions or changes in operating procedures take place The planning process cannot create or reschedule orders within the planning time fence This gives the planner the ability to stabilize the plan and thereby minimizing the nervousness of the system time phased requirements Requirements for resources where the need dates are offset by the lead time for those resources to move An intraoperation step where assemblies can either be completed to a subinventory or wait to be moved to another operation tolerance percentage The percentage amount by which customers are allowed to exceed their credit limit and still pass the credit check total lead time An item s fixed lead time plus the variable lead time multiplied by the order quantity For lead time calculations Bills of Material sets the order quantity to the item s standard or lead time lot size The planning process uses the total lead time for an item in its scheduling logic to calculate order start dates from order due dates Glossary 80 total quantity accepted The total number of accepted items for the receipt line
428. version The spot exchange rate is usually a quoted market rate that applies to the immediate delivery of one currency for another SOL validation statement A statement written in SOL to customize action details SQL script action An SQL script invoked by action rule processing in Oracle Quality standard actions Order Entry provides a selection of predefined actions called standard actions Use these actions along with those you define yourself to create your customized order cycles See also cycle action order cycle Glossary 75 standard bill of material A bill of material for a standard item such as a manufactured product or assembly standard component A mandatory component used to assemble an ATO assemble to order item or configuration standard comments Standard text you can assign to discrete jobs or repetitive schedules Special instructions or details specific to a particular job or circumstance standard costing A costing method where a predetermined standard cost is used for charging material resource overhead period close job close and cost update transactions and valuing inventory Any deviation in actual costs from the predetermined standard is recorded as a variance standard discrete job A type of discrete job that controls material and resources for standard production assemblies standard item Any item that can have a bill or be a component on a bill except planning items option classes
429. w lead time and or material control information and whether to use planning percents when calculating component quantities Any field that is checked here causes a corresponding tabbed region to appear on the Indented Bill of Material window Choose the Find button to explode the bill Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide See Also The Indented Bill of Material window appears and displays the first level of the bill The Components window contains the following tabbed regions some of which may be disabled according the display options you selected Item Details Bill Details Quantities Effectivity Material Control Lead Time Order Entry Costing and Shipping 8 Use the control buttons to expand or collapse portions of the indented bill You can only expand up to the explosion level indicated in the Find window Using Query Find Oracle Applications User s Guide Using Query Operators Oracle Applications User s Guide Searching For Information Oracle Applications User s Guide Performing Query by Example and Query Count Oracle Applications User s Guide Item and Operation Sequence page 2 36 Effective Date Fields page 2 37 Yield page 2 39 Planning Percent page 2 40 Supply Types Oracle Work in Process User s Guide Supply Subinventory and Locator page 2 42 Extended Quantity page 2 41 Mutually Exclusive and Optional Components page 2 42 Check ATP page 2 43 Minimum and Maximum Quantity page 2
430. way Redwood Shores CA 94065 USA Phone 650 506 7000 Or send electronic mail to mfgdoccomments us 2oracle com If you would like a reply please give your name address and telephone number below Thank you for helping us improve our documentation
431. when on hand inventory quantity is negative and the unit cost of a subsequent receipt is different from the current unit cost backflush operation A routing operation where you backflush component items backflush transaction A material transaction that automatically issues component items into work in process from inventory when you move or complete the assembly Also known as post deduct or pull See pull transaction backorder An unfulfilled customer order or commitment Oracle Order Entry allows you to create backorders automatically or manually from released order lines See also Pick Release backordered lines Unfulfilled order line details which have failed to be released at least once by Pick Release or have been backordered by Ship Confirm backward consumption days A number of days backwards from the current date used for consuming and loading forecasts Consumption of a forecast occurs in the current bucket and as far back as the backward consumption days If the backward consumption days enters another bucket the forecast also consumes anywhere in that bucket When loading a forecast only forecasts of the current date minus the backward consumption days are loaded Therefore you can use backward consumption days to load forecasts that are past due backward scheduling A scheduling technique where you specify a production end date and Oracle Manufacturing calculates a production start date based on detailed sch
432. y backward scheduling the pre vious operation from the end of this resource Use this option when setup resources can work in parallel with previous operations The lead time is calculated the same way Work in Process schedules the job or repeti tive schedule Include this resource when scheduling a job or repetitive schedule by forward scheduling the next operation from the start of this re source Use this option when the teardown of the current operation can overlap with the execution of the next operation The lead time is calculated the same way Work in Pro cess schedules the job or repetitive schedule You can determine how each resource is charged in Work in Process When an operation completes Work in Process records the units applied to the job or repetitive schedule in the resource unit of measure You can charge resources manually or automatically Oracle Bills of Material User s Guide Manual PO Receipt PO Move WIP Move Work in Process does not automatically charge this type of resource to a job or repeti tive schedule You must manually charge it to a job or repetitive schedule using Work in Process Automatically charge this resource upon re ceipt of a purchase order in Oracle Purchas ing The assemblies are not automatically moved to the next operation upon receipt so you must manually move them using Work in Process Automatically charge this resource upon re ceipt of a purchase order in Ora
433. y based on the routing and bill of material structure resource sequence The number that indicates the order of a resource in an operation relative to other resources resource set A grouping of bills of resources resource hours The number of hours required by a repetitive schedule discrete job or planned order resource units The number of units of a resource available for this resource at this operation resource transaction A transaction where you automatically or manually charge resource costs to a discrete job or repetitive schedule resource units applied A quantity you charge to a job or repetitive schedule for work performed by a resource The quantity is expressed in the unit of measure of the resource For example if the unit of measure of a resource is hours and the resource works 10 hours you apply 10 resource units to the job or repetitive schedule resource UOM item A purchasing item associated with an outside resource that you purchase using the resource s unit of measure responsibility Determines the data forms menus reports and concurrent programs you can access in Oracle Applications It is linked directly to a data group Several users can share the same responsibility and a single user can have multiple responsibilities result See action result result code In Oracle Workflow the internal name of a result value as defined by the result type See also result type result value resu
434. y the value you enter for Safety Stock Percent Safety Stock Percent An item attribute the planning process uses when you set the Safety Stock attribute for the item to MRP planned percent The planning process dynamically calculates safety stock quantities for the item by multiplying the average gross requirements for the item over the time period defined by the value you enter for Safety Stock Bucket Days by the value you enter for Safety Stock Percent safety stock quantity The quantity suggested by MRP as additional supply needed for safety stock This quantity can change according to an effective date set in Inventory sales channel A term that indicates the method used to generate a sales order such as Telemarketing or Direct Marketing You can use this attribute of an order to classify orders for reporting purposes Glossary 69 sales credit Credits that you assign to your salespeople when you enter orders invoices and commitments Credits can be either quota or non quota and can be used in determining commissions See also non revenue sales credit revenue sales credit sales tax structure The collection of taxing bodies that you will use to determine your tax authority State County City is an example of a Sales Tax Structure Oracle Bills of Material adds together the tax rates for all of these components to determine a customer s total tax liability for an order salesperson A person responsible for the sa
435. ybrid manufacturing environment repetitive line scheduling A method of scheduling repetitive production on a line that considers line speed line start and stop times lead time and workday calendar repetitive manufacturing A manufacturing environment where you build assemblies repetitively on production lines rather than in discrete jobs or batches repetitive MRP plan A set of optimal repetitive schedules which satisfy a given master schedule for repetitive items repetitive planning The planning of demand or production for an item in terms of daily rates rather than discrete quantities Repetitive Planning item attribute An item attribute the planning process uses to decide whether to plan material requirements for the item in terms of discrete quantities or repetitive daily rates repetitive planning period A period defined as a number of days that smooths the production rate over time With repetitive planning periods you can prevent your Glossary 64 planned repetitive production rate from fluctuating too frequently repetitive processing days The number of days you plan to work on a repetitive schedule from the first unit start date to the last unit start date repetitive rate The daily rate for a repetitive schedule See daily rate repetitive schedule The process of dividing suggested aggregate repetitive schedules and allocating them across individual production lines based on predefined line prior
436. your purchase approval process and better control your planned expenditures You can set up separate encumbrance types for each stage in your purchasing cycle to track your spending at Glossary 25 each level Examples of encumbrance types are commitments requisition encumbrances and obligations purchase order encumbrances end assembly pegging A Pegging item attribute option the planning process uses to decide when to calculate and print end assemblies for the item on the Planning Detail Report Even if you do not select this option you can still calculate and view end assemblies for the item on line end date Signifies the last date a particular quantity should be forecast on a forecast entry From the forecast date until the end date the same quantity is forecast for each day week or period that falls between that time frame An entry without an end date is scheduled for the forecast date only end item Any item that can be ordered or sold See finished good and product engineer to order An environment where customers order unique configurations for which engineering must define and release custom bills for material and routings Oracle Manufacturing does not provide special support for this environment beyond the support it provides for assemble to or der manufacturing engineering change order ECO A record of revisions to one or more items usually released by engineering engineering change order department A
437. zed the demand for an item or configuration and opened a work order to supply the demand Once the work order is complete and the finished product is received in inventory WIP transfers a reservation for the finished product to the sales order The schedule status for the order line or order line detail is then changed to be Reserved supply subinventory The subinventory you use as a primary source of supply to meet a specific material requirement in a discrete job or repetitive schedule In Release 9 this is the backflush subinventory for pull material or the primary issue subinventory for push material supply type A bill of material component field that controls issue transactions from inventory to work in process Supply types supported by Work in Process include Push Assembly pull Operation pull Bulk Supplier Phantom and Based on bill system A grouping of customer products System Items Flexfield A flexfield that allows you to define the structure of your item identifier according to your business requirements You can choose the number and order of segments such as product and product line the length of each segment and much more You can define up to twenty segments for your item Also known as Item Flexfield system linkage An obsolete term See expenditure type class T TAKT time Operationalcycletime the rate at which products need to be manufactured on the line Aids in establishing the daily rates

Oracle Bills of Material User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents